Service Manual: Better Service Better Reputation Better Profit

MODEL
NP216/NP215/NP115/NP110
NP216G/NP215G/NP210G/NP115G/NP110G
NP216J/NP215J/NP210J/NP115J/NP110J
NP216+/NP215+/NP210+/NP115+/NP110+
Portable Projector
SERVICE MANUAL PART No. 3N9911161 (1st Edition)
Better Service
Better Reputation
Better Profit
Copyright Cautions for Maintenance Service

1. Contents 2. Safety precautions 3. User's manual
4. Troubleshooting 5. Method of adjustments 6. Serviceman mode
7. Cleaning 8. Circuit sescrition 9. Method of disassembly
10. Disassembly 11. Packaging 12. Part list
13. Connection diagram 14. Block diagram 15. Schematic diagrams
Back cover
SAFETY CAUTION:
Before servicing this chassis, it is important that the service
technician read and follow the “Safety Precautions” and “Product
Safety Notice” in this Service Manual.
WARNING:
SHOCK HAZARD - Use an isolation transformer when servicing.
NEC DISPLAY SOLUTIONS, LTD.

(1) Copyright (C) NEC Display Solutions, Ltd.
All Rights Reserved.
This document contains confidential information.
Unauthorized copying, duplication, distribution, or
republication is strictly prohibited.
(2) The contents of this manual are subject to change

without prior notice.
Cautions for Maintenance Services
1. How to start the set under the condition that the LAMP COVER ASSY and TOP COVER ASSY are
removed
The Lamp Cover switch (COVER PWB ASSY) of this model is mounted on the top of the Power Case.
The set cannot be started if the LAMP COVER ASSY and TOP COVER ASSY are left removed.
This is because the Lamp Cover switch can be turned OFF only if the LAMP COVER ASSY is removed.
Follow the steps shown below when intending to start up the set under the condition that the LAMP
COVER ASSY and TOP COVER ASSY are removed.
1 Provide for carton (or cardboard paper)

Length: 30 ~ 40 (mm), Depth: 50 ~ 60 (mm), Thickness: 2 ~ 3 (mm)
2 Insert the carton (or cardboard paper) in the right side of the Lamp Cover switch.
(Insert it along the Lamp Cover switch.)
ON by PUSH
LAMP COVER SWITCH
Insert the carton
Insert it in the red

frame section.
Caution: Under the condition that the TOP COVER ASSY and LAMP COVER ASSY are removed, the
set can be started by the method described above. However, the set cannot be started under
the condition that the TOP COVER ASSY only is mounted and the LAMP COVER ASSY is
removed.
2. Cautions for the installation of LAMP COVER ASSY and TOP COVER ASSY
When installing the LAMP COVER ASSY and TOP COVER ASSY on the set, the TOP COVER ASSY only
should be mounted first. Then, the LAMP COVER ASSY can be mounted.
If the installation work is carried out in the state that the LAMP COVER ASSY is mounted on the TOP
COVER ASSY, the Lamp Cover switch may be damaged by the embossed part of the LAMP COVER
ASSY.
CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS.................................................................................................................................... 2-1
USERS MANUAL ..................................................................................................................................................1

Important Information (U)
Quick Setup Guide (U/G)
Quic Setup Guide (G2)
TROUBLESHOOTING......................................................................................................................................... 4-1
Operational checks.......................................................................................................................................... 4-1
Power block..................................................................................................................................................... 4-2
I/O Sync and ADC blocks (Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115NP110).......................................................... 4-3
I/O Sync and ADC blocks (Applicable to NP216)............................................................................................ 4-5
DMD Driver Block............................................................................................................................................ 4-8
AWired LAN................................................................................................................................................... 4-10
Audio block (Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115NP110)..............................................................................4-11
Audio block (Applicable to NP216)................................................................................................................ 4-12
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS............................................................................................................................ 5-1

PC control software for service....................................................................................................................... 5-1
Model-Specific Data Writing Procedure for NP215 Series............................................................................ 5-16
Optical Adjustment........................................................................................................................................ 5-22
SERVICEMAN MODE.......................................................................................................................................... 6-1
CLEANING........................................................................................................................................................... 7-1
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................................................... 8-1

I/O terminals (Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115NP110).............................................................................. 8-1
I/O terminals (Applicable to NP216)................................................................................................................ 8-1
Input signals.................................................................................................................................................... 8-2
Circuit operation.............................................................................................................................................. 8-3
A list of ICs used is shown below (Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115NP110).............................................. 8-6
A list of ICs used is shown below (Applicable to NP216)................................................................................ 8-7
Power Up Sequence....................................................................................................................................... 8-8
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY............................................................................................................................. 9-1
DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................................................................. 10-1
Main body (Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115NP110).............................................................................. 10-1
Main body (Applicable to NP216)................................................................................................................. 10-2
Engine sassy................................................................................................................................................. 10-3
PACKAGING.......................................................................................................................................................11-1
PART LIST......................................................................................................................................................... 12-1

NP216/NP215/NP115/NP110........................................................................................................................ 12-1
NP216G/NP215G/NP210G/NP115G/NP110G.............................................................................................. 12-6
NP216J/NP215J/NP210J/NP115J/NP110J..................................................................................................12-11
CONNECTION DIAGRAM................................................................................................................................. 13-1
BLOCK DIAGRAM............................................................................................................................................. 14-1
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS.................................................................................................................................. 15-1
1-1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER. NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING
TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
This symbol warns the user that uninsulated voltage within the unit
may have sufficient magnitude to cause electric shock. Therefore, it is
dangerous to make any kind of contact with any part inside of this unit.
This symbol alerts the user that important literature concerning the
operation and maintenance of this unit has been included.
Therefore, it should be read carefully in order to avoid any problems.
ATTENTION
RISQUE D'ELECTROCUTION
NE PAS OUVRIR
MISE EN GARDE: AFIN DE REDUIRE LES RISQUES D' ELECTROCUTION, NE

PAS DEPOSER LE COUVERCLE, IL N'Y A AUCUNE PIECE
UTILISABLE A L'INTERIEUR DE CET APPAREIL. NE CONFIER
LES TRAVAUX D'ENTRETIEN QU'A UN PERSONNEL QUALIFIE.
Ce symbole a pour but de prévenir I' utilisateur de la présence d'

une tension dangereuse, non isolée se trouvant à l' intérieur de l'
appareil. Elle est d' une intensité suffisante pour constituer un risque
d' électrocution. Eviter le contact avec les pièces à l' intérieur de cet
appareil.
Ce symbole a pour but de prévenir l' utilisateur de la présence d'

importantes instructions concernant l' entretien et le fonctionnement de
cet appareil. Par conséquent, elles doivent être lues attentivement afin
d' éviter des problèmes.
WARNING
HEATSINK MAY BE ENERGIZED.
TEST BEFORE TOUCHING.
Heat sink located on the power board, is electrified.
mark is putted on the primary heat sink.
Pay attention to this area.
2-1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
During servicing carefully observe the following. 5. LAMP

Be very careful of the lamp because it generates high
1. OBSERVE ALL PRECAUTIONS heat while it is used at high voltage. When replacing
Items and locations that require special care during the bulb, make sure it is cool enough.
serv-icing, such as the cabinet, chassis, and parts are
labelled with individual safety instructions. Carefully 6. LENS
comply with these instructions and all precautions in Do not look into the lens during projection. This
the instruction manual. important to avoid damage to the eyes.
2. BE CAREFUL OF ELECTRIC SHOCK 7. SERVICING

The chassis carries an AC voltage. If you touch the At the time of repair or inspection services, use an
chassis while it is still alive, you will get a severe earth band (wrist band), without fail.
shock. If you think the chassis is alive, use an isolating
transformer or gloves, or pull out the plug before 8. RUN A COMPLETE SAFETY CHECK AT THE
replacing any parts. COMPLETION OF SERVICING
Afte r co mp l e ti o n o f se rvi ci n g , co n fi rm th a t a ll
3. USE SPECIFIED PARTS screws, parts, and wiring, removed or disconnected
The components have been chosen for minimum for servicing, have been returned to their original
flammability and for specific levels of resistance value positions. Also examine if the serviced sections and
and withstand voltage. Replacement parts must peripheral areas have suffered from any deterioration
match these original specifications. Parts whose as a result of servicing. In addition, check insulation
specifications are particularly vital to safe use and between external metallic parts and blades of wall-
maintenance of the set are marked on the circuit outlet plugs. This examination is indispensable in
diagrams and parts list. confirming complete establishment of safety.
Substitution of these parts can be dangerous for you
and the customer, so use only specified parts. (Insulation check)
Pull out a plug from a wall outlet to disconnect the
4. REMOUNT ALL PARTS AND RECONNECT ALL connection cable. Then turn on the POWER switch.
WIRES AS ORIGINALLY INSTALLED Use a 500V megger (Note 2) and confirm that the
For safety, insulating tape and tubes are used insulation resistance is 1MΩ or more between each
throughout, but some lift-off parts on the printed wiring terminal of the plug and exposed external metal (Note
board require special attention. 1). If the measured value is below the specified level,
All wires are positioned away from high-temperature then it is necessary to inspect and fix the set.
and high-voltage parts, and, if removed for servicing,
they must be retuned precisely to their original (Note 1)
positions. Exposed external metal....RGB input terminals, control
terminals, etc.
(Note 2)
If a 500V megger is not available for an unavoidable
reason, then use a circuit tester or the like for inspection.
2-2
Portable Projector
NP216/NP215/NP210/
NP115/NP110
User’s Manual
The NP210 is not distributed in North America.

3rd edition, April 2010
• DLP and BrilliantColor are trademarks of Texas Instruments.

• IBM is a trademark or registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
• Macintosh, Mac OS X and PowerBook are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• Microsoft, Windows, Windows 7, Windows Vista, and PowerPoint are either a registered trademark or trademark
of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• MicroSaver is a registered trademark of Kensington Computer Products Group, a division of ACCO Brands.
• XPAND is a trademark of X6D Ltd.
• Other product and company names mentioned in this user’s manual may be the trademarks or registered trade-
marks of their respective holders.
NOTES
(1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission.
(2) The contents of this user’s manual are subject to change without notice.
(3) Great care has been taken in the preparation of this user’s manual; however, should you notice any question-
able points, errors or omissions, please contact us.
(4) Notwithstanding article (3), NEC will not be responsible for any claims on loss of profit or other matters
deemed to result from using the Projector.
Important Information
Safety Cautions
Precautions
Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC NP216/NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110 projector and keep
the manual handy for future reference.
CAUTION
To turn off main power, be sure to remove the plug from power outlet.
The power outlet socket should be installed as near to the equipment as possible, and should be easily
accessible.
CAUTION
TO PREVENT SHOCK, DO NOT OPEN THE CABINET.
THERE ARE HIGH-VOLTAGE COMPONENTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
This symbol warns the user that uninsulated voltage within the unit may be sufficient to cause electrical
shock. Therefore, it is dangerous to make any kind of contact with any part inside of the unit.
This symbol alerts the user that important information concerning the operation and maintenance of this
unit has been provided.
The information should be read carefully to avoid problems.
WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
DO NOT USE THIS UNIT’S PLUG WITH AN EXTENSION CORD OR IN AN OUTLET UNLESS ALL THE PRONGS
CAN BE FULLY INSERTED.
DOC Compliance Notice (for Canada only)

This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regula-
tions.
Machine Noise Information Regulation - 3. GPSGV,

The highest sound pressure level is less than 70 dB (A) in accordance with EN ISO 7779.
Disposing of your used product

EU-wide legislation as implemented in each Member State requires that used electrical and electronic
products carrying the mark (left) must be disposed of separately from normal household waste. This in-
cludes projectors and their electrical accessories or lamps. When you dispose of such products, please
follow the guidance of your local authority and/or ask the shop where you purchased the product.
After collecting the used products, they are reused and recycled in a proper way. This effort will help us
reduce the wastes as well as the negative impact such as mercury contained in a lamp to the human
health and the environment at the minimum level.
The mark on the electrical and electronic products only applies to the current European Union Member
States.
WARNING TO CALIFORNIA RESIDENTS:

Handling the cables supplied with this product will expose you to lead, a chemical known to the State of California
to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.
i
RF Interference (for USA only)
WARNING
The Federal Communications Commission does not allow any modifications or changes to the unit EXCEPT those
specified by NEC Display Solutions of America, Inc. in this manual. Failure to comply with this government regu-
lation could void your right to operate this equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with
the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio / TV technician for help.
For UK only: In UK, a BS approved power cable with moulded plug has a Black (five Amps) fuse installed for use with
this equipment. If a power cable is not supplied with this equipment please contact your supplier.
Important Safeguards
These safety instructions are to ensure the long life of your projector and to prevent fire and shock. Please read them
carefully and heed all warnings.
Installation
• Do not place the projector in the following conditions:
- on an unstable cart, stand, or table.
- near water, baths, or damp rooms.
- in direct sunlight, near heaters, or heat radiating appliances.
- in a dusty, smoky or steamy environment.
- on a sheet of paper or cloth, rugs or carpets.
• If you wish to have the projector installed on the ceiling:
- Do not attempt to install the projector yourself.
- The projector must be installed by qualified technicians in order to ensure proper operation and reduce the risk
of bodily injury.
- In addition, the ceiling must be strong enough to support the projector and the installation must be in accordance
with any local building codes.
- Please consult your dealer for more information.
WARNING
• Do not cover the lens with the lens cap or equivalent while the projector is on. Doing so can lead to melting of
the cap due to the heat emitted from the light output.
• Do not place any objects, which are easily affected by heat, in front of the projector lens. Doing so could lead
to the object melting from the heat that is emitted from the light output.
ii
Place the projector in a horizontal position
The tilt angle of the projector should not exceed 10 degrees, nor should the projector be installed in any way other
than the desktop and ceiling mount, otherwise lamp life could decrease dramatically.
10˚
Fire and Shock Precautions

• Ensure that there is sufficient ventilation and that vents are unobstructed to prevent the build-up of heat inside
your projector. Allow at least 4 inches (10cm) of space between your projector and a wall.
• Do not try to touch the ventilation outlet on the front side as it can become heated while the projector is turned on
and immediately after the projector is turned off.

• Prevent foreign objects such as paper clips and bits of paper from falling into your projector. Do not attempt to retrieve
any objects that might fall into your projector. Do not insert any metal objects such as a wire or screwdriver into
your projector. If something should fall into your projector, disconnect it immediately and have the object removed
by a qualified service personnel.
• Do not place any objects on top of the projector.
• Do not touch the power plug during a thunderstorm. Doing so can cause electrical shock or fire.
• The projector is designed to operate on a power supply of 100-240V AC 50/60 Hz. Ensure that your power supply
fits this requirement before attempting to use your projector.
• Do not look into the lens while the projector is on. Serious damage to your eyes could result.

• Keep any items such as magnifying glass out of the light path of the projector. The light being projected from the
lens is extensive, therefore any kind of abnormal objects that can redirect light coming out of the lens, can cause
unpredictable outcome such as fire or injury to the eyes.
• Do not place any objects, which are easily affected by heat, in front of a projector exhaust vent.
Doing so could lead to the object melting or getting your hands burned from the heat that is emitted from the
exhaust.
• Handle the power cable carefully. A damaged or frayed power cable can cause electric shock or fire.
- Do not use any power cables than the supplied one.
- Do not bend or tug the power cable excessively.
- Do not place the power cable under the projector, or any heavy object.
- Do not cover the power cable with other soft materials such as rugs.
- Do not heat the power cable.
- Do not handle the power plug with wet hands.
• Turn off the projector, unplug the power cable and have the projector serviced by a qualified service personnel
under the following conditions:
- When the power cable or plug is damaged or frayed.
- If liquid has been spilled into the projector, or if it has been exposed to rain or water.
iii
- If the projector does not operate normally when you follow the instructions described in this user's manual.
- If the projector has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.
- If the projector exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need for service.
• Disconnect the power cable and any other cables before carrying the projector.
• Turn off the projector and unplug the power cable before cleaning the cabinet or replacing the lamp.
• Turn off the projector and unplug the power cable if the projector is not to be used for an extended period of
time.
• When using a LAN cable (NP216/NP215 only):
For safety, do not connect to the connector for peripheral device wiring that might have excessive voltage.
CAUTION
• Do not use the tilt-foot for purposes other than originally intended. Misuses such as using the tilt foot to carry or
hang (from the wall or ceiling) the projector can cause damage to the projector.
• Do not send the projector in the soft case by parcel delivery service or cargo shipment. The projector inside the
soft case could be damaged.
• Select [HIGH] in Fan mode if you continue to use the projector for consecutive days. (From the menu, select
[SETUP] → [OPTIONS(1)] → [FAN MODE] → [HIGH].)
• Do not turn off the AC power for 60 seconds after the lamp is turned on and while the POWER indicator is blink-
ing green.
Doing so could cause premature lamp failure.
• Parts of the projector may become temporarily heated if the projector is turned off with the POWER button or if
the AC power supply is disconnected during normal projector operation.
Use caution when picking up the projector.
Remote Control Precautions

• Handle the remote control carefully.
• If the remote control gets wet, wipe it dry immediately.
• Avoid excessive heat and humidity.
• Do not heat, take apart, or throw batteries into fire.
• If you will not be using the remote control for a long time, remove the batteries.
• Ensure that you have the batteries' polarity (+/–) aligned correctly.
• Do not use new and old batteries together, or use different types of batteries together.
• Dispose of used batteries according to your local regulations.
Lamp Replacement
• Use the specified lamp for safety and performance.
• To replace the lamp, follow all instructions provided on page 70.
• Be sure to replace the lamp when the message [THE LAMP HAS REACHED THE END OF ITS USABLE LIFE.
PLEASE REPLACE THE LAMP.] appears. If you continue to use the lamp after the lamp has reached the end
of its usable life, the lamp bulb may shatter, and pieces of glass may be scattered in the lamp case. Do not touch
them as the pieces of glass may cause injury.
If this happens, contact your dealer for lamp replacement.
A Lamp Characteristic
The projector has a high-pressure mercury lamp as a light source.
A lamp has a characteristic that its brightness gradually decreases with age. Also repeatedly turning the lamp on
and off will increase the possibility of its lower brightness.
iv
CAUTION:
• DO NOT TOUCH THE LAMP immediately after it has been used. It will be extremely hot. Turn the projector off
and then disconnect the power cable. Allow at least one hour for the lamp to cool before handling.
• When removing the lamp from a ceiling-mounted projector, make sure that no one is under the projector. Glass
fragments could fall if the lamp has been burned out.
Note for US Residents

The lamp in this product contains mercury. Please dispose according to Local, State or Fed-
eral Laws.
Health precautions to users viewing 3D images

Before viewing, be sure to read health care precautions that may be found in the user’s manual included with
your LCD shutter eyeglasses or your 3D compatible content such as DVDs, video games, computer's video
files and the like.
To avoid any adverse symptoms, heed the following:
- Do not use LCD shutter eyeglasses for viewing any material other than 3D images.
- Allow a distance of 2 m/7 feet or greater between the screen and a user. Viewing 3D images from too close
a distance can strain your eyes.
- Avoid viewing 3D images for a prolonged period of time. Take a break of 15 minutes or longer after every
hour of viewing.
- If you or any member of your family has a history of light-sensitive seizures, consult a doctor before viewing
3D images.
- While viewing 3D images, if you get sick such as nausea, dizziness, queasiness, headache, eyestrain, blurry
vision, convulsions, and numbness, stop viewing them. If symptoms still persist, consult a doctor.
About High Altitude mode

• Set [FAN MODE] to [HIGH ALTITUDE] when using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters
or higher.
• Using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters or higher without setting to [HIGH ALTITUDE]
can cause the projector to overheat and the protector could shut down. If this happens, wait a couple minutes and
turn on the projector.
• Using the projector at altitudes less than approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters and setting to [HIGH ALTITUDE]
can cause the lamp to overcool, causing the image to flicker. Switch [FAN MODE] to [AUTO].
• Using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters or higher can shorten the life of optical com-
ponents such as the lamp.
About Copyright of original projected pictures:

Please note that using this projector for the purpose of commercial gain or the attraction of public attention in a venue
such as a coffee shop or hotel and employing compression or expansion of the screen image with the following func-
tions may raise concern about the infringement of copyrights which are protected by copyright law.
[ASPECT RATIO], [KEYSTONE], Magnifying feature and other similar features.
Turkish RoHS information relevant for Turkish market

EEE Yonetmeliğine Uygundur.
This device is not intended for use in the direct field of view at visual display workplaces. To avoid incommoding reflec-
tions at visual display workplaces this device must not be placed in the direct field of view.
v
Table of Contents
Important Information. ...........................................................................................i
Table of Contents....................................................................................................vi
1. Introduction........................................................................................................... 1
1 What’s in the Box?.......................................................................................................... 1
 Introduction to the Projector........................................................................................... 2
Congratulations on Your Purchase of the Projector.................................................. 2
Features you'll enjoy:................................................................................................ 2
About this user's manual........................................................................................... 3
 Part Names of the Projector........................................................................................... 4
Front/Top................................................................................................................... 4
Rear.......................................................................................................................... 4
Top Features............................................................................................................. 5
Terminal Panel Features........................................................................................... 6
 Part Names of the Remote Control................................................................................ 7
Battery Installation.................................................................................................... 8
Remote Control Precautions..................................................................................... 8
Operating Range for Wireless Remote Control......................................................... 8
2. Installation and Connections...................................................................... 9

 Setting Up the Screen and the Projector........................................................................ 9
Selecting a Location................................................................................................. 9
Throw Distance and Screen Size............................................................................ 10
 Making Connections..................................................................................................... 12
Connecting Your PC or Macintosh Computer.......................................................... 12
Connecting an External Monitor............................................................................. 13
Connecting Your DVD Player with Component Output............................................ 14
Connecting Your VCR............................................................................................. 15
Connecting to a Network (NP216/NP215 only)...................................................... 16
Connecting the Supplied Power Cable................................................................... 17
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)............................................... 18

 Turning on the Projector............................................................................................... 18
Note on Startup screen (Menu Language Select screen)....................................... 19
 Selecting a Source....................................................................................................... 20
Selecting the computer or video source................................................................. 20
 Adjusting the Picture Size and Position........................................................................ 21
Adjust the Tilt Foot.................................................................................................. 22
Zoom....................................................................................................................... 23
Focus...................................................................................................................... 23
 Correcting Keystone Distortion..................................................................................... 24
Correcting Keystone Distortion............................................................................... 24
Adjusting with buttons on the cabinet..................................................................... 24
Adjusting with the remote control............................................................................ 25
 Optimizing Computer Signal Automatically.................................................................. 26
Adjusting the Image Using Auto Adjust................................................................... 26
 Turning Up or Down Volume......................................................................................... 26
vi
Table of Contents
7 Turning off the Projector............................................................................................... 27
 After Use...................................................................................................................... 28
4. Convenient Features. .................................................................................... 29

1 Turning off the Image and Sound................................................................................. 29
2 Freezing a Picture........................................................................................................ 29
 Enlarging a Picture....................................................................................................... 29
 Changing Eco Mode..................................................................................................... 30
5 Checking Energy-Saving Effect [CARBON METER].................................................... 31
6 Preventing the Unauthorized Use of the Projector [SECURITY]....................................... 32
7 Using the Optional Remote Mouse Receiver (NP01MR)............................................. 35
8 Network Setting by Using an HTTP Browser (NP216/NP215 only).............................. 37
 Viewing 3D Images....................................................................................................... 40
5. Using On-Screen Menu. ............................................................................... 43

 Using the Menus........................................................................................................... 43
2 Menu Elements............................................................................................................. 44
3 List of Menu Items........................................................................................................ 45
4 Menu Descriptions & Functions [SOURCE]................................................................. 47
5 Menu Descriptions & Functions [ADJUST]................................................................... 48
6 Menu Descriptions & Functions [SETUP]..................................................................... 55
7 Menu Descriptions & Functions [INFO.]....................................................................... 66
8 Menu Descriptions & Functions [RESET]..................................................................... 68
6. Maintenance....................................................................................................... 69
 Cleaning the Cabinet and the Lens.............................................................................. 69
 Replacing the Lamp..................................................................................................... 70
7. Appendix............................................................................................................... 73
 Troubleshooting............................................................................................................ 73
Indicator Messages................................................................................................. 73
 Specifications............................................................................................................... 76
 Cabinet Dimensions..................................................................................................... 78
 Pin Assignments of D-Sub COMPUTER Input Connector........................................... 79
Mini D-Sub 15 Pin Connector................................................................................. 79
 Compatible Input Signal List......................................................................................... 80
 PC Control Codes and Cable Connection.................................................................... 81
PC Control Codes................................................................................................... 81
Cable Connection................................................................................................... 81
PC Control Connector (D-SUB 9P)......................................................................... 81
 Troubleshooting Check List........................................................................................... 82
 TravelCare Guide.......................................................................................................... 84
vii
1. Introduction
1 What’s in the Box?
Make sure your box contains everything listed. If any pieces are missing, contact your dealer.
Please save the original box and packing materials if you ever need to ship your projector.
Projector
Lens cap
(24F45801)
Power cable VGA signal cable Remote control Batteries (AAAx2)

(US: 7N080236) (7N520073) (7N900881)
(EU: 7N080022)
For North America only

Registration card
Limited warranty
For customers in Europe:

You will find our current valid Guarantee
Policy on our Web Site:
For North America NEC Projector CD-ROM www.nec-display-solutions.com
Quick Setup Guide (7N8N0731) User’s manual
Important Information (7N8N0752) (7N951472)
For other countries than North

America
Quick Setup Guide (7N8N0731 and
7N8N0741)
Important Information (7N8N0752
and 7N8N0762)
1
1. Introduction
 Introduction to the Projector

This section introduces you to your new projector and describes the features and controls.
Congratulations on Your Purchase of the Projector

This DLP® projector is one of the very best projectors available today. The projector enables you to project precise
images up to 300 inches (measured diagonally) from your PC or Macintosh computer (desktop or notebook), VCR,
DVD player or document camera.
You can use the projector on a tabletop or cart, you can use the projector to project images from behind the screen,
and the projector can be permanently mounted on a ceiling*1. The remote control can be used wirelessly.
*1 Do not attempt to mount the projector on a ceiling yourself.
The projector must be installed by qualified technicians in order to ensure proper operation and reduce the risk of bodily
injury.
In addition, the ceiling must be strong enough to support the projector and the installation must be in accordance with any
local building codes. Please consult your dealer for more information.
Features you'll enjoy:

• Quick start & Quick Power Off
7 seconds after turning on the power, the projector is ready to display PC or video images.
The projector can be put away immediately after the projector is powered down. No cool down period is required
after the projector is turned off from the remote control or cabinet control panel.
• Direct Power Off
The projector has a feature called “Direct Power Off”. This feature allows the projector to be turned off (even when
projecting an image) by disconnecting the AC power supply.
To turn off the AC power supply when the projector is powered on, use a power strip equipped with a switch and
a breaker.
• Less than 1W in standby condition with energy saving technology
Selecting [POWER-SAVING] for [STANDBY MODE] from the menu can put the projector in power-saving mode
that consumes only 0.49W (100-130V AC)/0.71W (200-240V AC).
• Carbon Meter
This feature will show energy-saving effect in terms of CO2 emission reduction (kg) when the projector’s [ECO
MODE] is set to [ON].
The amount of CO2 emission reduction will be displayed in the confirmation message at the time of power-off and
in the INFO of the on-screen menu.
• 7W built-in speaker for an integrated audio solution
Powerful 7 watt speaker provides volume need for large rooms.
• Two computer inputs provided (NP216 only)
The NP216 projector comes with two computer input ports (Mini D-Sub15P) with audio inputs (two stereo mini
jacks) as well as composite and S-video inputs with audio inputs (a pair of L/R RCA jacks).
• DLP® projector with high resolution and high brightness
High resolution display - up to UXGA compatible, XGA (NP216/NP215/NP210)/ SVGA (NP115/NP110) native
resolution.
• AUTO POWER ON and AUTO POWER OFF features
The AUTO POWER ON(AC), AUTO POWER ON(COMP.), AUTO POWER OFF, and OFF TIMER features eliminate
the need to always use the POWER button on the remote control or projector cabinet.
2
1. Introduction
• Preventing unauthorized use of the projector
Enhanced smart security settings for keyword protection, cabinet control panel lock, security slot, chain opening
to help prevent unauthorized access, adjustments and theft deterrence.
• The supplied remote control allows you to assign a CONTROL ID to the projector
Multiple projectors can be operated separately and independently with the same single remote control by assigning
an ID number to each projector.
• Integrated RJ-45 connector for wired networking capacity (NP216/NP215 only)
An RJ-45 connector is equipped as standard feature.
• 3D images supported
The projector provides 3D images to a user wearing commercially available DLP® Link compatible LCD shutter
eyeglasses.
About this user's manual

The fastest way to get started is to take your time and do everything right the first time. Take a few minutes now to
review the user's manual. This may save you time later on. At the beginning of each section of the manual you'll find
an overview. If the section doesn't apply, you can skip it.
In this user's manual the drawings of the projector show an example of NP215.
3
1. Introduction
 Part Names of the Projector
Front/Top
Zoom Lever
(→ page 23)
Focus Ring Controls

(→ page 23) (→ page 5)
Remote Sensor
(→ page 8)
Ventilation (outlet)
Heated air is ex-
hausted from here.
Ventilation (inlet)
Lens
Built-in Security Slot ( )*
Adjustable Tilt Foot Lever

(→ page 22) Security chain opening
Attach an anti-theft device.
Adjustable Tilt Foot The security chain opening accepts
Lens Cap
(→ page 22) security wires or chains up to 0.18
inch/4.6 mm in diameter.
* This security slot supports the MicroSaver ® Security System.
Rear
Terminal Panel
(→ page 6) Lamp Cover
(→ page 71)
AC Input Ventilation (inlet)

Connect the supplied power
cable's three-pin plug here, and
plug the other end into an active
Spacer (black rubber)
wall outlet. (→ page 17)
To fine-adjust the height of the rear
foot, remove the spacer and rotate
Monaural Speaker (7W) the rear foot to the desired height.
Rear Foot
(→ page 22)
4
1. Introduction
Top Features
7 8 9 10 5 6 1 2 3 4
1. POWER Button (ON / STAND BY) ( ) (→ page 18, 6. SOURCE Button (→ page 20)
27) 7. MENU Button (→ page 43)
2. POWER Indicator (→ page 17, 18, 27, 73) 8. △▽◁▷ / Keystone △▽ / Volume ◁▷ Buttons
3. STATUS Indicator (→ page 73) (→ page 24, 26, 29)
4. LAMP Indicator (→ page 70, 73) 9. ENTER Button
5. AUTO ADJ. Button (→ page 26) 10. EXIT Button
5
1. Introduction
Terminal Panel Features
NP216 1 5
2 3 4 6 7 8
1. COMPUTER 1 IN/ Component Input Connector 4. PC CONTROL Port (D-Sub 9 Pin) (→ page 81)
(Mini D-Sub 15 Pin) (→ page 12, 13, 14) Use this port to connect a PC or control system.
AUDIO IN Mini Jack (Stereo Mini) (→ page 12, 13, This enables you to control the projector using serial
14) communication protocol. If you are writing your own
program, typical PC control codes are on page 81.
2. COMPUTER 2 IN/ Component Input Connector
(Mini D-Sub 15 Pin) (→ page 12, 13, 14) 5. S-VIDEO IN Connector (Mini DIN 4 Pin)
AUDIO IN Mini Jack (Stereo Mini) (→ page 12, 13, (→ page 15)
14)
6. VIDEO IN Connector (RCA) (→ page 15)
3. MONITOR OUT (COMP 1) Connector (Mini D-Sub
7. VIDEO/S-VIDEO AUDIO Input Jacks L/R (RCA)
15 Pin) (→ page 13)
(→ page 12, 13, 14, 15)
AUDIO OUT Mini Jack (Stereo Mini) (→ page 13)
8. LAN Port (RJ-45) (→ page 16)
NP215
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
NP210/NP115/NP110
1 2 3 4 5 6
1. COMPUTER OUT Connector (Mini D-Sub 15 Pin) 5. AUDIO IN Mini Jack (Stereo Mini)
(→ page 13) (→ page 12, 13, 14, 15)
2. COMPUTER IN/ Component Input Connector 6. PC CONTROL Port (D-Sub 9 Pin) (→ page 81)
(Mini D-Sub 15 Pin) (→ page 12, 13, 14) Use this port to connect a PC or control system.
This enables you to control the projector using serial
3. VIDEO IN Connector (RCA) (→ page 15)
communication protocol. If you are writing your own
4. S-VIDEO IN Connector (Mini DIN 4 Pin) program, typical PC control codes are on page 81.
(→ page 15)
7. LAN Port (RJ-45) (NP215 only) (→ page 16)
6
1. Introduction
 Part Names of the Remote Control

1 3
2 7
4 5
8 6
10
9 12 10. VIEWER Button
＋
11 (not available on this series of projectors)
14 13 11. ID SET Button
(→ page 60)
15 16
12. Numeric Keypad Button/CLEAR Button
17 (→ page 60)
18 22 13. FREEZE Button
19 (→ page 29)
24
14. AV-MUTE Button
20 21 (→ page 29)
25
23 15. MENU Button
26 (→ page 43)
29 27 16. EXIT Button (→ page 43)
17.  Button (→ page 43)
28 18. ENTER Button (→ page 43)
19. MAGNIFY (+)(–) Button
(→ page 29)
20. MOUSE L-CLICK Button*
(→ page 35, 36)
1. Infrared Transmitter 21. MOUSE R-CLICK Button*
(→ page 8) (→ page 35, 36)
2. POWER ON Button 22. PAGE / Button*
(→ page 18) (→ page 35, 36)
3. POWER OFF Button 23. ECO MODE Button (→ page 30)
(→ page 27) 24. KEYSTONE Button
4, 5, 6. COMPUTER 1/2/3 Button (→ page 25)
(→ page 20) 25. PICTURE Button
(COMPUTER 2/3 button is not available on NP215/ (→ page 48, 49)
NP210/NP115/NP110. COMPUTER 3 button is not 26. VOL. (+)(–) Button
available on NP216.) (→ page 26)
7. AUTO ADJ. Button 27. ASPECT Button
(→ page 26) (→ page 52)
8. VIDEO Button 28. FOCUS/ZOOM Button
(→ page 20) (not available on this series of projectors)
9. S-VIDEO Button 29. HELP Button
(→ page 20) (→ page 66)
* The PAGE /, MOUSE L-CLICK and MOUSE R-CLICK buttons work only when the optional remote mouse re-
ceiver (NP01MR) is connected with your computer.
7
1. Introduction
Battery Installation
1 Press firmly and slide the battery 2 Install new batteries (AAA). Ensure 3 Slip the cover back over the bat-
cover off. that you have the batteries’ polarity teries until it snaps into place. Do
(+/−) aligned correctly. not mix different types of batteries
or new and old batteries.
EN
OP
EN
OP

• Ensure that you have the batteries’ polarity (+/−) aligned correctly.
Operating Range for Wireless Remote Control
7 m/22 feet
30°
Remote control
30°
Remote sensor on projector cabinet
Remote control 30°
30°
7 m/22 feet
• The infrared signal operates by line-of-sight up to a distance of about 22 feet/7 m and within a 60-degree angle of
the remote sensor on the projector cabinet.
• The projector will not respond if there are objects between the remote control and the sensor, or if strong light falls
on the sensor. Weak batteries will also prevent the remote control from properly operating the projector.
8
2. Installation and Connections
This section describes how to set up your projector and how to connect video and audio sources.
Your projector is simple to set up and use. But before you get started, you must first:
1  Set up a screen and the projector.

 Connect your computer or video equip-
ment to the projector. See pages 12, 13,
14, 15, 16.
 Connect the supplied power cable. See
page 17.
NOTE: Ensure that the power cable and any other

cables are disconnected before moving the projec-
2 3 tor. When moving the projector or when it is not
in use, cover the lens with the lens cap.
To the wall outlet.
 Setting Up the Screen and the Projector

Selecting a Location
The further your projector is from the screen or wall, the larger the image. The minimum size the image can be is 30"
(0.76 m) measured diagonally when the projector is roughly 49 inches (1.3 m) from the wall or screen. The largest
the image can be is 300" (7.6 m) when the projector is about 493 inches (12.5 m) from the wall or screen. Use the
chart below as a rough guide.
Screen Size (Unit: cm/inch)
609.6(W) x 457.2(H) / 240(W) x 180(H)
30 Screen Size (diagonal: inch)
0"
487.7(W) x 365.8(H) / 192(W) x 144(H)

24
0"
406.4(W) x 304.8(H) / 160(W) x 120(H)

20
365.8(W) x 274.3(H) / 144(W) x 108(H) 0"
18
0"
304.8(W) x 228.6(H) / 120(W) x 90(H)
15
0"
243.8(W) x 182.9(H) / 96(W) x 72(H)
12
0"
203.2(W) x 152.4(H) / 80(W) x 60(H)
10
0"
162.6(W) x 121.9(H) / 64(W) x 48(H)
80
"
121.9(W) x 91.4(H) / 48(W) x 36(H)
60
"
81.3(W) x 61.0(H) / 32(W) x 24(H)
40
61.0(W) x 45.7(H) / 24(W) x 18(H) 30 " "
" 2.5 h)
/inc
Lens center /49
4" 5m
.5" 28" /39 12. m
nit:
" "
/49" 5.5
"
8.5
" 1.5 4" 7" 246 295 /3 0m
1.3m 7m/6 5m/9 m/13 m/16 m/19 6.3/ .5m/ 8.3m 10.
1. 2. 3.3 4.2 5.0 7 (U
ta nce
Dis
NOTE:
• The distances are indicated by intermediate values between tele and wide. Use as a rule of thumb.
• The Zoom lever adjusts the image size up to +/-5%
• For more details on throw distance, see next page.
9
Throw Distance and Screen Size
The following shows the proper relative positions of the projector and screen. Refer to the table to determine the
position of installation.
Distance Chart
C
Screen center
B
Screen bottom
D
2.7"/68 mm
Lens center
Installation surface
Screen Size C a
B D(WIDE)
Diagonal Width Height Wide - Tele Wide - Tele
inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm - inch mm inch mm degree - degree
30 762 24 610 18 457 12 297 46 1180 - 52 1320 3 69 14.0 - 12.7
40 1016 32 813 24 610 16 396 62 1573 - 69 1760 4 91 14.0 - 12.7
60 1524 48 1219 36 914 23 594 93 2360 - 104 2640 5 137 14.0 - 12.7
70 1778 56 1422 42 1067 27 693 108 2753 - 121 3080 6 160 14.0 - 12.7
80 2032 64 1626 48 1219 31 792 124 3147 - 139 3520 7 183 14.0 - 12.7
90 2286 72 1829 54 1372 35 891 139 3540 - 156 3960 8 206 14.0 - 12.7
100 2540 80 2032 60 1524 39 990 155 3933 - 173 4400 9 228 14.0 - 12.7
120 3048 96 2438 72 1829 47 1188 186 4720 - 208 5280 11 274 14.0 - 12.7
150 3810 120 3048 90 2286 58 1486 232 5900 - 260 6600 13 343 14.0 - 12.7
180 4572 144 3658 108 2743 70 1783 279 7080 - 312 7920 16 411 14.0 - 12.7
200 5080 160 4064 120 3048 78 1981 310 7867 - 346 8800 18 457 14.0 - 12.7
240 6096 192 4877 144 3658 94 2377 372 9440 - 416 10560 22 548 14.0 - 12.7
270 6858 216 5486 162 4115 105 2674 418 10620 - 468 11880 24 617 14.0 - 12.7
300 7620 240 6096 180 4572 117 2971 465 11800 - 520 13200 27 685 14.0 - 12.7
B = Vertical distance between lens center and screen center

C = Throw distance
D = Vertical distance between lens center and bottom of screen(top of screen for ceiling application)
α = Throw angle
NOTE: The values in the tables are design values and may vary.
10
WARNING Reflecting the Image

Using a mirror to reflect your projector's image enables
* Installing your projector on the ceiling must be done
you to enjoy a much larger image when a smaller space
by a qualified technician. Contact your NEC dealer is required. Contact your NEC dealer if you need a mirror
for more information. system. If you're using a mirror system and your image
* Do not attempt to install the projector yourself. is inverted, use the MENU and  buttons on your
projector cabinet or your remote control to correct the
• Only use your projector on a solid, level surface. If
orientation. (→ page 59)
the projector falls to the ground, you can be injured
and the projector severely damaged.
• Do not use the projector where temperatures vary
greatly. The projector must be used at temperatures
between 41˚F (5˚C) and 104˚F (40˚C). ([ECO MODE]
is set automatically to [ON] at 95°F to 104°F/35°C
to 40°C. Note that [ECO] mode will be set to [ON]
automatically at 86°F to 104°F/30°C to 40°C when
used in [HIGH ALTITUDE].)
• Do not expose the projector to moisture, dust, or
smoke. This will harm the screen image.
• Ensure that you have adequate ventilation around
your projector so heat can dissipate. Do not cover
the vents on the side or the front of the projector.
11
 Making Connections
Connecting Your PC or Macintosh Computer
NOTE: When using with a notebook PC, be sure to connect the projector and notebook PC while the projector is in standby mode
and before turning on the power to the notebook PC.
In most cases the output signal from the notebook PC is not turned on unless connected to the projector before being powered up.
* If the screen goes blank while using your remote control, it may be the result of the computer's screen-saver or power manage-
ment software.
Enabling the computer’s external display

Displaying an image on the notebook PC’s screen does not necessarily mean it outputs a signal to the projector.
When using a PC compatible laptop, a combination of function keys will enable/disable the external display.
Usually, the combination of the ‘Fn” key along with one of the 12 function keys gets the external display to come on
or off. For example, NEC laptops use Fn + F3, while Dell laptops use Fn + F8 key combinations to toggle through
external display selections.
NP216
AUDIO IN COMPUTER 1 IN
COMPUTER IN AUDIO IN
COMPUTER 2 IN AUDIO IN
VGA signal cable

VGA signal cable (supplied)
(supplied)
To mini D-Sub 15-pin con-
nector on the projector. It is Stereo mini-plug audio cable
recommended that you use a (not supplied)
Stereo mini-plug audio
commercially available distri-
cable (not supplied)
bution amplifier if connecting PHONE
a signal cable longer than

the cable supplied.
IBM VGA or Compatibles NOTE: For older Macintosh,

(Notebook type) or Ma- use a commercially available
cintosh (Notebook type) PHONE
pin adapter (not supplied)
to connect to your Mac's
video port.
NOTE:
• Before connecting an audio cable to the headphone jack of a computer, adjust the computer’s volume level to low. After connecting
the projector to the computer, adjust the volume of both projector and computer to suitable level as desired to avoid damage to
your ear.
• If an audio output jack of your computer is a mini jack type, connect the audio cable to it.
• An image may not be displayed correctly when a Video or S-Video source is played back via a commercially available scan converter.
This is because the projector will process a video signal as a computer signal at the default setting. In that case, do the following.
- When an image is displayed with the lower and upper black portion of the screen or a dark image is not displayed correctly:
Project an image to fill the screen and then press the AUTO ADJ. button on the remote control or the projector cabinet.
- NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110: The COMPUTER IN connector supports Plug & Play (DDC2B).
NP216: Both the COMPUTER 1 IN and COMPUTER 2 IN connectors support Plug & Play (DDC2B).
12
Connecting an External Monitor
NP216
VGA signal cable

COMPUTER OUT
(supplied)
MONITOR OUT AUDIO OUT

(COMP 1)
VGA signal cable

(not supplied)
VGA signal
cable (sup-
plied)
PHONE
VGA signal cable (not supplied)
You can connect a separate, external monitor to your projector to simultaneously view on a monitor the computer
analog image you’re projecting.
NOTE: Daisy chain connection is not possible.
13
Connecting Your DVD Player with Component Output
Use audio equipment for stereo sound.
The projector's built-in speaker is monaural.
NP216
AUDIO IN COMPUTER 1 IN
COMPUTER IN AUDIO IN COMPUTER 2 IN AUDIO IN
Optional 15-pin - to Optional 15-pin - to

- RCA (female) ×3 - RCA (female) ×3
cable (ADP-CV1E) cable (ADP-CV1E)
Stereo mini plug - to - RCA audio cable (not supplied)
Component video RCA×3 Audio Equipment

cable (not supplied)
AUDIO IN
L R
DVD player
Y Cb Cr L R
Component AUDIO OUT

Audio cable (not supplied)
NOTE: Refer to your DVD player's owner's manual for more information about your DVD player's video output requirements.
14
Connecting Your VCR
Use audio equipment for stereo sound.
The projector's built-in speaker is monaural.
NP216
S-VIDEO IN
VIDEO IN AUDIO IN S-VIDEO IN AUDIO IN
VIDEO IN
S-Video cable
S-Video cable (not supplied) (not supplied)
Video cable Audio cable

Video cable (not supplied) (not supplied) (not supplied)
Audio equipment
VCR
L R VIDEO S-VIDEO AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT VIDEO OUT L R
Stereo mini plug - to

- RCA audio cable
(not supplied)
Audio cable (not supplied)
NOTE: Refer to your VCR owner's manual for more information about your equipment's video output requirements.
NOTE: An image may not be displayed correctly when a Video or S-Video source is played back in fast-forward or fast-rewind via
a scan converter.
NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110
TIP: The AUDIO IN Mini Jack (Stereo Mini) is shared between COMPUTER, VIDEO and S-VIDEO inputs.
15
Connecting to a Network (NP216/NP215 only)

The projector comes standard with a LAN port (RJ-45) which provides a LAN connection using a LAN cable.
Using a LAN cable allows you to specify the Network Settings and the Alert Mail Settings for the projector over a LAN.
To use a LAN connection, you are required to assign an IP address to the projector on the [PROJECTOR NETWORK
SETTINGS] screen of the web browser on your computer. For setting, see page 37, 38, 39.
Example of LAN connection

Example of wired LAN connection
Server
NP216
Hub
LAN
NOTE: Use a Category 5

LAN cable (not supplied) or higher LAN cable.
LAN
16
Connecting the Supplied Power Cable
Connect the supplied power cable to the projector.
First connect the supplied power cable's three-pin plug to the AC IN of the projector, and then connect the other plug
of the supplied power cable in the wall outlet.
The projector will go into standby

mode. When in standby mode, the
POWER indicator will light orange
and the STATUS indicator will light
green when [NORMAL] is selected
for [STANDBY MODE].
To wall outlet
Make sure that the prongs are fully inserted into both the
power plug and the wall outlet.
CAUTION:
Parts of the projector may become temporarily heated if the projector is turned off with the POWER button or if the
AC power supply is disconnected during normal projector operation.
17
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
This section describes how to turn on the projector and to project a picture onto the screen.
 Turning on the Projector

1. Remove the lens cap
• Do not remove the lens cap by pulling on the string. Doing
so can cause mechanical damage to the part around the
lens.
2. Press the (POWER) button on the projector cabinet

or the POWER ON button on the remote control for 1
second.
The POWER indicator will turn to green and the projector
will become ready to use.
NOTE: When the projector is turned on, it may take some time
before the lamp light becomes bright.
TIP: ＋
• When the STATUS indicator lights orange, it means that the

[CONTROL PANEL LOCK] is turned on. (→ page 59) Preparing to power on
Standby Power On
• When the message “Projector is locked! Enter your password.”
is displayed, it means that the [SECURITY] is turned on. (→
page 32)
After you turn on your projector, ensure that the computer

or video source is turned on and that your lens cap is Steady orange light Blinking green light Steady green light
removed.
(→ page 73)
NOTE: When no signal is available, the NEC logo (default), blue, or
black screen will be displayed. After a lapse of 45 seconds from when
the projector displays a blue, black or logo screen, [ECO MODE] will
always switch to [ON]. This is done only when [ECO MODE] is set
to [OFF].
18
Note on Startup screen (Menu Language Select screen)

When you first turn on the projector, you will get the Startup menu. This menu gives you the opportunity to select one
of the 21 menu languages.
To select a menu language, follow these steps:
1. Use the , ,  or  button to select one of the 21 ＋
languages from the menu.
2. Press the ENTER button to execute the selection.
After this has been done, you can proceed to the menu
operation.
If you want, you can select the menu language later.
(→ [LANGUAGE] on page 45 and 56)
NOTE:
• If one of the following things happens, the projector will not turn on.
- If the internal temperature of the projector is too high, the projector detects abnormal high temperature. In this condition the
projector will not turn on to protect the internal system. If this happens, wait for the projector's internal components to cool
down.
- When the lamp reaches its end of usable life, the projector will not turn on. If this happens, replace the lamp.
- If the STATUS indicator lights orange as long as the POWER button is pressed, it means the CONTROL PANEL LOCK has been
set.
- If the lamp fails to light, and if the STATUS indicator flashes on and off in a cycle of six times, wait a full minute and then turn
on the power.
• The projector cannot be turned off with the ON/STAND BY button or the POWER OFF button while the POWER indicator is flashing
green in a cycle of 0.5 second on and 0.5 second off.
• Do not disconnect the AC power supply to the projector for 60 seconds immediately after turning it on and displaying an im-
age.
• Immediately after turning on the projector, screen flicker may occur. This is normal. Wait 3 to 5 minutes until the lamp lighting is
stabilized.
• If you turn on the projector immediately after the lamp is turned off or when the temperature is high, the fans run without display-
ing an image for some time and then the projector will display the image.
19
 Selecting a Source
Selecting the computer or video source
NOTE: Turn on the computer or video source equipment connected to the projector.
Selecting from Source List

Press and quickly release the SOURCE button on the projector cabinet to display
the Source list. Each time the SOURCE button is pressed, the input source will
change as follows: “COMPUTER”, ”VIDEO”, “S-VIDEO”. To display the selected NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110
source, press the ENTER button or allow 2 seconds to elapse.
Detecting the Signal Automatically

Press and hold the SOURCE button for a minimum of 2 seconds, the projector
will search for the next available input source. Each time you press and hold the
SOURCE button for a minimum of 2 seconds, the input source will change as
NP216
follows:
NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110:
COMPUTER → VIDEO → S-VIDEO → COMPUTER → ...
NP216:
COMPUTER 1 → COMPUTER 2 → VIDEO → S-VIDEO → COMPUTER 1 →
...
TIP: If no input signal is present, the input will be skipped.
Using the Remote Control

NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110: Press any one of the COMPUTER 1, VIDEO, and
S-VIDEO buttons.
NP216: Press any one of the COMPUTER 1, COMPUTER 2, VIDEO, and S-
VIDEO buttons.
Selecting Default Source

You can set a source as the default source so that it will be displayed each time
the projector is turned on.
1. Press the MENU button.

The menu will be displayed.
2. Press the  button twice to select [SETUP] and press the  button or
the ENTER button to select [GENERAL].
3. Press the  button four times to select [OPTIONS(2)].
NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110
4. Press the  button six times to select [DEFAULT SOURCE SELECT] and
press the ENTER button.
The [DEFAULT SOURCE SELECT] screen will be displayed.
(→ page 64)
5. Select a source as the default source, and press the ENTER button.
6. Press the EXIT button a few times to close the menu.
NP216
7. Restart the projector.
The source you selected in step 5 will be projected.
TIP: When the projector is in Standby mode, applying a computer signal from a computer
connected to the COMPUTER IN input will power on the projector and simultaneously
project the computer’s image.
([AUTO POWER ON(COMP.)]/[AUTO POWER ON(COMP1)] for NP216 → page 64)
20
 Adjusting the Picture Size and Position

Use the adjustable tilt foot, the zoom lever or the focus ring to adjust the picture size and position.
In this chapter drawings and cables are omitted for clarity.
Adjusting the throw angle (the height of an image) Adjusting the left and right tilt of an image
[Tilt foot] (→ page 22) [Rear foot] (→ page 22)
Finely adjusting the size of an image Adjusting the focus

[Zoom lever] (→ page 23) [Focus ring] (→ page 23)
Adjusting the keystone correction [KEYSTONE] (→ page 24)
21
Adjust the Tilt Foot

1. Lift the front edge of the projector.
CAUTION:
1
Do not try to touch the ventilation outlet during Tilt Foot adjustment
as it can become heated while the projector is turned on and after it
is turned off.
Ventilation
outlet
2. Push up and hold the Adjustable Tilt Foot Lever on the front of
the projector to extend the adjustable tilt foot.
2
Adjustable Tilt Foot
3. Lower the front of the projector to the desired height.
Adjustable Tilt
4. Release the Adjustable Tilt Foot Lever to lock the Adjustable tilt
Foot Lever
foot.
The tilt foot can be extended up to 1.6 inch/40 mm.
There is approximately 10 degrees (up) of adjustment for the front of
the projector.
Rotate the rear foot to the desired height in order to square the image
on the projection surface. 3
CAUTION:
4
• Do not use the tilt-foot for purposes other than originally intended.
Misuses such as using the tilt foot to carry or hang (from the wall or
ceiling) the projector can cause damage to the projector.
Adjusting the left and right tilt of an image [Rear foot]

1. Remove the spacer (black rubber) from the rear foot.
Keep the spacer for future use.
2. Rotate the rear foot.
The rear foot can be extended up to 0.4 inch/10 mm. Rotating the rear
foot allows the projector to be placed horizontally.
Rear foot
NOTE: After using the projector, attach the spacer to the rear foot. Spacer (black
rubber)
Up Down
22
Zoom
Use the ZOOM lever to adjust the image size on the screen.
Zoom Lever
Focus
Use the FOCUS ring to obtain the best focus.
Focus Ring
23
 Correcting Keystone Distortion

Correcting Keystone Distortion
If the screen is tilted vertically, keystone distortion becomes large. Proceed with the following
steps to correct keystone distortion
NOTE:
• The Keystone correction can cause an image to be slightly blurred because the correction is made electronically.
• The Keystone correction range can be made narrower, depending on a signal or its aspect ratio selection.
Adjusting with buttons on the cabinet

1. Press the ( ) or ( ) button with no menus displayed.
The keystone bar will be displayed.

2. Use the  or  to correct the keystone distortion.

Adjust so that the right and left sides are parallel.
3. Press the ENTER button.
The keystone bar will be closed.
NOTE: When the menu is displayed, the above operation is not available. When the menu is displayed, press the MENU button to
close the menu and start the Keystone correction.
From the menu, select [SETUP] → [GENERAL] → [KEYSTONE]. The changes can be saved with [KEYSTONE SAVE]. (→ page 55)
24
＋
ID SET 0 CLEAR
AV-MUTE FREEZE
MENU EXIT
3. Projecting an Image
ENTER
(Basic Operation)
MA
NI
GE
Adjusting with the remote control
G
FY PA
L-CLICK R-CLICK
1. Press the KEYSTONE button. MOUSE
ECO MODEKEYSTONEPICTURE
The Keystone bar will be displayed. HELP FOCUS ASPECT VOL.
ZOOM
2. Use the  or  button to correct the keystone distortion. ON POWER OFF AUTO ADJ.
Adjust so that the right and left sides are parallel. 1

COMPUTER
2 3
VIDEO S-VIDEO VIEWER
4 5 6
7 8 9
＋
ID SET 0 CLEAR
AV-MUTE FREEZE
MENU EXIT
ENTER
MA
NI
GE
G
FY PA
L-CLICK R-CLICK
MOUSE
3. Press the ENTER button. ON POWER OFF
AUTO ADJ.
HELP FOCUS ASPECT VOL.
COMPUTER
ZOOM
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
＋
ID SET 0 CLEAR
AV-MUTE FREEZE
MENU EXIT
ENTER
MA
NI
GE
G
FY PA
L-CLICK R-CLICK
MOUSE
NOTE: ZOOM
• The Keystone correction can cause an image to be slightly blurred because the correction is made electronically.
• The maximum range of vertical keystone correction is +/−40 degrees. This maximum range may be smaller depending on the
signal or aspect ratio setting. The Keystone correction range will also be smaller when 3D mode is enabled.
• The range of keystone correction is not the maximum tilt angle of projector.
• The left and right (horizontal) keystone correction is not available.
TIP: The changes can be saved with [KEYSTONE SAVE]. (→ page 55)
25
 Optimizing Computer Signal Automatically

Adjusting the Image Using Auto Adjust
Optimizing a computer image automatically.
Press the AUTO ADJ. button to optimize a computer image automatically.
This adjustment may be necessary when you connect your computer for the first time.
[Poor picture]
[Normal picture]
NOTE:
Some signals may take time to display or may not be displayed correctly.
• The Auto Adjust function will work for computer (RGB) signal only.
• If the Auto Adjust operation cannot optimize the computer signal, try to adjust [HORIZONTAL], [VERTICAL], [CLOCK], and [PHASE]
manually. (→ page 51, 52)
 Turning Up or Down Volume

Sound level from the speaker can be adjusted.
Increase volume
Decrease volume
TIP: When no menus appear, the  and  buttons on the projector cabinet work as a volume control.
NOTE: The [BEEP] sound volume cannot be adjusted. To turn off the [BEEP] sound, from the menu, select [SETUP] → [OPTIONS
(1)] → [BEEP] → [OFF].
26
7 Turning off the Projector
To turn off the projector:

1. First, press the (POWER) button on the projector
cabinet or the POWER OFF button on the remote con-
trol.
The [POWER OFF / ARE YOU SURE? /CARBON SAV-
＋
INGS- SESSION X.XXX[g-CO2]] message will appear.
2. Secondly, press the ENTER button or press the Power On Standby

(POWER) or the POWER OFF button again.
The lamp will turn off and the projector will go into standby
mode. When in standby mode, the POWER indicator will
light orange and the STATUS indicator will light green when
[NORMAL] is selected for [STANDBY MODE].
Steady green light Steady orange light
Immediately after turning on the projector and displaying an
image, you cannot turn off the projector for 60 seconds.
3. Finally, unplug the power cable.

The POWER indicator will go out.
CAUTION:
Parts of the projector may become temporarily heated if the AC power supply is disconnected either during normal
projector operation or during cooling fan operation. Use caution when picking up the projector.
NOTE:
• Do not turn off the power for 60 seconds immediately after turning it on and displaying an image.
• Do not disconnect the AC power supply to the projector within 10 seconds of making adjustment or setting changes and closing
the menu. Doing so can cause loss of adjustments and settings.
27
 After Use
Preparation: Make sure that the projector is turned off.
1. Disconnect any other cables.
2. Retract adjustable tilt foot if extended.
3. Cover the lens with the lens cap.
28
4. Convenient Features
1 Turning off the Image and Sound
Press the AV-MUTE button to turn off the image and sound for a short
period of time. Press again to restore the image and sound.
NOTE: Even though the image is turned off, the menu still remains on the ＋
screen.
2 Freezing a Picture
Press the FREEZE button to freeze a picture. Press again to resume
motion.
NOTE: The image is frozen but the original video is still playing back.
＋
 Enlarging a Picture
You can enlarge the picture up to four times.
NOTE: The maximum magnification may be less than four times depending on the
signal or when [WIDE ZOOM] is selected for [ASPECT RATIO].
To do so:
1. Press the MAGNIFY (+) button to magnify the picture.

To move the magnified image, use the ,, or button.
2. Press the  button.

The area of the magnified image will be moved
3. Press the MAGNIFY (−) button.

Each time the MAGNIFY (−) button is pressed, the image is re-
duced.
NOTE:
• The image will be enlarged or reduced at the center of the screen.
• Displaying the menu will cancel the current magnification.
29
 Changing Eco Mode

This feature enables you to select two brightness modes of the lamp:
OFF and ON modes. The lamp life can be extended by turning on the [ECO MODE].
[ECO MODE] Description Status of LAMP indicator
[OFF] This is the default setting (100% Brightness). Off LAMP
STATUS
[ON] Select this mode to increase the lamp life (approx. Steady Green ONlight
POWER OFF AUTO ADJ. LAMP
90% Brightness.)
COMPUTER STATUS
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
To turn on the [ECO MODE], do the following: ＋

ID SET 0 CLEAR
1. Press the ECO MODE button on the remote control to display MENU
AV-MUTE FREEZE
EXIT
[ECO MODE] screen.
2. Use the  or  button to select [ON]. ENTER
3. Press the ENTER button.
MA
NI
GE
G
To change from [ON] to [OFF], Go back to Step 2 and select [OFF]. FY PA
L-CLICK R-CLICK
Repeat Step 3. MOUSE

NOTE: ZOOM
• The [ECO MODE] can be changed by using the menu.
Select [SETUP] → [GENERAL] → [ECO MODE].
• The lamp life remaining and lamp hours used can be checked in [USAGE TIME].
Select [INFO.] →[USAGE TIME].
• The projector will always enter into the [ECO MODE] [OFF] condition for 60
seconds immediately after the projector is turned on. The lamp condition will
not be affected even when [ECO MODE] is changed within this time period.
• After a lapse of 45 seconds from when the projector displays a blue, black or
logo screen, [ECO MODE] will automatically switch to [ON]. This is done only
when [ECO MODE] is set to [OFF].
• If the projector is overheated in [OFF] mode, there may be a case where the [ECO
MODE] automatically changes to [ON] mode to protect the projector. When the
projector is in [ON] mode, the picture brightness decreases. When the projector
comes back to normal temperature, the [ECO MODE] returns to [OFF] mode.
Thermometer symbol [ ] indicates the [ECO MODE] is automatically set to
[ON] mode because the internal temperature is too high.
30
5 Checking Energy-Saving Effect [CARBON METER]

This feature will show energy-saving effect in terms of CO2 emission reduction (kg) when the projector’s [ECO MODE]
is set to [ON]. This feature is called [CARBON METER].
There are two messages: [TOTAL CARBON SAVINGS] and [CARBON SAVINGS-SESSION]. The [TOTAL CARBON
SAVINGS] message shows the total amount of CO2 emission reduction from the time of shipment up to now. You can
check the information on [USAGE TIME] from [INFO.] of the menu. (→ page 66)
The [CARBON SAVINGS-SESSION] message shows the amount of CO2 emission reduction between the time of
changing to ECO MODE immediately after the time of power-on and the time of power-off. The [CARBON SAVINGS-
SESSION] message will be displayed in the [POWER OFF/ ARE YOU SURE?] message at the time of power-off.
TIP:
• The formula as shown below is used to calculate the amount of CO2 emission reduction.
Amount of CO2 emission reduction = Power consumption in OFF for ECO MODE – Power consumption in ON for ECO MODE x
CO2 conversion factor.*
* Calculation for amount of CO2 emission reduction is based on an OECD publication “CO2 Emissions from Fuel Combustion, 2008
Edition”.
• This formula will not apply to the power consumption which is not affected by whether [ECO MODE] is turned on or off.
31
6 Preventing the Unauthorized Use of the Projector [SECURITY]

A keyword can be set for your projector using the Menu to avoid operation by an unauthorized user. When a keyword
is set, turning on the projector will display the Keyword input screen. Unless the correct keyword is entered, the pro-
jector cannot project an image.
• The [SECURITY] setting cannot be cancelled by using the [RESET] of the menu.
To enable the Security function:

2. Press the  button twice to select [SETUP] and press the  button or the ENTER button to select [GEN-
ERAL].
3. Press the  button to select [INSTALLATION].
4. Press the  button three times to select [SECURITY] and press the ENTER button.
The OFF/ON menu will be displayed.
5. Press the  button to select [ON] and press the ENTER button.
The [SECURITY KEYWORD] screen will be displayed.
6. Type in a combination of the four  buttons and press the ENTER button.
NOTE: A keyword must be 4 to 10 digits in length.
The [CONFIRM KEYWORD] screen will be displayed.
32
7. Type in the same combination of  buttons and press the ENTER button.
The confirmation screen will be displayed.
8. Select [YES] and press the ENTER button.
The SECURITY function has been enabled.
To turn on the projector when [SECURITY] is enabled:
1. Press and hold the POWER button for about 1 second.

The projector will be turned on and display a message to the effect that the projector is locked.
3. Type in the correct keyword and press the ENTER button. The projector will display an image.
NOTE: The security disable mode is maintained until the power cable is unplugged.
33
To disable the SECURITY function:

2. Select [SETUP] → [INSTALLATION] → [SECURITY] and press the ENTER button.
The OFF/ON menu will be displayed.
3. Select [OFF] and press the ENTER button.
The KEYWORD CONFIRMATION screen will be displayed.
4. Type in your keyword and press the ENTER button.

When the correct keyword is entered, the SECURITY function will be disabled.
NOTE: If you forget your keyword, contact your dealer. Your dealer will provide you with your keyword in exchange for your request
code. Your request code is displayed in the Keyword Confirmation screen. In this example [K992-45L8-JNGJ-4XU9-1YAT-EEA2] is
a request code.
34
7 Using the Optional Remote Mouse Receiver (NP01MR)

The optional remote mouse receiver enables you to operate your computer’s mouse functions from the remote control.
It is a great convenience for clicking through your computer-generated presentations.
Connecting the remote mouse receiver to your computer

If you wish to use the remote mouse function, connect the mouse receiver and computer.
The mouse receiver can be connected directly to the computer’s USB port (type A).
NOTE: Depending on the type of connection or OS installed on your computer, you may have to restart your computer or change
your computer settings.
Computer
Remote mouse receiver
To USB port of PC or Macintosh
When operating a computer via the remote mouse receiver
7m/22 feet
30˚
30˚
Remote sensor on the

remote mouse receiver
When connecting using the USB terminal

For PC, the mouse receiver can only be used with a Windows XP*, Windows 2000, Windows Vista, Windows 7, or
Mac OS X 10.0.0 or later operating system.
* NOTE: In SP1 or older version of Windows XP, if the mouse cursor will not move correctly, do the following:
Clear the Enhance pointer precision check box underneath the mouse speed slider in the Mouse Properties dialog box [Pointer
Options tab].
NOTE: The PAGE  and  buttons do not work with PowerPoint for Macintosh.
NOTE: Wait at least 5 seconds after disconnecting the mouse receiver before reconnecting it and vice versa. The computer may not
identify the mouse receiver if it is repeatedly connected and disconnected in rapid intervals.
35
Operating your computer’s mouse from the remote control

You can operate your computer’s mouse from the remote control.
PAGE / Button: scrolls the viewing area of the window or to move to the previous or next slide in Power-
Point on your computer.
 Buttons: moves the mouse cursor on your computer.
MOUSE L-CLICK Button: works as the mouse left button.
MOUSE R-CLICK Button: works as the mouse right button.
NOTE:
• When you operate the computer using the  or  button with the menu displayed, both the menu and the mouse pointer
will be affected. Close the menu and perform the mouse operation.
• The PAGE  and  buttons do not work with PowerPoint for Macintosh.
About Drag Mode:

By pressing the MOUSE L-CLICK or R-CLICK button for 2 or 3 seconds then releasing, the drag mode is set and the
drag operation can be performed simply by pressing the  button. To drop the item, press the MOUSE L-CLICK
(or R-CLICK) button. To cancel it, press the MOUSE R-CLICK (or L-CLICK) button.
TIP: You can change the Pointer speed on the Mouse Properties dialog box on the Windows. For more information, see the user
documentation or online help supplied with your computer.
36
8 Network Setting by Using an HTTP Browser (NP216/NP215

only)
Overview
Connecting the projector to a network allows the Alert Mail setting (→ page 39) and the projector control from a
computer via the network.
To perform the projector control from a web browser, you must have an exclusive application installed on your com-
puter.
The IP address and subnet mask of the projector can be set on the Network Setting screen of the web browser by
using an HTTP server function. Please be sure to use “Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0” or a higher version for the web
browser. (This device uses “JavaScript” and “Cookies” and the browser should be set to accept these functions. The
setting method will vary depending on the version of browser. Please refer to the help files and the other information
provided in your software.)
Access is gained to the HTTP server function by starting the Web browser on the computer via the network connected
to the projector and enter the following URL.
• Network Setting
http://<the projector’s IP address>/index.html
• Alert Mail Setting
http://<the projector’s IP address>/lanconfig.html
TIP:
• The default IP address is “192.168.0.10”.
• The exclusive application can be downloaded from our website.
NOTE:
• If the PROJECTOR NETWORK SETTINGS screen does not appear in the web browser, press the Ctrl+F5 keys to refresh your web
browser (or clear the cache).
• The display’s or button’s response can be slowed down or operation may not be accepted depending the settings of your network.
Should this happen, consult your network administrator.
The projector may not respond if its buttons are repeatedly pressed in rapid intervals. Should this happen, wait a moment and
repeat. If you still can’t get any response, turn off and back on the projector.
Preparation Before Use

Connect the projector to a commercially available LAN cable before engaging in browser operations. (→ page 16)
Operation with a browser that uses a proxy server may not be possible depending on the type of proxy server and the
setting method. Although the type of proxy server will be a factor, it is possible that items that have actually been set
will not be displayed depending on the effectiveness of the cache, and the contents set from the browser may not be
reflected in operation. It is recommended that a proxy server not be used unless it is unavoidable.
Handling of the Address for Operation via a Browser

Regarding the actual address that is entered for the address or entered to the URL column when operation of the pro-
jector is via a browser, the host name can be used as it is when the host name corresponding to the IP address of the
projector has been registered to the domain name server by a network administrator, or the host name corresponding
to the IP address of the projector has been set in the “HOSTS” file of the computer being used.
Example 1: When the host name of the projector has been set to “pj.nec.co.jp”, access is gained to the network
setting by specifying
http://pj.nec.co.jp/index.html
for the address or the entry column of the URL.
Example 2: When the IP address of the projector is “192.168.73.1”, access is gained to the mail alert settings by
specifying
http://192.168.73.1/index.html
for the address or the entry column of the URL.
37
Network Settings
http://<the projector’s IP address> /index.html
DHCP ��Enabling this option automatically assigns an IP address to the projector from your DHCP server.
Disabling this option allows you to register the IP address or subnet mask number obtained from
your network administrator.
TIP: You can check the IP address in the menu when [ENABLE] is selected for [DHCP].
To do so, from the menu, select [INFO.] → [WIRED LAN] when [CONTROL TERMINAL] is set to
[LAN].
IP ADDRESS ��Set your IP address of the network connected to the projector when [DISABLE] is selected for
[DHCP].
TIP: You can check your specified IP address in the menu
To do so, from the menu, select [INFO.] → [WIRED LAN] .
SUBNET MASK ��Set your subnet mask number of the network connected to the projector when [DISABLE] is selected
for [DHCP].
DEFAULT GATEWAY ��Set your default gateway of the network connected to the projector when [DISABLE] is selected for
[DHCP].
DNS (PRIMARY) ��Set your primary DNS settings of the network connected to the projector.
DNS (SECONDARY) ��Set your secondary DNS settings of the network connected to the projector.
UPDATE ��Reflect your settings.
NOTE: Close the browser after clicking [UPDATE]. The projector will automatically update your
settings.
TIP: Selecting [NETWORK SETTINGS] for [RESET] from the projector’s menu allows you to return the following items to the factory
default.
[DHCP]: DISABLE
[IP ADDRESS]: 192.168.0.10
[SUBNET MASK]: 255.255.255.0
[DEFAULT GATEWAY]: 192.168.0.1
* [DNS(PRIMARY)] and [DNS(SECONDARY)] will remain unchanged.
38
Alert Mail Setting
http://<the projector’s IP address>/lanconfig.html
This option notifies your computer of an error message via e-mail when using wired LAN. An error message notification
will be sent when the projector lamp has reached the end of its usable life or an error occurs in the projector.
HOST NAME �� Type in the hostname of the network connected to the projector. Up to 60 alphanumeric char-
acters can be used. If the host name is unknown, type in a string of characters representing the
projector. Example: Projector 1
DOMAIN NAME �� Type in the domain name of the network connected to the projector. Up to 60 alphanumeric
characters can be used. If the domain name is unknown, type in the right side of @ in the sender’s
address. Example: nec. com
ALERT MAIL �� Checking [ENABLE] will turn on the Alert Mail feature.
Checking [DISABLE] will turn off the Alert Mail feature.
SENDER’S ADDRESS �� Type in the senders address. Up to 60 alphanumeric and symbols characters can be used.
SMTP SERVER NAME �� Type in the SMTP server name to be connected to the projector. Up to 60 alphanumeric characters
can be used.
RECIPIENT’S ADDRESS 1 to 3 �� Type in your recipient’s address. Up to 60 alphanumeric and symbols characters can be used.
APPLY �� Click this button to reflect the above settings
EXECUTE �� Click this button to send a test mail to check if your settings are correct.
STATUS �� A reply to a test mail will be displayed.
NOTE:
• If you execute a test, you may not receive an Alert mail. Should this happen, check if the network settings are correct.
• If you entered an incorrect address in a test, you may not receive an Alert mail. Should this happen, check if the Recipient ’s Ad-
dress is correct
TIP: The Alert Mail settings will not be affected even when [RESET] is done from the menu.
39
 Viewing 3D Images
The projector provides 3D images to a user wearing commercially available DLP® Link compatible LCD shutter eye-
glasses.
CAUTION
Health precautions
Before viewing, be sure to read health care precautions that may be found in the user’s manual included with your
LCD shutter eyeglasses or your 3D compatible content such as DVDs, video games, computer's video files and
the like.
- Allow a distance of 2 m/7 feet or greater between the screen and a user. Viewing 3D images from too close a
distance can strain your eyes.
- Avoid viewing 3D images for a prolonged period of time. Take a break of 15 minutes or longer after every hour
of viewing.
- If you or any member of your family has a history of light-sensitive seizures, consult a doctor before viewing 3D
images.
Features for 3D image viewing

The 3D feature supports the DLP® Link system, one of 3D systems called the LCD shutter glass method. 3D viewing
is achieved by using dedicated LCD shutter eyeglasses to view left and right eye images alternately projected on the
screen. The LCD shutter eyeglasses compatible with the DLP® Link system are used for viewing 3D images by syn-
chronizing to the switched timing of the reflective synch signals, which are included in left eye and right eye images,
reflected from the screen.
LCD shutter eyeglasses (recommended)

Use DLP® Link compatible LCD shutter eyeglasses. We recommend you to use X102 Series manufactured by XpanD.
http://www.xpand3dtv.com/
Steps for viewing 3D images on the projector

1. Connect the projector to your video equipment.
2. Turn on the projector, display the on-screen menu, and then select [ON] for the 3D mode.
For the operating procedure to turn on the 3D mode, refer to "On-screen menu for 3D images" on the following
page. Set other 3D-related menu options such as [DLP® Link] and [L/R INVERT] as necessary.
3. Play your 3D compatible content and use the projector to display the image.
4. Put on your LCD shutter eyeglasses to view 3D images.
Also refer to the user's manual accompanied with your LCD shutter eyeglasses for more information.
40
On-screen menu for 3D images
Follow the steps to display the 3D menu.
The [SOURCE] menu will be displayed.
[NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110] [NP216]

2. Press the  button twice.
The [SETUP] menu will be displayed.

3. Press the  button once, and then press the  button four times.
The [3D] menu will be displayed
[NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110] [NP216]
Selecting input connected to a source of 3D images [COMPUTER / VIDEO / S-VIDEO]/[COMPUTER 1/COM-

PUTER 2/VIDEO/S-VIDEO (NP216 only)
This function switches the 3D mode between ON and OFF for each input.
NOTE:
To confirm that the supported 3D signal is accepted, use either way of the following:
- Make sure that [3D] is displayed in the top right of the screen after the source is selected.
- Display [INFO.] → [SOURCE] → [3D SIGNAL] and make sure that "SUPPORTED" is displayed.
Enabling DLP® Link to view 3D images [DLP® Link]

To use DLP® Link compatible LCD shutter eyeglasses, select [ON].
To use other LCD shutter eyeglasses such as IR or wired LCD shutter types, select [OFF].
If you use LCD shutter eyeglasses that are not compatible with DLP® Link, the LCD shutter eyeglasses may not
synchronize to the projector properly.
41
Inverting the order of displaying the images for left eye and right eye [L/R INVERT]
This function changes the order of displaying the images for left eye and right eye.
Change the setting if you have difficulty seeing 3D images.
• Each time you press the PICTURE button on the remote control, the following menu items will change:
[L/R INVERT] → [CONTRAST] → [BRIGHTNESS] → ...
NOTE: When [OFF] is selected for [DLP® Link], this function is not available.
NOTE:
• If 3D content is played back on your computer and the performance is poor it may be caused by the CPU or graphics chip. In this
case you may have difficulty seeing the 3D images as they were intended. Check to see if your computer meets the requirements
provided in your user's manual included with your 3D content.
• The DLP® Link compatible LCD shutter eyeglasses allow you to view 3D images by receiving synch signals, which are included
in left eye and right eye images, reflected from the screen. Depending on environments or conditions such as the ambient bright-
ness, screen size or viewing distance, the LCD shutter eyeglasses may fail to receive synch signals, causing poor 3D images.
• When the 3D mode is enabled, [3D] will be displayed in the [SOURCE] menu.
• When the 3D mode is enabled, the Keystone correction range will be narrower.
• When the 3D mode is enabled, the following settings are invalid.
[WALL COLOR], [PRESET], [REFERENCE], [COLOR TEMPERATURE]
• Refer to the [SOURCE] screen under the [INFO.] menu for information on whether the input signal is 3D compatible.
• Signals other than those listed below will be out of range or will be displayed in 2D.
[COMPUTER]/[COMPUTER 1/COMPUTER 2 (NP216 only)]
640x480@120Hz, 800x600@120Hz, 1024x768@120Hz, 1280x720@120Hz, 640x480@60Hz, 800x600@60Hz, 1024x768@60Hz,
1280x720@60Hz
[VIDEO/S-VIDEO]
Signals with vertical frequency of 60Hz
Troubleshooting on viewing 3D images

If images will not be displayed in 3D or 3D images appear as 2D, check the following table. Also refer to the user's
manual accompanied with your 3D content or LCD shutter eyeglasses.
Possible causes Solutions

• The content you are playing back is not compatible with 3D. • Play back a content compatible with 3D.
• Use the projector's menu to turn on 3D mode for the selected
• The 3D mode was turned off for the selected source.
source. (→ page 41)
• You are not using our recommended LCD shutter eyeglasses. • Use our recommended LCD shutter eyeglasses. (→ page 40)
• If the shutter of your DLP® Link compatible LCD shutter eye-
glasses cannot synchronize with the currently projected source,
the following are possible causes:
- Your LCD shutter eyeglasses are not switched on. • Switch on your LCD shutter eyeglasses.
- The battery in the LCD shutter eyeglasses ran down. • Recharge the battery or replace it.
• Use the projector's menu to turn on [DLP® Link]. (→ page
- [DLP® Link] was not turned on.
41)
• Move closer to the screen until the viewer gets 3D images.
- The viewing distance between the viewer and the screen is
• Or use the projector's menu to select [NON-INVERT] for [L/R
too far.
INVERT].
• Keep light sources or other projectors away from the viewer.
- There are bright light sources or other projectors near the • Do not look toward a bright light source.
viewer. • Or use the projector's menu to select [NON-INVERT] for [L/R
INVERT].
• If your computer is not set for 3D viewing, the following are
possible causes:
- Your computer does not meet the requirements for 3D view- • Check to see if your computer meets the requirements provided
ing. in your user's manual included with your 3D content.
- Your computer is not set for 3D output. • Set your computer for 3D output.
- The resolution of output signal is out of range. • Select the resolution of output signal supporting 3D.
- The refresh rate of output signal is out of range. • Change the refresh rate to 60Hz or 120Hz.
42
5. Using On-Screen Menu
 Using the Menus
NOTE: The on-screen menu may not be displayed correctly while interlaced motion video image is projected.
1. Press the MENU button on the remote control or the projector cabinet to display the menu.
NOTE: The commands such as ENTER, EXIT, ,  in the bottom show available buttons for your operation.
2. Press the  buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet to display the submenu.
3. Press the ENTER button on the remote control or the projector cabinet to highlight the top item or the first
tab.
4. Use the  buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet to select the item you want to adjust or
set.
You can use the  buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet to select the tab you want.
5. Press the ENTER button on the remote control or the projector cabinet to display the submenu window.
6. Adjust the level or turn the selected item on or off by using the  buttons on the remote control or
the projector cabinet.
Changes are stored until adjusted again.
7. Repeat steps 2 -6 to adjust an additional item, or press the EXIT button on the remote control or the projec-
tor cabinet to quit the menu display.
NOTE: When a menu or message is displayed, several lines of information may be lost, depending on the signal or settings.
8. Press the MENU button to close the menu.

To return to the previous menu, press the EXIT button.
43
2 Menu Elements
Tab Slide bar
Solid triangle
Available buttons
Source
Highlight
Radio button
High Altitude symbol
Thermometer symbol Off Timer remaining

time
Key Lock symbol
Menu windows or dialog boxes typically have the following elements:
Highlight ��Indicates the selected menu or item.

Solid triangle ��Indicates further choices are available. A highlighted triangle indicates the item is active.
Tab ��Indicates a group of features in a dialog box. Selecting on any tab brings its page to the front.
Radio button ��Use this round button to select an option in a dialog box.
Source ��Indicates the currently selected source.
Off Timer remaining time ��Indicates the remaining countdown time when the [OFF TIMER] is preset.
Slide bar ��Indicates settings or the direction of adjustment.
Key Lock symbol ��Indicates the [CONTROL PANEL LOCK] is enabled.
Thermometer symbol ��Indicates the [ECO MODE] is forcibly set to [ON] mode because the internal temperature is too
high.
High Altitude symbol ��Indicates the [FAN MODE] is set to [HIGH ALTITUDE] mode.
44
3 List of Menu Items

Some menu items are not available depending on the input source.
Menu Item Default Options
COMPUTER
*
COMPUTER1, COMPUTER 2 (NP216 only)
SOURCE
VIDEO *
S-VIDEO *
PRESET * 1–6
HIGH-BRIGHT, PRESENTATION, VIDEO, MOVIE,
REFERENCE *
GRAPHIC, sRGB
GAMMA
* DYNAMIC, NATURAL, BLACK DETAIL
CORRECTION
DETAIL
COLOR
SETTINGS * 5000, 6500, 7800, 8500, 9300, 10500
TEMPERATURE
BrilliantColor OFF, MEDIUM, HIGH
PICTURE
DYNAMIC
* OFF, ON
CONTRAST
CONTRAST
BRIGHTNESS
ADJUST
SHARPNESS
COLOR
HUE
RESET
CLOCK *
PHASE *
HORIZONTAL *
IMAGE VERTICAL *
OPTIONS ASPECT RATIO * AUTO, 4:3, 16:9, 15:9, 16:10, WIDE ZOOM, NATIVE
POSITION 0 -16 to +16
NOISE REDUCTION LOW OFF, LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH
TELECINE 2-2/2-3 AUTO OFF, 2-2/2-3 AUTO, 2-2 ON, 2-3 ON
KEYSTONE 0 -40° to +40°
KEYSTONE SAVE OFF OFF, ON
OFF, WHITEBOARD, BLACKBOARD, BLACKBOARD
WALL COLOR OFF (GRAY), LIGHT YELLOW, LIGHT GREEN, LIGHT
BLUE, SKY BLUE, LIGHT ROSE, PINK
ECO MODE OFF OFF, ON
CLOSED CAPTION (for North OFF, CAPTION1, CAPTION2, CAPTION3, CAPTION4,
GENERAL OFF
America only) TEXT1, TEXT2, TEXT3, TEXT4
ENGLISH, DEUTSCH, FRANÇAIS, ITALIANO,
ESPAÑOL, SVENSKA, 日本語
DANSK, PORTUGUÊS, ČEŠTINA, MAGYAR, POLSKI,
LANGUAGE ENGLISH
NEDERLANDS, SUOMI
NORSK, TÜRKÇE, РУССКИЙ, , Ελληνικά, 中文, 한
국어
COLOR SELECT COLOR COLOR, MONOCHROME
SOURCE DISPLAY ON OFF, ON
ID DISPLAY ON OFF, ON
SETUP MENU
ECO MESSAGE OFF OFF, ON
DISPLAY TIME AUTO 45 SEC MANUAL, AUTO 5 SEC, AUTO 15 SEC, AUTO 45 SEC
BACKGROUND LOGO BLUE, BLACK, LOGO
DESKTOP DESKTOP FRONT, CEILING REAR, DESKTOP REAR,
ORIENTATION
FRONT CEILING FRONT
CONTROL PANEL LOCK OFF OFF, ON
SECURITY OFF OFF, ON
INSTALLATION
COMMUNICATION SPEED 38400bps 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps
CONTROL ID
1 1–254
CONTROL ID NUMBER
CONTROL ID OFF OFF, ON
FAN MODE AUTO AUTO, HIGH, HIGH ALTITUDE
AUTO, NTSC3.58, NTSC4.43, PAL, PAL-M, PAL-N,
VIDEO AUTO
COLOR PAL60, SECAM
OPTIONS(1) SYSTEM AUTO, NTSC3.58, NTSC4.43, PAL, PAL-M, PAL-N,
S-VIDEO AUTO
PAL60, SECAM
WXGA MODE OFF OFF, ON
BEEP ON OFF, ON
45
OFF TIMER OFF OFF, 0:30, 1:00, 2:00, 4:00, 8:00, 12:00, 16:00
STANDBY MODE NORMAL NORMAL, POWER-SAVING
AUTO POWER ON(AC) OFF OFF, ON
AUTO POWER ON(COMP.)
AUTO POWER ON(COMP1) OFF OFF, ON
(NP216 only)
OPTIONS(2) AUTO POWER OFF OFF OFF, 0:05, 0:10, 0:20, 0:30
NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110: LAST, AUTO,
COMPUTER, VIDEO, S-VIDEO
DEFAULT SOURCE SELECT LAST
NP216: LAST, AUTO, COMPUTER1, COMPUTER2,
SETUP
VIDEO, S-VIDEO
CONTROL TERMINAL (NP216/
PC CONTROL PC CONTROL, LAN
NP215 only)
COMPUTER
COMPUTER1(NP216 only) OFF OFF, ON
COMPUTER2(NP216 only)
3D VIDEO OFF OFF, ON
S-VIDEO OFF OFF, ON
DLP® Link ON OFF, ON
L/R INVERT NON-INVERT NON-INVERT, INVERT
LAMP LIFE REMAINING
USAGE TIME LAMP HOURS USED
TOTAL CARBON SAVINGS
SOURCE NAME
HORIZONTAL FREQUENCY
VERTICAL FREQUENCY
SIGNAL TYPE
SOURCE VIDEO TYPE
SYNC TYPE
SYNC POLARITY
SCAN TYPE
INFO. 3D SIGNAL
PROJECTOR NAME
WIRED LAN IP ADDRESS
(NP216/NP215 SUBNET MASK
only) GATEWAY
MAC ADDRESS
PRODUCT
SERIAL NUMBER
FIRMWARE
VERSION
DATA
CONTROL ID (when [CONTROL
ID] is set)
CURRENT SIGNAL
ALL DATA
RESET
NETWORK SETTINGS (NP216/NP215 only)
CLEAR LAMP HOURS
* The asterisk (*) indicates that the default setting varies depending on the signal.
46
4 Menu Descriptions & Functions [SOURCE]
[NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110] [NP216]
COMPUTER
Selects the computer connected to your COMPUTER IN input connector.
NOTE:
• When the component input signal is connected to the COMPUTER IN connector, select [COMPUTER].
• The projector will determine if the input signal is RGB or component signal.
COMPUTER1 & COMPUTER2 (NP216 only)

Selects the computer connected to your COMPUTER 1 IN or COMPUTER 2 IN input connector.
NOTE:
• When the component input signal is connected to the COMPUTER 1 IN connector, select [COMPUTER1].
• The projector will determine if the input signal is RGB or component signal.
VIDEO
Selects what is connected to your VIDEO input-VCR, DVD player or document camera.
S-VIDEO
Selects what is connected to your S-VIDEO input-VCR or DVD player.
NOTE: A frame may freeze for a brief period of time when a video is played back in fast-forward or fast-rewind with a Video or S-
Video source.
47
5 Menu Descriptions & Functions [ADJUST]

[PICTURE]
[PRESET]
This function allows you to select optimized settings for your projected image.
You can adjust neutral tint for yellow, cyan or magenta.
There are six factory presets optimized for various types of images. You can also use [DETAIL SETTINGS] to set user
adjustable settings to customize each gamma or color.
Your settings can be stored in [PRESET 1] to [PRESET 6].
HIGH-BRIGHT �� Recommended for use in a brightly lit room.
PRESENTATION �� Recommended for making a presentation using a PowerPoint file.
VIDEO �� Recommended for typical TV program viewing.
MOVIE �� Recommended for movies.
GRAPHIC �� Recommended for graphics.
sRGB �� Standard color values
[DETAIL SETTINGS]
Storing Your Customized Settings [REFERENCE]

This function allows you to store your customized settings in [PRESET 1] to [PRESET 6].
First, select a base preset mode from [REFERENCE], then set [GAMMA CORRECTION], [COLOR TEMPERATURE],
[Brilliant Color] and [DYNAMIC CONTRAST].
HIGH-BRIGHT �� Recommended for use in a brightly lit room.

PRESENTATION �� Recommended for making a presentation using a PowerPoint file.
VIDEO �� Recommended for typical TV program viewing.
MOVIE �� Recommended for movies.
GRAPHIC �� Recommended for graphics.
sRGB �� Standard color values.
48
Selecting Gamma Correction Mode [GAMMA CORRECTION]
Each mode is recommended for:
DYNAMIC �� Creates a high-contrast picture.

NATURAL �� Natural reproduction of the picture.
BLACK DETAIL �� Emphasizes detail in dark areas of the picture.
Adjusting Color Temperature [COLOR TEMPERATURE]

This option allows you to select the color temperature of your choice.
NOTE:
• When [PRESENTATION] or [HIGH-BRIGHT] is selected in [REFERENCE], this function is not available.
• When a color option other than [OFF] is selected for [WALL COLOR], this function is not available.
Adjusting Brightness of White Areas [BrilliantColor]

This function allows you to adjust the brightness of the white areas. As the picture becomes dim, it looks more natu-
ral.
OFF �� Turns off the BrilliantColor feature.
MEDIUM �� Increases brightness of the white areas.
HIGH �� Increases more brightness of the white areas.
NOTE:
• [BrilliantColor] is not available when [HIGH-BRIGHT] is selected for [REFERENCE].
• [BrillianColor] can be set to [MEDIUM] or [HIGH] when [PRESENTATION] is selected for [REFERENCE]
Adjusting Brightness and Contrast [DYNAMIC CONTRAST]

Turning on [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] allows the contrast ratio to be adjusted to the proper level.
[CONTRAST]
Adjusts the intensity of the image according to the incoming signal.
[BRIGHTNESS]
Adjusts the brightness level or the back raster intensity.
[SHARPNESS]
Controls the detail of the image.
[COLOR]
Increases or decreases the color saturation level.
[HUE]
Varies the color level from +/− green to +/− blue. The red level is used as reference.
Input signal CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS SHARPNESS COLOR HUE
Computer/Computer 1 & 2 (NP216) Yes Yes No No No
Component Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Video, S-Video Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes = Adjustable, No = Not adjustable
49
[RESET]
The settings and adjustments for [PICTURE] will be returned to the factory settings with the exception of the following;
Preset numbers and [REFERENCE] within the [PRESET] screen.
The settings and adjustments under [DETAIL SETTINGS] within the [PRESET] screen that are not currently selected
will not be reset.
50
[IMAGE OPTIONS]
Adjusting Clock and Phase [CLOCK/PHASE]

This allows you to manually adjust CLOCK and PHASE.
CLOCK �� Use this item to fine tune the computer image or to remove any vertical banding that might appear. This
function adjusts the clock frequencies that eliminate the horizontal banding in the image.
This adjustment may be necessary when you connect your computer for the first time.
PHASE �� Use this item to adjust the clock phase or to reduce video noise, dot interference or cross talk. (This is
evident when part of your image appears to be shimmering.)
Use [PHASE] only after the [CLOCK] is complete.
51
Adjusting Horizontal/Vertical Position [HORIZONTAL/VERTICAL]
Adjusts the image location horizontally and vertically.
- An image can be distorted during the adjustment of [CLOCK] and [PHASE]. This is not a malfunction.
- Your manual adjustments for [CLOCK], [PHASE], [HORIZONTAL], and [VERTICAL] will be stored in memory for
the current signal. The next time you project the signal with the same resolution, horizontal and vertical frequency,
its adjustments will be called up and applied.
To delete adjustments stored in memory, from the menu, you select [RESET] → [CURRENT SIGNAL] or [ALL
DATA] and reset the adjustments.
Selecting Aspect Ratio [ASPECT RATIO]

The term “aspect ratio” refers to the ratio of width to height of a projected image.
The projector automatically determines the incoming signal and displays it in its appropriate aspect ratio.
• This table shows typical resolutions and aspect ratios that most computers support.
Resolution Aspect Ratio

VGA 640 x 480 4:3
SVGA 800 x 600 4:3
XGA 1024 x 768 4:3
WXGA 1280 x 768 15:9
WXGA 1280 x 800 16:10
WXGA+ 1440 x 900 16:10
SXGA 1280 x 1024 5:4
SXGA+ 1400 x 1050 4:3
UXGA 1600 x 1200 4:3
Options Function
AUTO The projector will automatically determine the incoming signal and display it in its aspect
ratio. (→ next page)
The projector may erroneously determine the aspect ratio depending on its signal. If this
occurs, select the appropriate aspect ratio from the following.
4:3 The image is displayed in 4:3 aspect ratio.
WIDE ZOOM The image is stretched left and right.
Parts of the displayed image are cropped at the left and right edges and therefore not
visible.
52
NATIVE The projector displays the current image in its true resolution when the incoming computer
signal has a lower resolution than the projector’s native resolution.
[Example 1] When the incoming sig-

nal with the resolution of 800 x 600 is
displayed on the NP115/NP110:
[Example 2] When the incoming

signal with the resolution of 800 x 600
is displayed on the NP216/NP215/
NP210:
NOTE:
• When a non-computer signal is displayed, the [NATIVE] is not available.
• When you are displaying an RGB image with a higher resolution than the projector's native
resolution such as SXGA, the image will be displayed in the projector’s native resolution (XGA)
even if [NATIVE] is selected.
Sample image when the appropriate aspect ratio is automatically determined

[Computer signal]
Aspect ratio of incoming signal 4:3 5:4 16:9 15:9 16:10
Sample image when the appro-

priate aspect ratio is automati-
cally determined
[Video signal]
Aspect ratio of incoming signal 4:3 Letterbox Squeeze
Sample image when the as-

pect ratio is automatically de-
termined
NOTE: To display a squeezed signal prop-
erly, select [16:9] or [WIDE ZOOM].
TIP:
• Image position can be adjusted vertically using [POSITION] when the [16:9], [15:9], or [16:10] aspect ratios are selected.
• The term “letterbox” refers to a more landscape-oriented image when compared to a 4:3 image, which is the standard aspect
ratio for a video source.
The letterbox signal has aspect ratios with the vista size “1.85:1” or cinema scope size “2.35:1” for movie film.
• The term “squeeze” refers to the compressed image of which aspect ratio is converted from 16:9 to 4:3.
Adjusting the Vertical Position of Image [POSITION]

(only when [16:9], [15:9], or [16:10] is selected for [ASPECT RATIO])
When [16:9], [15:9], or [16:10] is selected in [ASPECT RATIO], the image is displayed with black borders on the top
and bottom.
You can adjust the vertical position from the top to the bottom of the black area.
53
Turning on Noise Reduction [NOISE REDUCTION]
This function allows you to select the level of noise reduction.
The projector is set to the optimized level for each signal at the factory.
Select your preference item for your signal when video noise is noticeable.
The options are [OFF], [LOW], [MEDIUM], and [HIGH].
NOTE: This feature is not available for the RGB signal. Noise reduction set to off gives best image quality by way of higher bandwidth.
Noise reduction set to on softens the image.
Setting Telecine Mode [TELECINE]

This function allows you to convert motion picture film images into video. The process adds additional frames to the
picture in order to increase the frame rate.
NOTE: This feature is available only when an SDTV signal is selected.
OFF �� Turns off the TELECINE mode.
2-2/2-3 AUTO �� Detects pull-down correction method.
2-2 ON �� Uses 2-2 pull-down correction method
2-3 ON �� Uses 2-3 pull-down correction method
NOTE: This feature is not available for 480p, 576p, 720p, 1080i and RGB signals.
54
6 Menu Descriptions & Functions [SETUP]

[GENERAL]
Correcting Vertical Keystone Distortion Manually [KEYSTONE]

You can correct vertical distortion manually. (→ page 24)
TIP: When this option is highlighted, pressing the ENTER button will display its slide bar for adjustment.
Saving Vertical Keystone Correction [KEYSTONE SAVE]

This option enables you to save your current keystone settings.
OFF �� Does not save current keystone correction settings. It will return your keystone correction settings to
“zero”.
ON �� Saves current keystone correction settings
Saving your change once affects all sources. The changes are saved when the projector is turned off.
Using the Wall Color Correction [WALL COLOR]

This function allows for quick adaptive color correction in applications where the screen material is not white.
NOTE:
• Selecting color options other than [OFF] will reduce brightness.
• When the 3D mode is enabled, the [WALL COLOR] item is not available.
55
Setting Eco Mode [ECO MODE]
This feature turns on or off the ECO mode. The lamp life can be extended by selecting [ON]. Selecting [ON] also
decreases fan noise when compared to [OFF] mode.
ECO MODE Description Status of LAMP indicator

This is the Default setting
OFF Off
(100% Brightness).
Select this mode to increase the lamp life
ON Steady Green light
(approx. 90% Brightness.)
NOTE:
• The [LAMP LIFE REMAINING] and [LAMP HOURS USED] can be checked in [USAGE TIME]. Select [INFO.] → [USAGE TIME].
(→ page 66)
• The projector will always enter into the [ECO MODE] [OFF] condition for 60 seconds immediately after the projector is turned on.
The lamp condition will not be affected even when [ECO MODE] is changed within this time period.
• After a lapse of 45 seconds from when the projector displays a blue, black or logo screen, [ECO MODE] will automatically switch
to [ON].
The projector will return to the [OFF] mode once a signal is accepted.
• If the projector becomes overheated in [OFF] mode because of use in a high-temperature room, there may be a case where the
[ECO MODE] automatically changes to [ON] mode to protect the projector. This mode is called “forced ECO mode”. When the
projector is in [ON] mode, the picture brightness decreases. The LAMP indicator’s steady light indicates the projector is in [ON]
mode. When the projector comes back to normal temperature, the [ECO MODE] returns to [OFF] mode.
Thermometer symbol [ ] indicates the [ECO MODE] is automatically set to [ON] mode because the internal temperature is too
high.
Setting Closed Caption [CLOSED CAPTION] (for North America only)

This option sets several closed caption modes that allow text to be superimposed on the projected image of Video
or S-Video.
OFF �� This exits the closed caption mode.
CAPTION 1-4 �� Text is superimposed.
TEXT 1-4 �� Text is displayed.
Selecting Menu Language [LANGUAGE]

You can choose one of 21 languages for on-screen instructions.
NOTE: Your setting will not be affected even when [RESET] is done from the menu.
56
[MENU]
Selecting Menu Color [COLOR SELECT]

You can choose between two options for menu color: COLOR and MONOCHROME.
Turning On / Off Source Display [SOURCE DISPLAY]

This option turns on or off input name display such as COMPUTER, VIDEO, S-VIDEO and No Input to be displayed
on the top right of the screen.
When [ON] is selected, the following will be displayed:
- An input name display such as [COMPUTER] will be shown immediately after source selection.
- [NO INPUT] will be shown when there is no signal present.
Turning ON/OFF Control ID [ID DISPLAY]

ID DISPLAY �� This option turns on or off the ID number which is displayed when the ID SET button on the remote control
is pressed.
Turning On / Off Eco Message [ECO MESSAGE]

This option turns on or off the following messages when the projector is turned on.
The Eco Message prompts the user to save energy. When [OFF] is selected for [ECO MODE], you will get a message
to prompt you to select [ON] for [ECO MODE].
When [ON] is selected for [ECO MODE]
To close the message, press the ENTER or the EXIT button. The message will disappear if no button operation is
done for 30 seconds.
When [OFF] is selected for [ECO MODE]
Pressing the ENTER button will display the [ECO MODE] screen. (→ page 56)
To close the message, press the EXIT button.
57
Selecting Menu Display Time [DISPLAY TIME]
This option allows you to select how long the projector waits after the last touch of a button to turn off the menu. The
preset choices are [MANUAL], [AUTO 5 SEC], [AUTO 15 SEC], and [AUTO 45 SEC]. The [AUTO 45 SEC] is the fac-
tory preset.
Selecting a Color or Logo for Background [BACKGROUND]

Use this feature to display a blue/black screen or logo when no signal is available. The default background is
[LOGO].
TIP: The logo can be changed.

For more information about how to change the logo, please consult your NEC or NEC-designated service station.
If you cannot find one in your area, ask your dealer.
58
[INSTALLATION]
Selecting Projector Orientation [ORIENTATION]

This reorients your image for your type of projection. The options are: desktop front projection, ceiling rear projection,
desktop rear projection, and ceiling front projection.
DESKTOP FRONT CEILING REAR
DESKTOP REAR CEILING FRONT
Disabling the Cabinet Buttons [CONTROL PANEL LOCK]

This option turns on or off the CONTROL PANEL LOCK function.
NOTE:
• This CONTROL PANEL LOCK does not affect the remote control functions.
• When the control panel is locked, pressing and holding the EXIT button on the projector cabinet for about 10 seconds will change
the setting to [OFF].
TIP: When the [CONTROL PANEL LOCK] is turned on, a key lock icon [ ] will be displayed at the bottom right of the menu.
Enabling Security [SECURITY]

This feature turns on or off the SECURITY function.
Unless the correct keyword is entered, the projector cannot project an image. (→ page 32)
59
Selecting Communication Speed [COMMUNICATION SPEED]
This feature sets the baud rate of the PC Control port (D-Sub 9P). It supports data rates from 4800 to 38400 bps. The
default is 38400 bps. Select the appropriate baud rate for your equipment to be connected (depending on the equip-
ment, a lower baud rate may be recommended for long cable runs).
NOTE: Your selected communication speed will not be affected even when [RESET] is done from the menu.
Setting ID to the Projector [CONTROL ID]

You can operate multiple projectors separately and independently with the single remote control that has the CONTROL
ID function. If you assign the same ID to all the projectors, you can conveniently operate all the projectors together
using the single remote control. To do so, you have to assign an ID number to each projector.
CONTROL ID NUMBER ��Select a number from 1 to 254 you wish to assign to your projector.
CONTROL ID ��Select [OFF] to turn off the CONTROL ID setting and select [ON] to turn on the CONTROL ID set-
ting.
NOTE:
• When [ON] is selected for [CONTROL ID], the projector cannot be operated by using the remote control that does not support
the CONTROL ID function. (In this case the buttons on the projector cabinet can be used.)
• Your setting will not be affected even when [RESET] is done from the menu.
• Pressing and holding the ENTER button on the projector cabinet for 10 seconds will display the menu for canceling the Control
ID.
Assigning or Changing the Control ID

1. Turn on the projector.
＋
2. Press the ID SET button on the remote control.
The CONTROL ID screen will be displayed.
If the projector can be operated with the current remote control ID, the [ACTIVE] will be displayed. If the projector
cannot be operated with the current remote control ID, the [INACTIVE] will be displayed. To operate the inactive
projector, assign the control ID used for the projector by using the following procedure (Step 3).
3. Press one of numeric keypad buttons while pressing and holding the ID SET button on the remote con-
trol.
Example:
＋
To assign “3”, press the “3” button on the remote control.
No ID means that all the projectors can be operated together with a single remote
control. To set “No ID”, enter “000” or press the CLEAR button.
TIP: The range of IDs is from 1 to 254.
4. Release the ID SET button.

The updated CONTROL ID screen will be displayed.
NOTE:
• The IDs can be cleared in a few days after the batteries are run down or removed.
• Accidentally pressing any one of the buttons of the remote control will clear currently specified
ID with batteries removed.
60
[OPTIONS(1)]
Selecting Fan Mode [FAN MODE]

This option allows you to select three modes for fan speed: Auto mode, High speed mode, and High Altitude mode.
AUTO �� The built-in fans automatically run at a variable speed according to the internal temperature.
HIGH �� The built-in fans run at high speed.
HIGH ALTITUDE �� The built-in fans run at a high speed. Select this option when using the projector at altitudes approximately
5500 feet/1700 meters or higher.
When you wish to cool down the temperature inside the projector quickly, select [HIGH].
NOTE:
• It is recommended that you select High speed mode if you use the projector non-stop for consecutive days.
• Set [FAN MODE] to [HIGH ALTITUDE] when using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters or higher.
• Using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters or higher without setting to [HIGH ALTITUDE] can cause
the projector to overheat and the protector could shut down. If this happens, wait a couple minutes and turn on the projector.
• Using the projector at altitudes less than approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters and setting to [HIGH ALTITUDE] can cause the
lamp to overcool, causing the image to flicker. Switch [FAN MODE] to [AUTO].
• Using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters or higher can shorten the life of optical components such
as the lamp.
Selecting [COLOR SYSTEM]

This feature enables you to select video standards manually.
Normally select [AUTO]. Select the video standard from the pulldown menu. This must be done for VIDEO and S-
VIDEO Connectors separately.
Enabling or Disabling WXGA Mode [WXGA MODE]

Selecting [ON] will give priority to a WXGA (1280 x 768) signal in recognizing an input signal.
When [WXGA MODE] is set to [ON], an XGA (1024 x 768) signal may not be recognized. In this case, select [OFF].
61
Enabling Key Sound and Error Sound [BEEP]
This feature turns on or off the button sound or alarm when the following operations are performed.
- Displaying the main menu

- Switching sources
- Pressing POWER ON or POWER OFF button
62
[OPTIONS(2)]
Using Off Timer [OFF TIMER]

The remaining countdown time will be displayed at the bottom of the menu when the [OFF TIMER] is preset.
1. Select your desired time between 30 minutes and 16 hours: OFF, 0:30, 1:00, 2:00, 4:00, 8:00, 12:00, 16:00.
2. Press the ENTER button on the remote control.
3. The remaining time starts counting down.
4. The projector will turn off after the countdown is complete.
NOTE:
• To cancel the preset time, set [OFF] for the preset time or turn off the power.
• When the remaining time reaches 3 minutes before the projector is turned off, the [THE PROJECTOR WILL TURN OFF WITHIN 3
MINUTES] message will be displayed on the bottom of the screen.
Selecting Power-saving in [STANDBY MODE]

The projector has two standby modes: [NORMAL] and [POWER-SAVING].
The POWER-SAVING mode is the mode that allows you to put the projector in the power-saving condition which
consumes less power than the NORMAL mode. The projector is preset for NORMAL mode at the factory.
NORMAL �� Power indicator: Orange light/STATUS indicator: Green light

POWER-SAVING �� Power indicator: Red light/STATUS indicator: Off
The following connectors, buttons or functions will not work during this mode.
- PC CONTROL port, and COMPUTER OUT connector (MONITOR OUT on NP216)
- LAN and Mail Alert functions (NP216/NP215 only)
- Buttons other than POWER button on the cabinet
- Buttons other than POWER ON button on the remote control
NOTE:
• When [CONTROL PANEL LOCK], [CONTROL ID], or [AUTO POWER ON(COMP.)] is turned on, the [STANDBY MODE] setting is
not available.
• The power consumption in the standby mode will not be included in calculating CO2 emission reduction.
Enabling Auto Power On [AUTO POWER ON(AC)]

Turns the projector on automatically when the power cable is inserted into an active power outlet. This eliminates the
need to always use the POWER button on the remote control or projector cabinet.
63
Turning On the Projector By Applying Computer Signal [AUTO POWER ON(COMP.)/[AUTO POWER
ON(COMP1) ] for NP216]
When the projector is in Standby mode, applying a computer signal from a computer connected to the COMPUTER
IN input (COMPUTER 1 IN on NP216) will power on the projector and simultaneously project the computer’s image.
This functionality eliminates the need to always use the POWER button on the remote control or the projector cabinet
to power on the projector.
NOTE:
• Disconnecting a computer signal from the computer will not power off the projector. We recommend using this function in com-
bination of the AUTO POWER OFF function.
• This function will not be available under the following conditions:
- when a component signal is applied to the COMPUTER IN (COMPUTER 1 IN on NP216) connector
- when a Sync on Green RGB signal or composite sync signal is applied
• To enable the AUTO POWER ON (COMP.)/AUTO POWER ON (COMP1) after turning off the projector, wait 3 seconds and input a
computer signal.
If a computer signal is still present when the projector is turned off, the AUTO POWER ON (COMP.)/AUTO POWER ON (COMP1)
will not work and the projector remains in standby mode.
Enabling Power Management [AUTO POWER OFF]

When this option is selected you can enable the projector to automatically turn off (at the selected time: 5min., 10min.,
20min., 30min.) if there is no signal received by any input or if no operation is performed.
Selecting Default Source [DEFAULT SOURCE SELECT]

You can set the projector to default to any one of its inputs each time the projector is turned on.
LAST ��Sets the projector to default to the previous or last active input each time the projector is turned
on.
AUTO ��Searches for an active source in order of COMPUTER → VIDEO → S-VIDEO → COMPUTER (COM-
PUTER 1 → COMPUTER 2 on NP216) and displays the first found source.
COMPUTER ��Displays the computer signal from the COMPUTER IN connector every time the projector is turned
on.
COMPUTER 1
(NP216 only) ��Displays the computer signal from the COMPUTER 1 IN connector every time the projector is turned
on.
COMPUTER 2
(NP216 only) ��Displays the computer signal from the COMPUTER 2 IN connector every time the projector is turned
on.
VIDEO ��Displays the Video source from the VIDEO IN connector every time the projector is turned on.
S-VIDEO ��Displays the Video source from the S-VIDEO IN connector every time the projector is turned on.
Selecting Port for External Equipment [CONTROL TERMINAL] (NP216/NP215 only)

This option allows you to select a port for controlling the projector either from PC Control or over a LAN.
PC CONTROL �� Select for controlling the projector from external equipment connected to the PC CONTROL port (D-Sub 9
Pin).
LAN �� Select for controlling the projector from external equipment connected to the LAN port (RJ-45).
NOTE:
- When [POWER-SAVING] is selected for [STANDBY MODE], controlling the projector from external equipment is not possible.
- The PC Control port and LAN port are not active at the same time.
64
[3D]
[NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110] [NP216]
Selecting input connected to a source of 3D images [COMPUTER / VIDEO / S-VIDEO]/[COMPUTER 1/COM-

PUTER 2/VIDEO/S-VIDEO] (NP216 only)
This function switches the 3D mode between ON and OFF for each input.
ON �� Turns on the 3D mode for the selected input.

NOTE:
To confirm that the supported 3D signal is accepted, use either way of the following:
- Make sure that [3D] is displayed in the top right of the screen after the source is selected.
- Display [INFO.] → [SOURCE] → [3D SIGNAL] and make sure that "SUPPORTED" is displayed.
OFF �� Turns off the 3D mode for the selected input.
Enabling DLP® Link to view 3D images [DLP® Link]

This function switches the DLP® Link system between ON and OFF.
ON �� Turns on the DLP® Link system.

OFF �� Turns off the DLP® Link system.
NOTE:
To use DLP® Link compatible LCD shutter eyeglasses, select [ON].
To use other LCD shutter eyeglasses such as IR or wired LCD shutter types, select [OFF].
If you use LCD shutter eyeglasses that are not compatible with DLP® Link, the LCD shutter eyeglasses may not synchronize to the
projector properly.
Inverting the order of displaying the images for left eye and right eye [L/R INVERT]
This function changes the order of displaying the images for left eye and right eye.
Change the setting if you have difficulty seeing 3D images.
Each time you press the PICTURE button on the remote control, the following menu items will change:
[L/R INVERT] → [CONTRAST] → [BRIGHTNESS] ...
65
7 Menu Descriptions & Functions [INFO.]

Displays the status of the current signal and lamp usage. This item has three pages (four pages on NP216/NP215).
The information included is as follows:
TIP: Pressing the HELP button on the remote control will show the [INFO.] menu items.
[USAGE TIME]
[LAMP LIFE REMAINING] (%)*

[LAMP HOURS USED] (H)
[TOTAL CARBON SAVINGS] (kg-CO2)
* The progress indicator shows the percentage of remaining bulb life.

The value informs you of the amount of lamp usage. When the remaining lamp time reaches 0, the LAMP LIFE
REMAINING bar indicator changes from 0% to 100 Hours and starts counting down.
If the remaining lamp time reaches 0 hours, the projector will not turn on regardless of whether the ECO MODE
is set to OFF or ON.
• The message to the effect that the lamp should be replaced will be displayed for one minute when the projector
is turned on and when the POWER button on the projector or the remote control is pressed.
To dismiss this message, press any button on the projector or the remote control.
Lamp life(H)
ECO MODE Replacement lamp
OFF ON
3500 5000 NP13LP
• [TOTAL CARBON SAVINGS]

This displays the estimated carbon saving information in kg. The carbon footprint factor in the carbon saving cal-
culation is based on the OECD (2008 Edition).
66
[SOURCE]
[SOURCE NAME] [HORIZONTAL FREQUENCY]

[VERTICAL FREQUENCY] [SIGNAL TYPE]
[VIDEO TYPE] [SYNC TYPE]
[SYNC POLARITY] [SCAN TYPE]
[3D SIGNAL]
[WIRED LAN] (NP216/NP215 only)
[PROJECTOR NAME] [IP ADDRESS]

[SUBNET MASK] [GATEWAY]
[MAC ADDRESS]
[VERSION]
[PRODUCT]
[SERIAL NUMBER]
[FIRMWARE] Version
[DATA] Version
[CONTROL ID] (when [CONTROL ID] is set)
67
8 Menu Descriptions & Functions [RESET]

[NP210/NP115/NP110] [NP216/NP215]
Returning to Factory Default [RESET]

The RESET feature allows you to change adjustments and settings to the factory preset for a (all) source (s) except
the following:
[CURRENT SIGNAL]
Resets the adjustments for the current signal to the factory preset levels.
The items that can be reset are: [PRESET], [CONTRAST], [BRIGHTNESS], [COLOR], [HUE], [SHARPNESS],
[ASPECT RATIO], [HORIZONTAL], [VERTICAL], [CLOCK], [PHASE], [NOISE REDUCTION], and [TELECINE].
[ALL DATA]
Reset all the adjustments and settings for all the signals to the factory preset.
All items can be reset EXCEPT [LANGUAGE], [BACKGROUND], [SECURITY], [COMMUNICATION SPEED],
[CONTROL ID], [STANDBY MODE], [FAN MODE], [CONTROL TERMINAL] (NP216/NP215 only), [LAMP LIFE
REMAINING], [LAMP HOURS USED], [TOTAL CARBON SAVINGS], and [NETWORK SETTINGS] (NP216/NP215
only).
To reset the lamp usage time, see “Clearing Lamp Hour Meter [CLEAR LAMP HOURS]” below.
Clearing Networking Settings [NETWORK SETTINGS] (NP216/NP215 only)

Returns [DHCP], [IP ADDRESS], [SUBNET MASK], and [GATEWAY] to the default settings.
Clearing Lamp Hour Meter [CLEAR LAMP HOURS]

Resets the lamp clock back to zero. Selecting this option displays submenu for a confirmation. Select [YES] and press
the ENTER button.
NOTE: Elapsed time of the lamp use will not be affected even when [RESET] is done from the menu.
NOTE: The projector will turn off and go into standby mode when you continue to use the projector for another 100 hours after the
lamp has reached the end of its life. In this condition you cannot clear the lamp hour meter on the menu. If this happens, press the
HELP button on the remote control for 10 seconds to reset the lamp clock back to zero. Do this only after replacing the lamp.
68
6. Maintenance
This section describes the simple maintenance procedures you should follow to clean the cabinet and the lens, and
replace the lamp.
 Cleaning the Cabinet and the Lens

1. Turn off the projector before cleaning.
2. Clean the cabinet periodically with a damp cloth. If heavily soiled, use a mild detergent. Never use strong
detergents or solvents such as alcohol or thinner.
Vacuum the ventilation

inlet of the cabinet.
Note on Cleaning the Lens

Use a blower or lens paper to clean the lens, and be careful not to scratch or mar the lens.
69
6. Maintenance
 Replacing the Lamp

When the lamp reaches the end of its life, the LAMP indicator in the cabinet will blink red. Even though the lamp may
still be working, replace the lamp to maintain the optimal projector performance. After replacing the lamp, be sure to
clear the lamp hour meter. (→ page 68)
CAUTION
• DO NOT TOUCH THE LAMP immediately after it has been used. It will be extremely hot. Turn the projector off,
• DO NOT REMOVE ANY SCREWS except one lamp cover screw and three lamp housing screws. You could receive
an electric shock.
• Do not break the glass on the lamp housing.
Keep finger prints off the glass surface on the lamp housing. Leaving finger prints on the glass surface might cause
an unwanted shadow and poor picture quality.
• The projector will turn off and go into standby mode when you continue to use the projector for another 100 hours
after the lamp has reached the end of its life. If this happens, be sure to replace the lamp. If you continue to use
the lamp after the lamp reaches the end of its life, the lamp bulb may shatter, and pieces of glass may be scattered
in the lamp case. Do not touch them as the pieces of glass may cause injury. If this happens, contact your NEC
dealer for lamp replacement.
*NOTE: This message will be displayed under the following conditions:

• for one minute after the projector has been powered on
• when the (POWER) button on the projector cabinet or the POWER OFF button on the remote control is pressed
To turn off the message, press any button on the projector cabinet or the remote control.
To replace the lamp:

Optional lamp and tools needed for replacement:
• Replacement lamp: NP13LP
• Phillips screwdriver or equivalent
70
6. Maintenance
1. Remove the lamp cover.
(1) Loosen the lamp cover screw
• The lamp cover screw is not removable.
(2) Push and slide the lamp cover off.
2. Remove the lamp housing.

(1) Loosen the three screws securing the lamp housing until the phillips screwdriver goes into a freewheeling condi-
tion.
• The three screws are not removable.
• There is an interlock on this case to prevent the risk of electrical shock. Do not attempt to circumvent this
interlock.
(2) Remove the lamp housing by holding it.
CAUTION:
Make sure that the lamp housing is cool
enough to before removing it.
Interlock
71
6. Maintenance
3. Install a new lamp housing.
(1) Insert a new lamp housing until the lamp housing is plugged into the socket.
CAUTION
Do not use a lamp other than the NEC replacement lamp NP13LP.
Order this from your NEC dealer.
(2) Push the top center of the lamp housing to secure it.
(3) Secure it in place with the three screws.
• Be sure to tighten the screws.
Hold the cabinet with your hand to keep it from tilting while you tighten the screw.
4. Reattach the lamp cover.

(1) Slide the lamp cover back until it snaps into place.
(2) Tighten the screw to secure the lamp cover.
• Be sure to tighten the screw.
5. Connect the supplied power cable, and turn on the projector.
6. Finally, select the menu → [RESET] → [CLEAR LAMP HOURS] to reset the lamp usage hours.
NOTE: When you continue to use the projector for another 100 hours after the lamp has reached the end of its life, the projector
cannot turn on and the menu is not displayed.
If this happens, press the HELP button on the remote control for 10 seconds to reset the lamp clock back to zero.
When the lamp time clock is reset to zero, the LAMP indicator goes out.
72
7. Appendix
 Troubleshooting
This section helps you resolve problems you may encounter while setting up or using the projector.
Indicator Messages
Power Indicator
Indicator Condition Projector Condition Note

Off The power cable is unplugged. –
Blinking light Green 0.5 sec On, The projector is getting ready to turn on. Wait for a moment.
0.5 sec Off
2.5 sec On, Off Timer is enabled. –
0.5 sec Off
Steady light Green The projector is turned on. –
Orange [NORMAL] is selected for [STANDBY MODE] –
Red [POWER-SAVING] is selected for [STANDBY –
MODE]
Status Indicator

Normal or Standby ([POWER-SAVING] for
Off –
[STANDBY MODE])
Blinking light Red 1 cycle (0.5 sec Lamp cover error or lamp housing error Replace the lamp cover or lamp housing cor-
On, 2.5 sec Off) rectly.
2 cycle (0.5 sec Temperature error The projector is overheated. Move the projector to
On, 0.5 sec Off) a cooler location.
4 cycle (0.5 sec Fan error Fans will not work correctly.
On, 0.5 sec Off)
6 cycle (0.5 sec Lamp error Lamp fails to light. Wait a full minute and then
On, 0.5 sec Off) turn on again.
Green Re-firing the lamp (The projector is cooling The projector is re-firing.
down.) Wait for a moment.
Steady light Green Standby ([NORMAL] for [STANDBY MODE]) –
Orange Cabinet button is locked You have pressed cabinet button when Cabinet
Button is locked.
CONTROL ID error Remote control ID and projector ID are not
matched.
Lamp Indicator

Off Normal –
Blinking light Red Lamp has reached its end of life. Lamp replace- Replace the lamp.
ment message will be displayed.
Steady light Red Lamp has been used beyond its limit. The projec- Replace the lamp.
tor will not turn on until the lamp is replaced.
Green [ECO MODE] is set to [ON] –
Over-Temperature Protection
If the temperature inside the projector rises too high, the over-temperature protector will automatically turn off the lamp
with the STATUS indicator blinking (2-cycle On and Off.)
Should this happen, do the following:
• Unplug the power cable after the cooling fans stop.
• Move the projector to a cooler location if the room where you are presenting is particularly too warm.
• Clean the ventilation holes if they are clogged with dust.
• Wait about 60 minutes until the inside of the projector becomes cool enough.
73
7. Appendix
Common Problems & Solutions (→ “Power/Status/Lamp Indicator” on page 73.)
Problem Check These Items
Does not turn on • Check that the power cable is plugged in and that the power button on the projector cabinet or the remote
or shut down control is on. (→ pages 17 and 18)
• Ensure that the lamp cover is installed correctly. (→ page 72)
• Check to see if the projector has overheated. If there is insufficient ventilation around the projector or if the
room where you are presenting is particularly warm, move the projector to a cooler location.
• Check to see if you continue to use the projector for another 100 hours after the lamp has reached the end of its life.
If so, replace the lamp. After replacing the lamp, reset the lamp hours used. (→ page 68)
• The lamp may fail to light. Wait a full minute and then turn on the power again.
• Set [FAN MODE] to [HIGH ALTITUDE] when using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700
meters or higher. Using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters or higher without setting
to [HIGH ALTITUDE] can cause the projector to overheat and the projector could shut down. If this happens,
wait a couple minutes and turn on the projector. (→ page 61)
If you turn on the projector immediately after the lamp is turned off, the fans run without displaying an image
for some time and then the projector will display the image. Wait for a moment.
Will turn off • Ensure that the [OFF TIMER] or [AUTO POWER OFF] is off. (→ page 63, 64)
No picture • Use the COMPUTER1, the VIDEO or the S-VIDEO button on the remote control to select your source (Com-
puter, Video or S-Video). (→ page 20) If there is still no picture, press the button again.
• Ensure your cables are connected properly.
• Use menus to adjust the brightness and contrast. (→ page 49)
• Remove the lens cap.
• Reset the settings or adjustments to factory preset levels using the [RESET] in the Menu. (→ page 68)
• Enter your registered keyword if the Security function is enabled. (→ page 32)
• Be sure to connect the projector and notebook PC while the projector is in standby mode and before turning
on the power to the notebook PC.
In most cases the output signal from the notebook PC is not turned on unless connected to the projector before
being powered up.
* If the screen goes blank while using your remote control, it may be the result of the computer’s screen-saver
or power management software.
• See also the next page.
Picture suddenly be- • Check if the projector is in the Forced ECO mode because of too high ambient temperature. If this is the case, lower
comes dark the internal temperature of the projector by selecting [HIGH] for [FAN MODE]. (→ page 61)
Color tone or hue is • Check if an appropriate color is selected in [WALL COLOR]. If so, select an appropriate option. (→ page 55)
unusual • Adjust [HUE] in [PICTURE]. (→ page 49)
Image isn’t square to the • Reposition the projector to improve its angle to the screen. (→ page 21)
screen • Use the Keystone correction function to correct the trapezoid distortion. (→ page 24)
Picture is blurred • Adjust the focus. (→ page 23)
• Reposition the projector to improve its angle to the screen. (→ page 21)
• Ensure that the distance between the projector and screen is within the adjustment range of the lens.
(→ page 10)
• Condensation may form on the lens if the projector is cold, brought into a warm place and is then turned on.
Should this happen, let the projector stand until there is no condensation on the lens.
F l i cke r a p p e a r s o n • Set [FAN MODE] to other than [HIGH ALTITUDE] mode when using the projector at altitudes approximately
screen 5500 feet/1700 meters or lower. Using the projector at altitudes less than approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters
and setting to [HIGH ALTITUDE] can cause the lamp to overcool, causing the image to flicker. Switch [FAN
MODE] to [AUTO]. (→ page 61)
Image is scrolling ver- • Check the computer's resolution and frequency. Make sure that the resolution you are trying to display is sup-
tically, horizontally or ported by the projector. (→ page 80)
both • Adjust the computer image manually with the Horizontal/Vertical in the [IMAGE OPTIONS]. (→ page 52)
Remote control does • Install new batteries.(→ page 8)
not work • Make sure there are no obstacles between you and the projector.
• Stand within 22 feet (7 m) of the projector. (→ page 8)
• Make sure that the remote control's ID corresponds with the projector's ID. (→ page 60)
Indicator is lit or blink- • See the POWER/STATUS/LAMP Indicator. (→ page 73)
ing
Cross color in RGB • Press the AUTO ADJ. button on the projector cabinet or the remote control. (→ page 26)
mode • Adjust the computer image manually with [CLOCK]/[PHASE] in [IMAGE OPTIONS] in the menu. (→ page
51)
LAN control is not ac- • Make sure that [CONTROL TERMINAL] is set correctly. (→ page 64)
tive or PC Control is not
active
Cannot control the pro- • Check to see if [STANDBY MODE] is set to [POWER-SAVING] and if it is, try to set it to [NORMAL]. (→ page
jector from exter nal 63)
equipment
3D picture is not dis- • See "Troubleshooting on viewing 3D images" on page 42.
play
For more information contact your dealer.
74
7. Appendix
If there is no picture, or the picture is not displayed correctly.
• Power on process for the projector and the PC.

Be sure to connect the projector and notebook PC while the projector is in standby mode and before turning on
the power to the notebook PC.
being powered up.
NOTE: You can check the horizontal frequency of the current signal in the projector’s menu under Information. If it reads “0kHz”,
this means there is no signal being output from the computer. (→ page 67 or go to next step)
• Enabling the computer’s external display.

Displaying an image on the notebook PC’s screen does not necessarily mean it outputs a signal to the projector.
When using a PC compatible laptop, a combination of function keys will enable/disable the external display. Usu-
ally, the combination of the “Fn” key along with one of the 12 function keys gets the external display to come on
or off. For example, NEC laptops use Fn + F3, while Dell laptops use Fn + F8 key combinations to toggle through
external display selections.
• Non-standard signal output from the computer

If the output signal from a notebook PC is not an industry standard, the projected image may not be displayed
correctly. Should this happen, deactivate the notebook PC’s LCD screen when the projector display is in use. Each
notebook PC has a different way of deactivate/reactivate the local LCD screens as described in the previous step.
Refer to your computer’s documentation for detailed information.
• Image displayed is incorrect when using a Macintosh

When using a Macintosh with the projector, set the DIPswitch of the Mac adapter (not supplied with the projector)
according to your resolution. After setting, restart your Macintosh for the changes to take affect.
For setting display modes other than those supported by your Macintosh and the projector, changing the DIP switch
on a Mac adapter may bounce an image slightly or may display nothing. Should this happen, set the DIP switch
to the 13" fixed mode and then restart your Macintosh. After that, restore the DIP switches to a displayable mode
and then restart the Macintosh again.
NOTE: A Video Adapter cable manufactured by Apple Computer is needed for a PowerBook which does not have a mini D-Sub
15-pin connector.
• Mirroring on a PowerBook
* When using the projector with a Macintosh PowerBook, output may not be set to 1024 x 768 unless “mirroring”
is off on your PowerBook. Refer to owner’s manual supplied with your Macintosh computer for mirroring.
• Folders or icons are hidden on the Macintosh screen

Folders or icons may not be seen on the screen. Should this happen, select [View] → [Arrange] from the Apple
menu and arrange icons.
75
7. Appendix
 Specifications
This section provides technical information about the NP216/NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110 projector's performance.
Model Number NP216/NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110
Optical
Projection System Single DLP® chip (0.55", aspect 4:3)
1 NP216/NP215/NP210: 1024 x 768 pixels
Resolution*
NP115/NP110: 800 x 600 pixels
Manual zoom and focus
Lens
F=2.41-2.55, f=21.8-24.0mm
Lamp 180W AC (160W in ECO Mode)
NP216/NP215/NP115: 2500 lumens (approx. 90% in ECO Mode)
Light Output*2,*3
NP210/NP110: 2200 lumens (approx. 90% in ECO Mode)
Contrast Ratio*3
2000:1
(full white: full black)
Image Size (Diagonal) 30" - 300" diagonal (4:3)
46" - 465" (wide) / 52" - 520" (tele)
Projection Distance
1.18 - 11.8 m (wide) / 1.32 - 13.2 m (tele)
Projection Angle 14.0° (wide) / 12.7° (tele)
*1 Effective pixels are more than 99.99%.
*2 This is the light output value (lumens) when the [PRESET] mode is set to [HIGH-BRIGHT]. If any other mode is
selected as the [PRESET] mode, the light output value may drop.
*3 Compliance with ISO21118-2005
Electrical
NP216: 2 Analog RGB shared with component video (Mini D-Sub 15 Pin), 1 S-Video (Mini
DIN 4 Pin), 1 Video (RCA), 2 Stereo Mini Audio, 1 (L/R) RCA Audio
Inputs NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110:1 Analog RGB shared with component video (Mini D-Sub
15 Pin), 1 S-Video (Mini DIN 4 Pin), 1 Video (RCA), 1 Stereo Mini Audio shared for ana-
log RGB, Video, and S-Video inputs
Output 1 Analog RGB (Mini D-Sub 15 Pin), AUDIO OUT Mini Jack (Stereo Mini) (NP216 only)
PC Control 1 PC Control (D-Sub 9 Pin)
Wired LAN 1 Port RJ-45 (NP216/NP215 only)
Built-in Speaker 7W (monaural)
External Control RS232, IR, Wired LAN (NP216/NP215 only)
Color Reproduction 16.7 million colors simultaneously, Full color
VGA/SVGA/XGA/WXGA/SXGA/SXGA+/UXGA
480i/480p/720p/1080i (60Hz)
Compatible Signals*4
576i/576p/720p/1080i (50Hz)
DVD: Progressive (50/60Hz)
Video Bandwidth RGB: 100MHz (max.)
Horizontal: 15 kHz to 100 kHz(RGB: 24 kHz or over)
Scan Rate Vertical: 50 Hz to 120 Hz (Signals with higher than refresh rate 85 Hz support resolutions
of 1024 x 768 or lower.)
Sync Compatibility Separate Sync
540 TV lines: NTSC/NTSC4.43/PAL/PAL-M/PAL-N/PAL60
Horizontal Resolution
300 TV lines: SECAM
Power Requirement: 100-240V AC, 50/60 Hz
Power Requirement/Input Current
Input Current: 2.6-1.2A
in OFF for ECO MODE: 242W(100-130V AC)/233W(200-240V AC)
in ON for ECO MODE: 217W(100-130V AC)/210W(200-240V AC)
Power Consumption in NORMAL Mode for STANDBY MODE: 4W(100-130V AC)/5W(200-240V AC)
in POWER-SAVING Mode for STANDBY MODE: 0.49W(100-130V AC)/0.71W(200-240V
AC)
*4 An image with higher resolution than the projector’s native resolution (NP216/NP215/NP210: 1024 x 768 /
NP115/NP110: 800 x 600) will be displayed with scaling technology.
76
7. Appendix
Mechanical
Installation Orientation: Desktop/Front, Desktop/Rear, Ceiling/Front, Ceiling/Rear
12.2"(W) x 3.7 (H) x 9.7"(D)
Dimensions 310 mm (W) x 95 mm (H) x 247 mm (D)
(not including protrusions)
Net Weight 5.5 lbs / 2.5 kg
Operational Temperatures: 41°F to 104°F / 5°C to 40°C
([ECO MODE] is set automatically to [ON] at 95°F to 104°F/35°C to 40°C / [ECO MODE]
is set automatically to [ON] at 86°F to 104°F/30°C to 40°C when used in HIGH ALTI-
Environmental Considerations
TUDE), 20% to 80% humidity (non-condensing)
Storage Temperatures: 14°F to 122°F (-10°C to 50°C), 20% to 80% humidity (non-con-
densing)
Regulations
For United States:
UL Approved (UL 60950-1)
Meets FCC Class B requirements
For Canada:
UL Approved (CSA 60950-1)
Meets DOC Canada Class B requirements
For Australia/New Zealand:
Meets AS/NZS CISPR.22 Class B
For Europe:
Meets EMC Directive (EN55022, EN55024, EN61000-3-2, EN61000-3-3)
Meets Low Voltage Directive (EN60950-1, TÜV GS Approved)
For additional information visit:

US : http://www.necdisplay.com/
Europe : http://www.nec-display-solutions.com/
Global : http://www.nec-display.com/global/index.html
For information on our optional accessories, visit our website or see our brochure.
The specifications are subject to change without notice.
77
7. Appendix
 Cabinet Dimensions
NP216
NP215
NP210/NP115/NP110
247(9.7)
310(12.2)
96(3.8) Lens center
(3.7)
95
Lens center
68.4
(2.7)
Unit: mm (inch)
78
7. Appendix
 Pin Assignments of D-Sub COMPUTER Input Connector

Mini D-Sub 15 Pin Connector
11 12 13 14 15
Pin No. RGB Signal (Analog) YCbCr Signal
6 7 8 9 10 1 Red Cr
1 2 3 4 5
2 Green or Sync on Green Y
3 Blue Cb
Signal Level 4 Ground
Video signal : 0.7Vp-p (Analog) 5 Ground
Sync signal : TTL level 6 Red Ground Cr Ground
7 Green Ground Y Ground
8 Blue Ground Cb Ground
9 No Connection
10 Sync Signal Ground
11 No Connection
12 Bi-directional DATA (SDA)
13 Horizontal Sync or Composite Sync
14 Vertical Sync
15 Data Clock
79
7. Appendix
 Compatible Input Signal List

Horizontal: 15KHz to 100KHz (RGB: 24KHz or over)
Vertical: 50Hz to 120Hz (Signals with higher than refresh rate 85 Hz support resolutions of 1024 x 768 or lower.)
Resolution Frequency H. Refresh Rate

Signal
(Dots) (kHz) (Hz)
NTSC/PAL60 — 15.73 60.00
VIDEO
PAL/SECAM — 15.63 50.00
640 × 480 31.47 59.94
640 × 480 31.48 59.95
640 × 480 37.86 72.81
640 × 480 37.50 75.00
640 × 480 43.27 85.01
800 × 600 35.16 56.25
800 × 600 37.88 60.32
800 × 600 48.08 72.19
800 × 600 46.88 75.00
800 × 600 53.67 85.06
IBM compatible
1024 × 768 48.36 60.00
1024 × 768 56.48 70.07
1024 × 768 60.02 75.03
1024 × 768 68.68 85.00
1280 × 768 47.78 59.87
1280 × 800 49.70 59.81
1280 × 960 60.00 60.00
1280 × 1024 63.98 60.02
1400 × 1050 - 60.00
1600 × 1200 75.00 60.02
640 × 480 35.00 66.67
Apple Macintosh® 832 × 624 49.72 74.55
1024 × 768 60.24 74.93
720p 1280 × 720 37.50 50.00
720p 1280 × 720 45.00 60.00
HDTV
1080i 1920 × 1080 28.13 50.00
1080i 1920 × 1080 33.75 60.00
480p — 31.47 59.94
SDTV
576p — 31.25 50.00
— 15.73 59.94
DVD YCbCr
— 15.63 50.00
NOTE:
• An image with higher resolution than the projector’s native resolution (NP216/NP215/NP210: 1024 x 768 / NP115/NP110: 800 x
600) will be displayed with scaling technology.
• Signals other than those specified in the table above may not be displayed correctly. If this should happen, change the refresh
rate or resolution on your PC. Refer to Display Properties help section of your PC for procedures.
• Sync on Green and Composite sync signals are not supported.
80
7. Appendix
 PC Control Codes and Cable Connection

PC Control Codes
Function Code Data

POWER ON 02H 00H 00H 00H 00H 02H
POWER OFF 02H 01H 00H 00H 00H 03H
INPUT SELECT COMPUTER 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 01H 09H
INPUT SELECT COMPUTER 1 (NP216 only) 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 01H 09H
INPUT SELECT COMPUTER 2 (NP216 only) 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 02H 0AH
INPUT SELECT VIDEO 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 06H 0EH
INPUT SELECT S-VIDEO 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 0BH 13H
PICTURE MUTE ON 02H 10H 00H 00H 00H 12H
PICTURE MUTE OFF 02H 11H 00H 00H 00H 13H
SOUND MUTE ON 02H 12H 00H 00H 00H 14H
SOUND MUTE OFF 02H 13H 00H 00H 00H 15H
NOTE: Contact your local dealer for a full list of the PC Control Codes if needed.
Cable Connection
Communication Protocol
Baud rate ��38400 bps
Data length ��8 bits
Parity ��No parity
Stop bit ��One bit
X on/off ��None
Communications procedure..............Full duplex
NOTE: Depending on the equipment, a lower baud rate may be recommended for long cable runs.
PC Control Connector (D-SUB 9P)
To TxD of PC
To RxD of PC
To GND of PC
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9
To RTS of PC
To CTS of PC
NOTE 1: Pins 1, 4, 6 and 9 are no used.
NOTE 2: Jumper “Request to Send” and “Clear to Send” together on both ends of the cable to simplify cable connection.
NOTE 3: For long cable runs it is recommended to set communication speed within projector menus to 9600 bps.
81
7. Appendix
 Troubleshooting Check List

Before contacting your dealer or service personnel, check the following list to be sure repairs are needed also by
referring to the “Troubleshooting” section in your user’s manual. This checklist below will help us solve your problem
more efficiently.
* Print this page and the next page for your check.
Frequency of occurrence  always  sometimes (How often?_____________________)  other (__________________)

Power
No power (POWER indicator does not light green) See also “Status Shut down during operation.
Indicator (STATUS)”. Power cable’s plug is fully inserted into the wall outlet.
Power cable’s plug is fully inserted into the wall outlet. Lamp cover is installed correctly .
Lamp cover is installed correctly. [AUTO POWER OFF] is turned off (only models with the [AUTO
Lamp Hours Used (lamp operation hours) was cleared after POWER OFF] function).
lamp replacement. [OFF TIMER] is turned off (only models with the [OFF TIMER]
No power even though you press and hold the POWER button function).
for 1 second.
Video and Audio

No image is displayed from your PC or video equipment to the Parts of the image are lost.
projector. Still unchanged even though you press the AUTO ADJ. but-
Still no image even though you connect the projector to the PC ton.
first, then start the PC. Still unchanged even though you carry out [RESET] in the
Enabling your notebook PC’s signal output to the projector. projector’s menu.
• A combination of function keys will enable/disable the exter- Image is shifted in the vertical or horizontal direction.
nal display. Usually, the combination of the “Fn” key along Horizontal and vertical positions are correctly adjusted on a
with one of the 12 function keys turns the external display computer signal.
on or off.
Input source’s resolution and frequency are supported by the
No image (blue or black background, no display). projector.
Still no image even though you press the AUTO ADJ. Some pixels are lost.
button.
Image is flickering.
Still no image even though you carry out [RESET] in the
projector’s menu. Still unchanged even though you press the AUTO ADJ. but-
ton.
Signal cable’s plug is fully inserted into the input connector
Still unchanged even though you carry out [RESET] in the
A message appears on the screen. projector’s menu.
( _____________________________________________ )
Image shows flickering or color drift on a computer signal.
The source connected to the projector is active and available.
Still unchanged even though you change [FAN MODE] from
Still no image even though you adjust the brightness and/or [HIGH ALTITUDE] to [AUTO].
the contrast.
Image appears blurry or out of focus.
projector. Still unchanged even though you checked the signal’s resolution
on PC and changed it to projector’s native resolution.
Image is too dark.
Still unchanged even though you adjusted the focus.
Remains unchanged even though you adjust the brightness
and/or the contrast. No sound.
Image is distorted. Audio cable is correctly connected to the audio input of the
projector.
Image appears to be trapezoidal (unchanged even though you
carry out the [KEYSTONE] adjustment). Still unchanged even though you adjusted the volume level.
AUDIO OUT is connected to your audio equipment (only models
with the AUDIO OUT connector).
Other
Remote control does not work. Buttons on the projector cabinet do not work (only models with the
No obstacles between the sensor of the projector and the [CONTROL PANEL LOCK] function)
remote control. [CONTROL PANEL LOCK] is not turned on or is disabled in
Projector is placed near a fluorescent light that can disturb the the menu.
infrared remote controls. Still unchanged even though you press and hold the EXIT button
Batteries are new and are not reversed in installation. for a minimum of 10 seconds.
82
7. Appendix
In the space below please describe your problem in detail.
Information on application and environment where your projector is used
Projector Installation environment

Model number: Screen size: inch
Serial No.: Screen type:  White matte  Beads  Polarization
Date of purchase:  Wide angle  High contrast
Lamp operating time (hours): Throw distance: feet/inch/m
Eco Mode:  Off  On Orientation:  Ceiling mount  Desktop
Information on input signal: Power outlet connection:
Horizontal synch frequency [ ] kHz  Connected directly to wall outlet
Vertical synch frequency [ ] Hz  Connected to power cord extender or other (the
Synch polarity H  (+)  (−) number of connected equipment______________)
V  (+)  (−)  Connected to a power cord reel or other (the number
of connected equipment______________)
Synch type  Separate  Composite
 Sync on Green
STATUS Indicator: Computer
Steady light  Orange  Green Manufacturer:
Flashing light [ ] cycles Model number:
Remote control model number: Notebook PC  / Desktop 
Native resolution:
Refresh rate:
Video adapter:
Other:
Projector PC
DVD player
Signal cable Video equipment

NEC standard or other manufacturer’s cable? VCR, DVD player, Video camera, Video game or other
Model number: Length: inch/m Manufacturer:
Distribution amplifier Model number:
Model number:
Switcher
Model number:
Adapter
Model number:
83
7. Appendix
 TravelCare Guide 7) Problems caused by natural consumption, wear or deterioration

of parts under normal usage conditions.
TravelCare - a service for international travelers 8) Problems or damage to lamps and other expendable supplies,
included parts or optional parts.
This product is eligible for “TravelCare”, NEC’s unique international
9) Other conditions stipulated in the warranty included with the
warranty.
product also apply.
Please note that TravelCare coverage differs in part from coverage under
the warranty included with the product.
NOTE: The product can be used overseas with voltages indicated in the rating
label on the product by using a power cable suited for the standards and power
Services offered with TravelCare source voltage of the country in which the product is being used.
This warranty allows customers to receive service on their product at the
NEC and NEC-designated service stations in the countries listed herein List of TravelCare Outlets
when temporarily traveling internationally for business or pleasure.
This list applies as of December 1, 2009.
For details on services offered by the different service stations, please
For the most up-to-date information, please refer to the websites of
refer to the “List of TravelCare Outlets” below.
the service stations in the various countries on the List of TravelCare
Outlets or to the NEC website at http://www.nec-display.com/global/
1 Repair services
index.html
The product will be repaired and delivered within 10 business days,
not including shipping time.
In Europe
During the term of warranty, the cost of maintenance parts, labor costs
NEC Europe Ltd. / European Technical Centre
for repairs and shipping costs within the service station’s coverage
Address: Unit G, Stafford Park 12, Telford TF3 3BJ, U.K.
area are covered by the warranty.
Telephone: +44 1952 237000
Fax Line: +44 1952 237006
2 Replacement product rental service
Email Address: AFR@uk.neceur.com
If the customer desires, he or she can rent a replacement product
WEB Address: http://www.neceur.com
while the original product is being repaired.
Fee: US$200 for 12 days
(Regions Covered)
This fee must be paid at the local service station in cash or credit
EU: Austria*, Belgium*, Bulgaria*, Czech Republic*, Cyprus*,
card.
Denmark*, Estonia*, Finland*, France*, Germany*,
The US$200 rental fee is non-refundable even if the customer rents
Greece*, Hungary*, Ireland*, Italy*, Latvia*, Lithuania*,
it less than 12 days before returning.
Luxembourg*, Malta*, The Netherlands*, Poland*, Portu-
The replacement product will be delivered within 3 business days.
gal*, Romania*, Slovakia*, Slovenia*, Spain*, Sweden*
If the customer did not return the replacement product within 12 days,
and the United Kingdom*
the customer will be charged the price of the unit.
EEA: Norway*, Iceland and Liechtenstein
If the customer returned the replacement product in a faulty or dam-
aged condition, the repair cost will be charged to the customer.
In North America
Note that this service is not offered in all countries and regions. Please
NEC Display Solutions of America, Inc.
refer to the “List of TravelCare Outlets”.
Address: 500 Park Boulevard, Suite 1100 Itasca, Illinois
In addition, this replacement product rental service is not offered after
60143, U.S.A.
the product’s warranty has expired.
Telephone: +1 800 836 0655
Fax Line: +1 800 356 2415
Term of warranty Email Address: vsd.tech-support@necdisplay.com
1 WEB Address: http://www.necdisplay.com/
a. Upon presentation of the warranty or receipt received upon
purchase: (Regions Covered)
U.S.A. *, Canada*
Valid for the term indicated on the warranty or the normal term
of warranty for the country of purchase. In Oceania
b. When only the product is brought in: AWA Limited.
Valid for a period of within 14 months of the date of manufacture Address: 151 Arthur Street
indicated by the serial number attached to the product. Homebush West NSW 2140 Australia
Customer Call Centre
2 When a product whose term of warranty is expired is brought in: Telephone: 0297647777
Repairs will be offered for a fee. In this case the customer is not eligible Fax Line: 1300772688
for the replacement product rental service. Email Address: commercialsupport@awa.com.au
3 In the following cases, repairs may be charged, even if the product’s
For Travel Care service, while customer is in Australia, the cus-
warranty is still in effect:
tomer will contact AWA on 1300366144, select Option 4. If you
1) If the term of warranty, model name, serial number and name of want to book warranty service by email customer goes to:
the store of purchase are not indicated on the warranty or have commercialsupport@awa.com.au.
been altered.
2) Problems or damage caused by dropping or shocks during ship- (Regions Covered)
ment or movement by the customer or by improper handling by Australia
the customers.
3) Problems or damage caused by improper usage or unwarrantable Visual Group Ltd.
alterations or repairs by the customer. Address: 28 Walls Road Penrose Auckland New Zealand
4) Problems or damage caused by fire, salt damage, gas damage, Telephone: 095250740
earthquakes, lightning damage, storm or flood damage or other Fax Line: 095809607
natural disasters or such external factors as dust, cigarette Email Address: sarah.reed@visualgroup.co.nz
smoke, abnormal voltage, etc.
5) Problems or damage caused by use in hot or humid places, in (Regions Covered)
vehicles, boats or ships, etc. New Zealand
6) Problems or damage caused by expendable supplies or devices
connected to the product other than those designated by NEC. NOTE: In countries designated with an asterisk(*), replacement product rental
service are offered.
84
7. Appendix
In Asia and Middle East NEC Corporation of Malaysia Sdn. Bhd.
NEC Display Solutions, Ltd. Address: 33rd Floor, Menara TA One, 22, Jalan P. Ram-
Address: 686-1, Nishioi, Oi-Machi, Ashigarakami-Gun, lee, 50250 Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia
Kanagawa 258-0017, Japan Telephone: +6 03 2178 3600 (ISDN)
Telephone: +81 465 85 2369 Fax Line: +6 03 2178 3789
Fax Line: +81 465 85 2393 Email Address: necare@nsm.nec.co.jp
Email Address: support_pjweb@gw.necds.nec.co.jp WEB Address: http://www.necmalaysia.com.my/home.html
WEB Address: http://www.nec-display.com/global/index.html
(Regions Covered)
(Regions Covered) Malaysia
Japan*
Hyosung ITX Co., Ltd.
NEC Solutions (China) Co.,Ltd. Address: 1st Fl., Ire B/D. #2, 4Ga, Yangpyeng-Dong,
Address: Rm 1903, Shining Building, 35 Xueyuan Rd, Youngdeungpo-Gu, Seoul, Korea 150-967
Haidian District Beijing 100083, P.R.C. Telephone: +82 2 2163 4193
Telephone: +8610 82317788 Fax Line: +82 2 2163 4196
Fax Line: +8610 82331722 Email Address: moneybear@hyosung.com
Email Address: zheng_zheng@nec.cn
lily@nec.cn (Regions Covered)
WEB Address: http://www.necsl.com.cn South Korea
(Regions Covered) Lenso Communication Co., Ltd.

China Address: 292 Lenso House 4, 1st Floor, Srinakarin
Road, Huamark, Bangkapi, Bangkok 10240,
NEC Hong Kong Ltd. Thailand
Address: 25/F., The Metropolis Tower, 10 Metropolis Telephone: +66 2 375 2425
Drive, Hunghom, Kowloon, Hong Kong Fax Line: +66 2 375 2434
Telephone: +852 2369 0335 Email Address: pattara@lenso.com
Fax Line: +852 2795 6618 WEB Address: http://www.lensocom.com/
Email Address: nechksc@nechk.nec.com.hk
esmond_au@nechk.nec.com.hk (Regions Covered)
WEB Address: http://www.nec.com.hk Thailand
(Regions Covered) e-flex L.L.C.

Hong Kong Address: Al Suwaidi Road, Rashidiya 43500 Dubai
United Arab Emirates
NEC Taiwan Ltd. Telephone: +971 4 2861533
Address: 7F, No.167, SEC.2, Nan King East Road, Fax Line: +971 4 2861544
Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C. Email Address: sc@eflex.ae
Telephone: +886 2 8500 1700
Fax Line: +886 2 8500 1420 (Regions Covered)
Email Address: eric@nec.com.tw United Arab Emirates
WEB Address: http://www.nec.com.tw
Samir Photographic Supplies
(Regions Covered) Address: P.O.Box 599, Jeddah 21421, Saudi Arabia
Taiwan Telephone: +966 2 6828219
Fax Line: +966 2 6830820
NEC Asia Pte.Ltd. Email Address: Mohamed.asif@samirgroup.com
Address: 401 Commonwealth Drive, #07-02, Haw Par
Technocentre, Singapore 149598 (Regions Covered)
Telephone: +65 6 273 8333 Saudi Arabia
Fax Line: +65 6 274 2226
Email Address: ncare@nec.com.sg NOTE: In countries designated with an asterisk(*), replacement product rental
WEB Address: http://www.nec.com.sg/ service are offered.
(Regions Covered)
Singapore
85
7. Appendix
Date: / / , P-1/ ,
TO: NEC or NEC’s Authorized Service Station:

FM:
(Company & Name with signature)
Dear Sir (s),

I would like to apply your TravelCare Service Program based on attached registration and qualification sheet and agree with your
following conditions, and also the Service fee will be charged to my credit card account, if I don’t return the Loan units within the
specified period. I also confirm following information is correct. Regards.
Application Sheet for TravelCare Service Program
Country,
product purchased :
User’s Company Name :
User’s Company Address :

Phone No., Fax No. :
User’s Name :
User’s Address :
Local Contact office :
Local Contact office Address :
User’s Model Name :
Date of Purchase :
Serial No. on cabinet :
Problem of units per User :
Required Service : (1) Repair and Return (2) Loan unit
Requested period of Loan unit :
Payment method : (1) Credit Card (2) Travelers Cheque (3) Cash
In Case of Credit Card :

Card No. w/Valid Date :
86
7. Appendix
Condition of your TravelCare Service Program 5. Loan Service Charges and Conditions:
Upon acceptance of this NEC Projector, Customer agrees to assume
Enduser is requested to understand following condition of TravelCare
liability for this loan unit.
Service Program and complete the necessary information on the ap-
plication sheet.
The current cost of use of this loan unit is US$200 for 12 calendar
days.
1. Service Options:
If Customer does not return the unit within the 12 calendar days, Cus-
There are 3 types of [Service] available. Enduser has to understand
tomer will be charged the next highest cost up to and including the full
following condition and is required to fill in the Application Sheet.
list price to Credit Cards, which price will be informed by NEC Authorized
Service Stations. Please see the attached listing of contacts for each
1) Repair and Return:
country to arrange for pickup of the loan unit.
The ‘Faulty unit’ is sent or collected from the customer. It is repaired
and returned within 10 days to the customer, excluding transport If you return to their country of origin with the loan unit, you will be charged
time. additional freight to return the unit to the loaning country.
There may have a case, repair and return can’t be done by NEC
Authorized Service Station, because of shortage of spare parts due Thank you for your understanding of this program.
to same model is not sold in the territory.
2) Repair and Return with Loan: (This service is limited to some Service
Stations)
This service is offered to the Enduser, who cannot wait until their unit
is repaired.
The customer can borrow a unit for US$200 up to 12 days. Customer
then sends in inoperable unit to nearest NEC Authorized Service
Station for service. In order to prevent collection problem, Enduser
is required to fill in Application Sheet.
Enduser needs to confirm the availability of the Service to NEC
Authorized Service Stations.
3) Loan Only:
For this service, NEC Authorized Service Station supplies the cus-
tomer with a loan unit for US$200 up to 12 days. Customer keeps the
inoperable unit and when customer returns home, customer arranges
to have the projector serviced in the home country.
2. Warranty Exclusions:
This program does not apply if the Projector’s serial number has been
defaced, modified or removed.
If, in the judgement of NEC Authorized Service Station or its agent the
defects or failures result from any cause other than fair wear and tear or
NEC neglect, or fault including the following without limitation:
1) Accidents, transportation, neglect, misuse, abuse, water, dust, smoke

or default of or by the Customer its employees or agents or any third
party;
2) Failure or fluctuation of electrical power, electrical circuitry, air con-
ditioning, humidity control or other environmental conditions such as
use it in smoking area;
3) Any fault in the attachments or associated products or components
(whether or not supplied by NEC or its agents which do not form part
of the Product covered by this warranty);
4) Any act of God, fire, flood, war, act of violence or any similar occur-
rence;
5) Any attempt by any person other than any person authorized by NEC
to adjust, modify, repair, install or service the product.
6) Any Cross-border charges such as, duty, insurance, tax etc.
3. Charges for Warranty Exclusions and Out of Warranty Case:

In case faulty unit is under warranty exclusions case or under Out of
Warranty period, NEC Authorized Service Station will Inform estimation
of actual service cost to the Enduser with reason.
4. Dead on Arrival (DOA):

Enduser must take this issue up with their original supplier in the country
of purchase.
NEC Authorized Service Station will repair the DOA unit as a Warranty
repair, but will not exchange DOA unit with new units.
87
© NEC Display Solutions, Ltd. 2009 - 2010 7N951472
Portable Projector English
NP216/NP215/NP210/ Français
NP115/NP110 Español
Troubleshooting
Check List
• The NP210 is not distributed in North America.
• Le modèle NP210 n’est pas distribué en Amérique du Nord.
• El NP210 no se distribuye en Estados Unidos.
Turkish RoHS information relevant for Turkish market

EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur.
English
How to Use the Supplied User Documents

The following user documents are included with the projector.
• First read Important Information. It covers information about projector safety, cautions, lamp replacement and
troubleshooting.
Quick Setup Guide

• The Quick Setup Guide provides initial setup and usage information regarding source connection, turning on the
power, selecting a source and other basic operating instructions.
User’s Manual on CD-ROM

• The complete user’s manual is supplied on the NEC Projector CD-ROM in PDF (Portable Document Format) and
provides detailed product and usage information for your NEC projector.
The user’s manual is available in 11 languages (English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, Swedish,
Russian, Korean, simplified Chinese and Japanese).
To view or print the PDF files Adobe Acrobat Reader™ or Adobe Reader™ is required.
NOTE: Adobe Acrobat Reader or Adobe Reader can be downloaded from Adobe’s website.
Visit http://www.adobe.com and obtain the current version for your OS.
• To view the user’s manual (PDF)

[Windows]
1. Place the supplied NEC Projector CD-ROM in your computer’s CD-ROM drive.
2. Double-click the [My Computer] icon on the Windows desktop.
3. Double-click the [NECPJ] CD-ROM icon.
4. Double-click [start_menu.pdf].
• Adobe Acrobat Reader or Adobe Reader will start and allow you to view the Start Menu.
5. Click [User’s Manual].
The Index menu will be displayed.
6. Click the chapter title you want to view.
[Macintosh]
1. Place the supplied NEC Projector CD-ROM in your Macintosh’s CD-ROM drive.
2. Double-click the [NECPJ] CD-ROM icon on your Macintosh’s Desktop.
3. Double-click [start_menu.pdf].
• Adobe Acrobat Reader or Adobe Reader will start and allow you to view the Start Menu.
4. Click [User’s Manual].
The Index menu will be displayed.
5. Click the chapter title you want to view.
• To copy the User’s Manual (PDF) to your computer:

The user’s manuals on the supplied NEC Projector CD-ROM can be copied to your computer hard drive.
From the supplied NEC Projector CD-ROM, select [manual] → [English] → [NP216_index_E.pdf] and [NP216_
manual_E.pdf] and copy them to your computer hard drive.
See the User’s manual (PDF format) on the

supplied CD-ROM for detailed information.
E-1
What’s in the Box?
Make sure your box contains everything listed. If any pieces are missing, contact your dealer.
Please save the original box and packing materials if you ever need to ship your projector.
Projector
Lens cap
(24F45801)
Power cable VGA signal cable Remote control Batteries (AAAx2)

(US: 7N080236) (7N520073) (7N900881)
(EU: 7N080022)
For North America only

Registration card
Limited warranty
For customers in Europe:

You will find our current valid Guarantee
Policy on our Web Site:
For North America NEC Projector CD-ROM www.nec-display-solutions.com
Quick Setup Guide (7N8N0731) User’s manual
Important Information (7N8N0752) (7N951472)
For other countries than North

America
Quick Setup Guide (7N8N0731 and
7N8N0741)
Important Information (7N8N0752
and 7N8N0762)
E-2
Safety Cautions
Precautions
Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC NP216/NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110 projector and keep
the manual handy for future reference.
CAUTION
To turn off main power, be sure to remove the plug from power outlet.
The power outlet socket should be installed as near to the equipment as possible, and should be easily
accessible.
CAUTION
TO PREVENT SHOCK, DO NOT OPEN THE CABINET.
THERE ARE HIGH-VOLTAGE COMPONENTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
This symbol warns the user that uninsulated voltage within the unit may be sufficient to cause electrical
shock. Therefore, it is dangerous to make any kind of contact with any part inside of the unit.
This symbol alerts the user that important information concerning the operation and maintenance of this
unit has been provided.
The information should be read carefully to avoid problems.
WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
DO NOT USE THIS UNIT’S PLUG WITH AN EXTENSION CORD OR IN AN OUTLET UNLESS ALL THE PRONGS
CAN BE FULLY INSERTED.
DOC Compliance Notice (for Canada only)

This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regula-
tions.
Machine Noise Information Regulation - 3. GPSGV,

The highest sound pressure level is less than 70 dB (A) in accordance with EN ISO 7779.
Disposing of your used product

EU-wide legislation as implemented in each Member State requires that used electrical and electronic
products carrying the mark (left) must be disposed of separately from normal household waste. This in-
cludes projectors and their electrical accessories or lamps. When you dispose of such products, please
follow the guidance of your local authority and/or ask the shop where you purchased the product.
After collecting the used products, they are reused and recycled in a proper way. This effort will help us
reduce the wastes as well as the negative impact such as mercury contained in a lamp to the human
health and the environment at the minimum level.
The mark on the electrical and electronic products only applies to the current European Union Member
States.
WARNING TO CALIFORNIA RESIDENTS:

Handling the cables supplied with this product will expose you to lead, a chemical known to the State of California
to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm. WASH HANDS AFTER HANDLING.
E-3
RF Interference (for USA only)
WARNING
The Federal Communications Commission does not allow any modifications or changes to the unit EXCEPT those
specified by NEC Display Solutions of America, Inc. in this manual. Failure to comply with this government regu-
lation could void your right to operate this equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with
the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio / TV technician for help.
For UK only: In UK, a BS approved power cable with moulded plug has a Black (five Amps) fuse installed for use with
this equipment. If a power cable is not supplied with this equipment please contact your supplier.
Important Safeguards
These safety instructions are to ensure the long life of your projector and to prevent fire and shock. Please read them
carefully and heed all warnings.
Installation
• Do not place the projector in the following conditions:
- on an unstable cart, stand, or table.
- near water, baths, or damp rooms.
- in direct sunlight, near heaters, or heat radiating appliances.
- in a dusty, smoky or steamy environment.
- on a sheet of paper or cloth, rugs or carpets.
• If you wish to have the projector installed on the ceiling:
- Do not attempt to install the projector yourself.
- The projector must be installed by qualified technicians in order to ensure proper operation and reduce the risk
of bodily injury.
- In addition, the ceiling must be strong enough to support the projector and the installation must be in accordance
with any local building codes.
- Please consult your dealer for more information.
WARNING
• Do not cover the lens with the lens cap or equivalent while the projector is on. Doing so can lead to melting of
the cap due to the heat emitted from the light output.
• Do not place any objects, which are easily affected by heat, in front of the projector lens. Doing so could lead
to the object melting from the heat that is emitted from the light output.
E-4
Place the projector in a horizontal position
The tilt angle of the projector should not exceed 10 degrees, nor should the projector be installed in any way other
than the desktop and ceiling mount, otherwise lamp life could decrease dramatically.
10˚
Fire and Shock Precautions

• Ensure that there is sufficient ventilation and that vents are unobstructed to prevent the build-up of heat inside
your projector. Allow at least 4 inches (10cm) of space between your projector and a wall.
• Do not try to touch the ventilation outlet on the front side as it can become heated while the projector is turned on
and immediately after the projector is turned off.
• Prevent foreign objects such as paper clips and bits of paper from falling into your projector. Do not attempt to retrieve
any objects that might fall into your projector. Do not insert any metal objects such as a wire or screwdriver into
your projector. If something should fall into your projector, disconnect it immediately and have the object removed
by a qualified service personnel.
• Do not place any objects on top of the projector.
• Do not touch the power plug during a thunderstorm. Doing so can cause electrical shock or fire.
• The projector is designed to operate on a power supply of 100-240V AC 50/60 Hz. Ensure that your power supply
fits this requirement before attempting to use your projector.
• Do not look into the lens while the projector is on. Serious damage to your eyes could result.
• Keep any items such as magnifying glass out of the light path of the projector. The light being projected from the
lens is extensive, therefore any kind of abnormal objects that can redirect light coming out of the lens, can cause
unpredictable outcome such as fire or injury to the eyes.
• Do not place any objects, which are easily affected by heat, in front of a projector exhaust vent.
Doing so could lead to the object melting or getting your hands burned from the heat that is emitted from the
exhaust.
• Handle the power cable carefully. A damaged or frayed power cable can cause electric shock or fire.
- Do not use any power cables than the supplied one.
- Do not bend or tug the power cable excessively.
- Do not place the power cable under the projector, or any heavy object.
- Do not cover the power cable with other soft materials such as rugs.
- Do not heat the power cable.
- Do not handle the power plug with wet hands.
• Turn off the projector, unplug the power cable and have the projector serviced by a qualified service personnel
under the following conditions:
- When the power cable or plug is damaged or frayed.
- If liquid has been spilled into the projector, or if it has been exposed to rain or water.
E-5
- If the projector does not operate normally when you follow the instructions described in this user's manual.
- If the projector has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.
- If the projector exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need for service.
• Disconnect the power cable and any other cables before carrying the projector.
• Turn off the projector and unplug the power cable before cleaning the cabinet or replacing the lamp.
• Turn off the projector and unplug the power cable if the projector is not to be used for an extended period of
time.
• When using a LAN cable (NP216/NP215 only):
For safety, do not connect to the connector for peripheral device wiring that might have excessive voltage.
CAUTION
• Do not use the tilt-foot for purposes other than originally intended. Misuses such as using the tilt foot to carry or
hang (from the wall or ceiling) the projector can cause damage to the projector.
• Do not send the projector in the soft case by parcel delivery service or cargo shipment. The projector inside the
soft case could be damaged.
• Select [HIGH] in Fan mode if you continue to use the projector for consecutive days. (From the menu, select
[SETUP] → [OPTIONS(1)] → [FAN MODE] → [HIGH].)
• Do not turn off the AC power for 60 seconds after the lamp is turned on and while the POWER indicator is blink-
ing green.
Doing so could cause premature lamp failure.
• Parts of the projector may become temporarily heated if the projector is turned off with the POWER button or if
the AC power supply is disconnected during normal projector operation.

• Ensure that you have the batteries' polarity (+/–) aligned correctly.
Lamp Replacement
• To replace the lamp, follow all instructions provided on page E-9.
• Be sure to replace the lamp when the message [THE LAMP HAS REACHED THE END OF ITS USABLE LIFE.
PLEASE REPLACE THE LAMP.] appears. If you continue to use the lamp after the lamp has reached the end
of its usable life, the lamp bulb may shatter, and pieces of glass may be scattered in the lamp case. Do not touch
them as the pieces of glass may cause injury.
If this happens, contact your dealer for lamp replacement.
A Lamp Characteristic
The projector has a high-pressure mercury lamp as a light source.
A lamp has a characteristic that its brightness gradually decreases with age. Also repeatedly turning the lamp on
and off will increase the possibility of its lower brightness.
E-6
CAUTION:
• DO NOT TOUCH THE LAMP immediately after it has been used. It will be extremely hot. Turn the projector off
• When removing the lamp from a ceiling-mounted projector, make sure that no one is under the projector. Glass
fragments could fall if the lamp has been burned out.
Note for US Residents

The lamp in this product contains mercury. Please dispose according to Local,
State or Federal Laws.
Health precautions to users viewing 3D images

Before viewing, be sure to read health care precautions that may be found in the user’s manual included with
your LCD shutter eyeglasses or your 3D compatible content such as DVDs, video games, computer's video
files and the like.
- Allow a distance of 2 m/7 feet or greater between the screen and a user. Viewing 3D images from too close
a distance can strain your eyes.
- Avoid viewing 3D images for a prolonged period of time. Take a break of 15 minutes or longer after every
hour of viewing.
- If you or any member of your family has a history of light-sensitive seizures, consult a doctor before viewing
3D images.
About High Altitude mode

• Set [FAN MODE] to [HIGH ALTITUDE] when using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters
or higher.
• Using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters or higher without setting to [HIGH ALTITUDE]
can cause the projector to overheat and the protector could shut down. If this happens, wait a couple minutes and
turn on the projector.
• Using the projector at altitudes less than approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters and setting to [HIGH ALTITUDE]
can cause the lamp to overcool, causing the image to flicker. Switch [FAN MODE] to [AUTO].
• Using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters or higher can shorten the life of optical com-
ponents such as the lamp.
About Copyright of original projected pictures:

Please note that using this projector for the purpose of commercial gain or the attraction of public attention in a venue
such as a coffee shop or hotel and employing compression or expansion of the screen image with the following func-
tions may raise concern about the infringement of copyrights which are protected by copyright law.
[ASPECT RATIO], [KEYSTONE], Magnifying feature and other similar features.
This device is not intended for use in the direct field of view at visual display workplaces. To avoid incommoding reflec-
tions at visual display workplaces this device must not be placed in the direct field of view.
E-7
Cleaning the Cabinet and the Lens
1. Turn off the projector before cleaning.
2. Clean the cabinet periodically with a damp cloth. If heavily soiled, use a mild detergent. Never use strong
detergents or solvents such as alcohol or thinner.
Vacuum the ventilation

inlet of the cabinet.
Note on Cleaning the Lens

Use a blower or lens paper to clean the lens, and be careful not to scratch or mar the lens.
E-8
Replacing the Lamp
When the lamp reaches the end of its life, the LAMP indicator in the cabinet will blink red. Even though the lamp
may still be working, replace the lamp to maintain the optimal projector performance. After replacing the lamp, be
sure to clear the lamp hour meter. (→ page 68 (User's Manual))
CAUTION
• DO NOT TOUCH THE LAMP immediately after it has been used. It will be extremely hot. Turn the projector off,
• DO NOT REMOVE ANY SCREWS except one lamp cover screw and three lamp housing screws. You could
receive an electric shock.
• Do not break the glass on the lamp housing.
Keep finger prints off the glass surface on the lamp housing. Leaving finger prints on the glass surface might
cause an unwanted shadow and poor picture quality.
• The projector will turn off and go into standby mode when you continue to use the projector for another 100
hours after the lamp has reached the end of its life. If this happens, be sure to replace the lamp. If you continue
to use the lamp after the lamp reaches the end of its life, the lamp bulb may shatter, and pieces of glass may be
scattered in the lamp case. Do not touch them as the pieces of glass may cause injury. If this happens, contact
your NEC dealer for lamp replacement.
*NOTE: This message will be displayed under the following conditions:

• for one minute after the projector has been powered on
• when the (POWER) button on the projector cabinet or the POWER OFF button on the remote control is pressed
To turn off the message, press any button on the projector cabinet or the remote control.
To replace the lamp:

Optional lamp and tools needed for replacement:
• Replacement lamp: NP13LP
• Phillips screwdriver or equivalent
E-9
1. Remove the lamp cover.
(1) Loosen the lamp cover screw
• The lamp cover screw is not removable.
(2) Push and slide the lamp cover off.
2. Remove the lamp housing.

(1) Loosen the three screws securing the lamp housing until the phillips screwdriver goes into a freewheeling
condition.
• The three screws are not removable.
• There is an interlock on this case to prevent the risk of electrical shock. Do not attempt to circumvent this
interlock.
(2) Remove the lamp housing by holding it.
CAUTION:
Make sure that the lamp housing is cool
enough to before removing it.
Interlock
E-10
3. Install a new lamp housing.
(1) Insert a new lamp housing until the lamp housing is plugged into the socket.
CAUTION
Do not use a lamp other than the NEC replacement lamp NP13LP.
Order this from your NEC dealer.
(2) Push the top center of the lamp housing to secure it.
(3) Secure it in place with the three screws.
• Be sure to tighten the screws.
Hold the cabinet with your hand to keep it from tilting while you tighten the screw.
4. Reattach the lamp cover.

(1) Slide the lamp cover back until it snaps into place.
(2) Tighten the screw to secure the lamp cover.
• Be sure to tighten the screw.
5. Connect the supplied power cable, and turn on the projector.
6. Finally, select the menu → [RESET] → [CLEAR LAMP HOURS] to reset the lamp usage hours.
NOTE: When you continue to use the projector for another 100 hours after the lamp has reached the end of its life, the projector
cannot turn on and the menu is not displayed.
If this happens, press the HELP button on the remote control for 10 seconds to reset the lamp clock back to zero.
When the lamp time clock is reset to zero, the LAMP indicator goes out.
E-11
Troubleshooting
This section helps you resolve problems you may encounter while setting up or using the projector.
Indicator Messages
Power Indicator

Off The power cable is unplugged. –
Blinking light Green 0.5 sec On, The projector is getting ready to turn on. Wait for a moment.
0.5 sec Off
2.5 sec On, Off Timer is enabled. –
0.5 sec Off
Steady light Green The projector is turned on. –
Orange [NORMAL] is selected for [STANDBY MODE] –
Red [POWER-SAVING] is selected for [STANDBY –
MODE]
Status Indicator

Normal or Standby ([POWER-SAVING] for
Off –
[STANDBY MODE])
Blinking light Red 1 cycle (0.5 sec Lamp cover error or lamp housing error Replace the lamp cover or lamp housing cor-
On, 2.5 sec Off) rectly.
2 cycle (0.5 sec Temperature error The projector is overheated. Move the projector to
On, 0.5 sec Off) a cooler location.
4 cycle (0.5 sec Fan error Fans will not work correctly.
On, 0.5 sec Off)
6 cycle (0.5 sec Lamp error Lamp fails to light. Wait a full minute and then
On, 0.5 sec Off) turn on again.
Green Re-firing the lamp (The projector is cooling The projector is re-firing.
down.) Wait for a moment.
Steady light Green Standby ([NORMAL] for [STANDBY MODE]) –
Orange Cabinet button is locked You have pressed cabinet button when Cabinet
Button is locked.
CONTROL ID error Remote control ID and projector ID are not
matched.
Lamp Indicator

Off Normal –
Blinking light Red Lamp has reached its end of life. Lamp replace- Replace the lamp.
ment message will be displayed.
Steady light Red Lamp has been used beyond its limit. The projec- Replace the lamp.
tor will not turn on until the lamp is replaced.
Green [ECO MODE] is set to [ON] –
Over-Temperature Protection
If the temperature inside the projector rises too high, the over-temperature protector will automatically turn off the
lamp with the STATUS indicator blinking (2-cycle On and Off.)
Should this happen, do the following:
• Unplug the power cable after the cooling fans stop.
• Move the projector to a cooler location if the room where you are presenting is particularly too warm.
• Clean the ventilation holes if they are clogged with dust.
• Wait about 60 minutes until the inside of the projector becomes cool enough.
E-12
Common Problems & Solutions (→ “Power/Status/Lamp Indicator” on page E-12.)
(The numbers in the table refer to pages in the User’s Manual)
Problem Check These Items
Does not turn on • Check that the power cable is plugged in and that the power button on the projector cabinet or the remote
or shut down control is on. (→ pages 17 and 18)
• Ensure that the lamp cover is installed correctly. (→ page 72)
• Check to see if the projector has overheated. If there is insufficient ventilation around the projector or if the
room where you are presenting is particularly warm, move the projector to a cooler location.
• Check to see if you continue to use the projector for another 100 hours after the lamp has reached the end of its
life. If so, replace the lamp. After replacing the lamp, reset the lamp hours used. (→ page 68)
• The lamp may fail to light. Wait a full minute and then turn on the power again.
• Set [FAN MODE] to [HIGH ALTITUDE] when using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700
meters or higher. Using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters or higher without
setting to [HIGH ALTITUDE] can cause the projector to overheat and the projector could shut down. If this
happens, wait a couple minutes and turn on the projector. (→ page 61)
If you turn on the projector immediately after the lamp is turned off, the fans run without displaying an image
for some time and then the projector will display the image. Wait for a moment.
Will turn off • Ensure that the [OFF TIMER] or [AUTO POWER OFF] is off. (→ page 63, 64)
No picture • Use the COMPUTER1, the VIDEO or the S-VIDEO button on the remote control to select your source (Com-
puter, Video or S-Video). (→ page 20) If there is still no picture, press the button again.
• Ensure your cables are connected properly.
• Use menus to adjust the brightness and contrast. (→ page 49)
• Remove the lens cap.
• Reset the settings or adjustments to factory preset levels using the [RESET] in the Menu. (→ page 68)
• Enter your registered keyword if the Security function is enabled. (→ page 32)
• Be sure to connect the projector and notebook PC while the projector is in standby mode and before turning
on the power to the notebook PC.
In most cases the output signal from the notebook PC is not turned on unless connected to the projector
before being powered up.
* If the screen goes blank while using your remote control, it may be the result of the computer’s screen-
saver or power management software.
• See also the next page.
Picture suddenly be- • Check if the projector is in the Forced ECO mode because of too high ambient temperature. If this is the case,
comes dark lower the internal temperature of the projector by selecting [HIGH] for [FAN MODE]. (→ page 61)
Color tone or hue is • Check if an appropriate color is selected in [WALL COLOR]. If so, select an appropriate option. (→ page 55)
unusual • Adjust [HUE] in [PICTURE]. (→ page 49)
Image isn’t square to • Reposition the projector to improve its angle to the screen. (→ page 21)
the screen • Use the Keystone correction function to correct the trapezoid distortion. (→ page 24)
Picture is blurred • Adjust the focus. (→ page 23)
• Reposition the projector to improve its angle to the screen. (→ page 21)
• Ensure that the distance between the projector and screen is within the adjustment range of the lens.
(→ page 10)
• Condensation may form on the lens if the projector is cold, brought into a warm place and is then turned on.
Should this happen, let the projector stand until there is no condensation on the lens.
Flicker appears on • Set [FAN MODE] to other than [HIGH ALTITUDE] mode when using the projector at altitudes approximately
screen 5500 feet/1700 meters or lower. Using the projector at altitudes less than approximately 5500 feet/1700
meters and setting to [HIGH ALTITUDE] can cause the lamp to overcool, causing the image to flicker. Switch
[FAN MODE] to [AUTO]. (→ page 61)
Image is scrolling • Check the computer's resolution and frequency. Make sure that the resolution you are trying to display is
vertically, horizontally supported by the projector. (→ page 80)
or both • Adjust the computer image manually with the Horizontal/Vertical in the [IMAGE OPTIONS]. (→ page 52)
Remote control does • Install new batteries.(→ page 8)
not work • Make sure there are no obstacles between you and the projector.
• Stand within 22 feet (7 m) of the projector. (→ page 8)
• Make sure that the remote control's ID corresponds with the projector's ID. (→ page 60)
Indicator is lit or blink- • See the POWER/STATUS/LAMP Indicator. (→ page 73)
ing
Cross color in RGB • Press the AUTO ADJ. button on the projector cabinet or the remote control. (→ page 26)
mode • Adjust the computer image manually with [CLOCK]/[PHASE] in [IMAGE OPTIONS] in the menu. (→ page
51)
LAN control is not ac- • Make sure that [CONTROL TERMINAL] is set correctly. (→ page 64)
tive or PC Control is not
active
Cannot control the • Check to see if [STANDBY MODE] is set to [POWER-SAVING] and if it is, try to set it to [NORMAL]. (→ page
projector from external 63)
equipment
3D picture is not • See "Troubleshooting on viewing 3D images" on page 42.
display
For more information contact your dealer.
E-13
If there is no picture, or the picture is not displayed correctly.
• Power on process for the projector and the PC.

Be sure to connect the projector and notebook PC while the projector is in standby mode and before turning on
the power to the notebook PC.
being powered up.
NOTE: You can check the horizontal frequency of the current signal in the projector’s menu under Information. If it reads
“0kHz”, this means there is no signal being output from the computer. (→ page 67 (User's Manual) or go to next step)
• Enabling the computer’s external display.

Displaying an image on the notebook PC’s screen does not necessarily mean it outputs a signal to the projec-
tor. When using a PC compatible laptop, a combination of function keys will enable/disable the external display.
Usually, the combination of the “Fn” key along with one of the 12 function keys gets the external display to come
on or off. For example, NEC laptops use Fn + F3, while Dell laptops use Fn + F8 key combinations to toggle
through external display selections.
• Non-standard signal output from the computer

If the output signal from a notebook PC is not an industry standard, the projected image may not be displayed
correctly. Should this happen, deactivate the notebook PC’s LCD screen when the projector display is in use.
Each notebook PC has a different way of deactivate/reactivate the local LCD screens as described in the previ-
ous step. Refer to your computer’s documentation for detailed information.
• Image displayed is incorrect when using a Macintosh

When using a Macintosh with the projector, set the DIPswitch of the Mac adapter (not supplied with the projec-
tor) according to your resolution. After setting, restart your Macintosh for the changes to take affect.
For setting display modes other than those supported by your Macintosh and the projector, changing the DIP
switch on a Mac adapter may bounce an image slightly or may display nothing. Should this happen, set the DIP
switch to the 13" fixed mode and then restart your Macintosh. After that, restore the DIP switches to a display-
able mode and then restart the Macintosh again.
NOTE: A Video Adapter cable manufactured by Apple Computer is needed for a PowerBook which does not have a mini D-Sub
15-pin connector.
• Mirroring on a PowerBook
* When using the projector with a Macintosh PowerBook, output may not be set to 1024 x 768 unless “mirror-
ing” is off on your PowerBook. Refer to owner’s manual supplied with your Macintosh computer for mirroring.
• Folders or icons are hidden on the Macintosh screen

Folders or icons may not be seen on the screen. Should this happen, select [View] → [Arrange] from the Apple
menu and arrange icons.
E-14
Français
Voici comment utiliser les documents utilisateur fournis

Les documents suivants destinés à l’utilisateur sont fournis avec le projecteur.
Informations importantes
• Lire d’abord la section sur les informations importantes. Elle donne des informations sur la sécurité du projecteur,
les précautions à observer, le remplacement de la lampe et la localisation des pannes.
Guide d’installation rapide

• Le guide d’installation rapide décrit l’installation initiale et donne des informations d’utilisation concernant la connexion
à la source, la mise sous tension, la sélection d’une source et d’autres instructions d’utilisation de base.
Mode d’emploi fourni avec le CD-ROM

• Le mode d’emploi est fourni avec le NEC Projector CD-ROM en format PDF (Portable Document Format) et donne
des informations détaillées sur le produit et l’utilisation pour votre projecteur NEC.
Le mode d’emploi complet est disponible en 11 langues (anglais, allemand, français, italien, espagnol, portugais,
suédois, russe, coréen, chinois simplifié et japonais).
Pour visualiser ou imprimer les fichiers PDF Adobe Acrobat Reader™ ou Adobe Reader™.
REMARQUE: Adobe Acrobat Reader ou Adobe Reader peut être téléchargé du site Internet de Adobe.
Visiter le site http://www.adobe.com et télécharger la version actuelle correspondant à votre système d’exploitation.
• Pour visualiser le mode d’emploi (PDF)

[Windows]
1. Insérer le NEC Projector CD-ROM fourni dans le lecteur de CD-ROM de votre ordinateur.
2. Double-cliquer sur l’icône [Poste de travail] sur le bureau de Windows.
3. Double-cliquer sur l’icône [NECPJ] CD-ROM.
4. Double-cliquer sur l’icône [start_menu.pdf].
• Adobe Acrobat Reader ou Adobe Reader démarre et vous permet de visualiser le menu Démarrer.
5. Cliquer sur [Mode d’emploi].
Le menu Index s’affiche.
6. Cliquer sur le titre du chapitre à visualiser.
[Macintosh]
1. Insérer le NEC Projector CD-ROM fourni dans le lecteur de CD-ROM de votre Macintosh.
2. Double-cliquer sur l’icône [NECPJ] CD-ROM sur le bureau de votre Macintosh.
3. Double-cliquer sur l’icône [start_menu.pdf].
• Adobe Acrobat Reader ou Adobe Reader démarre et vous permet de visualiser le menu Démarrer.
4. Cliquer sur [Mode d’emploi].
Le menu Index s’affiche.
5. Cliquer sur le titre du chapitre à visualiser.
• Pour copier le manuel d’utilisateur (PDF) sur votre ordinateur:

Les mode d’emploi dans le NEC Projector CD-ROM fourni peuvent être copiés sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur.
Dans le NEC Projector CD-ROM fourni, sélectionner [manual] → [French] → [NP216_index_F.pdf] et [NP216_
manual_F.pdf] et les copier sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur.
Pour plus de détails, consultez le mode d’emploi

(format PDF) présent sur le CD-ROM fourni.
F-1
❷ Que contient la boîte ?
S’assurer que la boîte contient tous les éléments de la liste. S’il manque des pièces, contacter votre revendeur.
Veuillez conserver la boîte et l’emballage d’origine au cas où vous auriez besoin de transporter votre projecteur.
Projecteur
Cache-objectif
(24F45801)
Câble d’alimentation Câble de signal VGA Télécommande Piles (AAAx2)

(US: 7N080236) (7N520073) (7N900881)
(EU: 7N080022)
Pour l’Amérique du Nord uniquement

Carte d’enregistrement
Limitation de garantie
Pour les clients en Europe :

Vous trouverez notre garantie actuelle valide
sur notre site Web : www.nec-display-solutions.
Pour l’Amérique du Nord NEC Projector CD-ROM com
Guide de réglage rapide Mode d’emploi
(7N8N0731) (7N951472)
Informations Importantes
(7N8N0752)
Pour les pays autres que l’Amé-

rique du Nord
Guide de réglage rapide
(7N8N0731 et 7N8N0741)
Informations Importantes
(7N8N0752 et 7N8N0762)
F-2
Consignes de sécurité
Précautions
Veuillez lire ce manuel avec attention avant d’utiliser votre projecteur NEC NP216/NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110 et
gardez ce manuel à portée de main afin de pouvoir y recourir facilement.
ATTENTION
Pour couper complètement l’alimentation, retirez la prise du secteur.
La prise du secteur doit être accessible et installée le plus près possible de l’appareil.
ATTENTION
POUR ÉVITER TOUT CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE, N’OUVREZ PAS LE BOÎTIER.
A L’INTÉRIEUR SE TROUVENT DES COMPOSANTS À HAUTE TENSION.
POUR TOUTE RÉPARATION, ADRESSEZ-VOUS À UN RÉPARATEUR AGRÉE.
Ce symbole avertit l’utilisateur que le contact avec certaines parties non isolées à l’intérieur de l’appareil risque
de causer une électrocution. Il est donc dangereux de toucher quoi que ce soit à l’intérieur de l’appareil.
Ce symbole avertit l’utilisateur que d’importantes informations sont fournies sur le fonctionnement ou l’en-
tretien de cet appareil.
Ces informations doivent être lues attentivement pour éviter tout problème.
AVERTISSEMENT : AFIN DE PREVENIR TOUT RISQUE D’INCENDIE OU DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE, N’EXPO-

SEZ PAS CET APPAREIL À LA PLUIE OU À L’HUMIDITÉ.
NE PAS UTILISER DE RALLONGE AVEC LA PRISE DE CETTE APPAREIL ET NE PAS NON PLUS LA BRAN-
CHER DANS UNE PRISE MURALE SI TOUTES LES FICHES NE PEUVENT ÊTRE INSÉRÉES COMPLÈTE-
MENT.
DOC Avis de conformation (pour le Canada uniquement)

Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le Matériel Brouilleur du
Canada.
Mise au rebut du produit usagé
La législation européenne, appliquée dans tous les Etats membres, exige que les produits électriques
et électroniques portant la marque (à gauche) doivent être mis au rebut séparément des autres ordures
ménagères. Ceci inclus les projecteurs et leurs accessoires électriques ou lampes. Lorsque vous mettez
au rebut ces produits, veuillez suivre les recommandations des autorités locales et/ou demandez conseil
au magasin qui vous a vendu le produit.
Une fois ces produits mis au rebut, ils sont recyclés et de manière appropriée. Cet effort nous aidera à
réduire les déchets et leurs conséquences négatives, comme par exemple celles causées par le mercure
des lampes sur la santé humaine et sur l’environnement, même à faibles doses.
La marque figurant sur les produits électriques et électroniques ne s’applique qu’aux Etats membres
actuels de l’Union Européenne.
F-3
Mesures de sécurité importantes
Ces instructions de sécurité garantissent la longévité de votre projecteur et préviennent les risques d’incendie et de
décharge électrique. Lisez-les et respectez les conseils.
Installation
• Ne placez pas le projecteur dans les endroits suivants :
- sur un chariot, un support ou une table instable.
- près d’un point d’eau, d’un bain ou dans des pièces humides.
- à la lumière directe du soleil, près de chauffages ou d’appareils émettant de la chaleur.
- dans un environnement poussiéreux, enfumé ou embué.
- sur une feuille de papier, une carpette ou un tapis.
• Si vous voulez installer le projecteur au plafond :
- Ne pas essayer d’installer le projecteur soi-même.
- Le projecteur doit être installé par un technicien qualifié pour garantir une installation réussie et réduire le risque
d’éventuelles blessures corporelles.
- De plus, le plafond doit être suffisamment solide pour supporter le projecteur et l’installation doit être conforme
aux réglementations locales de construction.
- Veuillez consulter votre revendeur pour de plus amples informations.
AVERTISSEMENT
• Ne couvrez pas l’objectif avec le cache-objectif fourni ni avec un autre objet lorsque le projecteur est en mar-
che. À défaut de respecter cette consigne, la chaleur provenant de l’émission de lumière pourrait faire fondre
le capuchon.
• Ne placez pas d’objet pouvant être affecté par la chaleur en face de l’objectif du projecteur. À défaut de res-
pecter cette consigne, la chaleur provenant de l’émission de lumière pourrait faire fondre cet objet.
Placez le projecteur en position horizontale

L’angle d’inclinaison du projecteur ne devrait pas excéder 10 degrés. Le projecteur ne devrait pas non plus être installé
ailleurs que sur un bureau ou au plafond, sinon la durée de vie de la lampe risque d’être grandement écourtée.
10˚
F-4
Précautions contre l’incendie et l’électrocution
• Veiller à ce que la ventilation soit suffisante et à ce que les bouches ne soient pas obstruées afin d’éviter toute
accumulation de chaleur à l’intérieur du projecteur. Laisser un espace d’au moins 4 pouces/10 cm entre le projec-
teur et le mur.
• Ne pas essayer de toucher la sortie de l’aération située sur le côté avant car elle peut devenir brûlante lorsque le
projecteur est en marche et juste après son extinction.
• Eviter de faire tomber des corps étrangers comme des trombones et des morceaux de papier dans le projecteur.
Ne pas essayer de récupérer des objets tombés dans le projecteur. Ne pas insérer d’objet métallique comme un
fil ou un tournevis dans le projecteur. Si quelque chose venait à tomber dans le projecteur, le débrancher immé-
diatement et demander à un réparateur qualifié de retirer l’objet.
• Ne placez pas d’objet sur le projecteur.
• Ne pas toucher la prise d’alimentation pendant un orage. Cela pourrait causer un choc électrique ou un incendie.
• Le projecteur est conçu pour fonctionner sur une alimentation de 100-240V CA 50/60 Hz. Assurez-vous que l’ali-
mentation correspond à ces exigences avant de commencer à utiliser votre projecteur.
• Ne pas regarder dans l’objectif lorsque le projecteur est en marche. Cela pourrait provoquer de graves dommages
oculaires.
• Tenir les objets tels qu’une loupe à l’écart du rayon de lumière du projecteur. La lumière projetée par l’objectif
est puissante, par conséquent tout objet pouvant rediriger la lumière provenant de l’objectif peut provoquer des
dangers inattendus comme un incendie ou blesser les yeux.
• Ne placez pas d’objet pouvant être affecté par la chaleur en face des orifices de ventilation du projecteur.
À défaut de respecter cette consigne, les objets en question pourraient fondre ou vous brûler les mains en raison
de la chaleur produite par les orifices de ventilation.
• Manipulez le câble d’alimentation avec précaution. Un câble endommagé ou égratigné peut entraîner une élec-
trocution ou un incendie.
- N’utilisez aucun autre câble d’alimentation que celui fourni.
- Ne pliez pas ou n’écrasez pas le câble d’alimentation de manière excessive.
- Ne placez pas le câble d’alimentation sous le projecteur ou tout autre objet lourd.
- Ne couvrez pas le câble d’alimentation avec d’autres matériaux doux comme des tapis.
- Ne soumettez pas le câble d’alimentation à la chaleur.
- Ne manipulez pas la prise d’alimentation avec des mains mouillées.
• Eteindre le projecteur, débrancher le câble d’alimentation et faire réviser l’appareil par un technicien qualifi é dans
le cas des problémes suivants :
- Le câble ou la prise d’alimentation est endommagé ou égratigné.
- Du liquide a été répandu à l’intérieur du projecteur, ou ce dernier a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’eau.
- Le projecteur ne fonctionne pas normalement lorsque vous suivez les instructions décrites dans ce mode d’emploi.
- Le projecteur est tombé ou le boîtier a été endommagé.
- Les performances du projecteur ont décliné, indiquant un besoin de maintenance.
• Déconnectez le câble d’alimentation et tout autre câble avant de transporter le projecteur.
• Eteignez le projecteur et débranchez le câble d’alimentation avant de nettoyer le boîtier ou de remplacer la lampe.
• Eteindre le projecteur et débrancher le câble d’alimentation si le projecteur n’est pas utilisé durant une longue période.
• Lors de l’utilisation d’un câble LAN (uniquement NP216/NP215) :
Pour votre sécurité, ne raccordez pas au connecteur pour périphérique externe de câble pouvant avoir une tension
excessive.
F-5
ATTENTION
• Ne pas utiliser le pied à inclinaison réglable pour effectuer des réglages autres que ceux initialement prévus.
Une utilisation non-prévue du pied d’inclinaison pour porter ou suspendre le projecteur (au mur ou au plafond)
peut causer des dommages au projecteur.
• Ne pas envoyer le projecteur dans la sacoche souple par service d’expédition ou par un transporteur de fret. Le
projecteur se trouvant à l’intérieur de la sacoche souple pourrait être endommagé.
• Sélectionner [HAUT] dans le Mode de ventilateur si le projecteur continue à être utilisé pendant plusieurs jours
d’affilée. (A partir du menu, sélectionner [PARAM.] → [OPTIONS(1)] → [MODE VENTILATEUR] → [HAUT].)
• Ne coupez pas l’alimentation AC dans les 60 secondes qui suivent l’allumage de la lampe et pendant que le
témoin POWER clignote en vert.
Cela pourrait causer une panne prématurée de la lampe.
• Certaines parties du projecteur peuvent se trouver temporairement en surchauffe si le projecteur est éteint avec
la touche POWER ou si l’alimentation électrique est coupée pendant une utilisation normale du projecteur.
Faites bien attention quand vous soulevez le projecteur.
Précautions se rapportant à la télécommande

• Manipuler la télécommande avec précaution.
• Si la télécommande est mouillée, l’essuyer immédiatement.
• Eviter toute chaleur excessive et l’humidité.
• Ne pas chauffer, démonter ou jeter les piles au feu.
• Si la télécommande n’est pas utilisée pendant une longue période, retirer les piles.
• S'assurer de respecter la polarité (+/–) des piles.
• Ne pas utiliser des piles neuves et des piles usagées en même temps et ne pas utiliser des piles de différents
types ensemble.
• Mettre les piles usagées au rebut d’parés la réglementation locales.
Remplacement de la lampe
• Utilisez la lampe fournie pour plus de sécurité et de performance.
• Pour remplacer la lampe, suivre toutes les instructions de la page F-9.
• Veiller à remplacer la lampe lorsque le message [LA LAMPE A ATTEINT SA DURÉE DE VIE MAXIMUM, PRIÈRE
DE LA REMPLACER.] apparaît. Si l’on continue à utiliser la lampe après qu’elle ait atteint la fin de service, l’am-
poule de la lampe risque de se briser en éclats, et des débris de verre risquent d’être dispersés dans le coffret de
la lampe. Ne les touchez pas car ils peuvent vous blesser.
Si cela se produit, prendre contact avec votre revendeur pour le remplacement de la lampe.
Caractéristique de la lampe
Le projecteur utilise une lampe au mercure à haute-pression comme source lumineuse.
Les caractéristiques de la lampe font que sa luminosité décline graduellement avec l’âge.
Egalement, le fait d’allumer et d’éteindre fréquemment la lampe favorisera cette perte de luminosité.
ATTENTION:
• NE TOUCHEZ PAS LA LAMPE immédiatement après qu’elle a été utilisée. Elle sera extrêmement chaude.
Eteignez le projecteur puis débranchez le câble d’alimentation. Attendez au moins une heure que la lampe se
soit refroidie avant de la manipuler.
• Lors du retrait de la lampe d’un projecteur monté au plafond, assurez-vous que personne ne se trouve sous le
projecteur. Des fragments de verre pourraient tomber si la lampe a grillé.
F-6
Précautions de santé pour les utilisateurs qui visionnent des images en 3D
Avant tout visionnage, lisez bien le chapitre consacré aux précautions de santé dans le manuel utilisateur disponible
avec vos lunettes à obturation LC ou avec vos supports compatibles avec le 3D tels que les DVD, jeux vidéo, fichiers
vidéo de votre ordinateur ou autre matériel du même type.
Afin d’éviter tout symptôme gênant, veuillez tenir compte de ce qui suit :
- N’utilisez pas les lunettes à obturation LC pour visionner autre chose que des images 3D.
- Respectez une distance d’au minimum 2 mètres entre l’écran et l’utilisateur. Le fait de regarder des images 3D
de trop près peut vous fatiguer les yeux.
- Évitez de regarder des images 3D pendant des périodes prolongées. Faites une pause de 15 minutes ou plus
après chaque heure de visionnage.
- Si vous ou l’un des membres de votre famille avez déjà eu des problèmes de crises dues à une photosensibilité,
consultez un médecin avant de regarder des images 3D.
- Si, pendant le visionnage d’images 3D, vous avez des sensations d’écœurement, des vertiges, maux de tête, les
yeux qui tirent, la vision trouble, des convulsions ou des engourdissements, arrêtez le visionnage. Si les symptômes
persistent, consultez un médecin.
A propos du mode Haute Altitude

• Réglez [MODE VENTILATEUR] sur [HAUTE ALTITUDE] lorsque le projecteur est utilisé à des altitudes d’environ
5500 pieds/1700 mètres ou plus.
• Utiliser le projecteur à des altitudes d’environ 5500 pieds/1700 mètres sans régler sur [HAUTE ALTITUDE] peut
causer une surchauffe et le projecteur pourrait s’éteindre. Si cela se produit, attendez quelques minutes et allumez
le projecteur.
• Utiliser le projecteur à des altitudes moins importantes que 5500 pieds/1700 mètres ou encore moins et régler sur
[HAUTE ALTITUDE] peut provoquer une baisse de température trop forte de la lampe, et causer une oscillation
de l’image. Commutez [MODE VENTILATEUR] sur [AUTO].
• Utiliser le projecteur à des altitudes d’environ 5500 pieds/1700 mètres ou plus peut raccourcir la durée de vie des
composants optiques tels que la lampe.
À propos des droits d’auteur des images originales projetées :

Notez que l’utilisation de ce projecteur dans un but commercial ou pour attirer l’attention du public dans un lieu comme
un café ou un hôtel et l’emploi de la compression ou de l’extension d’image d’écran avec les fonctions suivantes risque
de constituer une infraction aux droits d’auteur qui sont protégés par la loi sur les droits d’auteur.
[RATIO D’ASPECT], [KEYSTONE], Fonction de grossissement et autres fonctions semblables.
F-7
Nettoyage du boîtier et de l’objectif
1. Eteindre le projecteur avant d’effectuer le nettoyage.
2. Nettoyer régulièrement le boîtier avec un chiffon humide. S’il est très sale, utiliser un détergent doux. Ne
jamais utiliser de détergent puissant ou des solvants tels que l’alcool ou un dissolvant.
Aspirez la grille d’arrivée de la

ventilation du boîtier.
Remarque concernant le nettoyage de l’objectif

Utiliser une brosse soufflante ou un papier pour objectif pour nettoyer l’objectif, et veiller à ne pas rayer ou détériorer
l’objectif.
F-8
Remplacement de la lampe
Lorsque la lampe atteint sa fin de vie, l’indicateur LAMP dans le boîtier va clignoter en rouge. Même si la lampe fonc-
tionne encore, remplacez la lampe pour maintenir une performance de projection optimale. Après avoir remplacé la
lampe, penser à remettre le compteur d’heures à zéro. (→ page 68 (Mode d’emploi))
ATTENTION
• Utilisez la lampe fournie pour plus de sécurité et de performance.
• NE PAS TOUCHER LA LAMPE juste après l'avoir utilisée. Elle est extrêmement chaude. Éteignez le projecteur
puis déconnectez le câble d’alimentation. Laissez la lampe refroidir pendant au moins une heure avant de la ma-
nipuler.
• NE RETIRER AUCUNE VIS à l’exception de la vis du couvercle de la lampe et des trois vis du compartiment de
la lampe. Une décharge électrique pourrait en résulter.
• Ne pas briser le verre sur le boîtier de la lampe.
Ne pas laisser d’empreintes sur la surface en verre du boîtier de la lampe. Laisser des empreintes sur la surface
en verre peut causer une ombre indésirable et une image de mauvaise qualité.
• Le projecteur s’éteint et se met en mode veille lorsque vous continuez d’utiliser le projecteur dès 100 heures
après la fin de vie de la lampe. Dans ce cas, remplacer la lampe. Si cela se produit, assurez-vous de remplacer la
lampe. Si vous continuez d’utiliser la lampe après qu’elle soit usagée, la l’ampoule peut se fracasser et des bris
de verre peuvent se disperser dans la base de la lampe. Ne les touchez pas car ils peuvent vous blesser. Si cela
se produit, prendre contact avec votre revendeur NEC pour le remplacement de la lampe.
* REMARQUE : Ce message s’affichera dans les conditions suivantes :

• pendant une minute après que le projecteur a été mis en marche
• lorsque la touche (POWER) sur le boîtier du projecteur ou la touche POWER OFF sur la télécommande est enfoncée
Pour éliminer le message, appuyez sur n’importe quelle touche du boîtier du projecteur ou de la télécommande.
Pour remplacer la lampe :

Lampe optionnelle et outils nécessaires pour le remplacement :
• Lampe de remplacement : NP13LP
• Tournevis Phillips ou équivalent
F-9
1. Retirer le couvercle de la lampe.
(1) Dévisser la vis du couvercle de la lampe.
• La vis du couvercle de la lampe ne peut pas être retirée.
(2) Appuyer sur le couvercle de la lampe et le faire glisser pour le retirer.
2. Retirer le logement de lampe.

(1) Desserrez les trois vis fermant le compartiment de la lampe jusqu’à ce que le tournevis phillips tourne dans le
vide.
• Les trois vis ne peuvent pas être retirées.
• Il y a un verrouillage sur ce boîtier pour éviter le risque d’électrocution. N’essayez pas de contourner ce ver-
rouillage.
(2) Retirer le boîtier de la lampe en le tenant.
ATTENTION :
Vérifiez que le boîtier de la lampe est
suffisamment froid avant de le retirer.
Emboîtement
F-10
3. Installer un nouveau logement de lampe.
(1) Insérer un boîtier de lampe neuve dans la prise.
ATTENTION
N’utilisez pas d’autre lampe que la lampe de remplacement NEC NP13LP.
Commandez-la chez votre revendeur NEC.
(2) Enfoncer le centre du haut du boîtier de la lampe afin qu’il soit bien en place.
(3) Fixez-le à l’aide des trois vis.
• Assurez-vous de bien visser les deux vis.
Tenez le boîtier avec votre main pour l’empêcher de s’incliner pendant que vous serrez la vis.
4. Refixez le couvercle de la lampe.

(1) Faire glisser le couvercle de lampe dans l’autre sens jusqu’à ce qu’il soit en place.
(2) Serrer la vis pour fixer le couvercle de la lampe.
• Assurez-vous de serrer la vis.
5. Connectez le câble d’alimentation fourni et allumez le projecteur.

6. Enfin, sélectionner le menu → [RESET] → [EFFACER HEURES LAMPE] pour réinitialiser les heures d’uti-
lisation de la lampe.
REMARQUE : Si vous continuez à utiliser le projecteur plus de 100 heures après que la lampe ait atteint sa fin de vie, le projecteur
ne peut pas s’allumer et le menu ne s’affiche pas.
Si cela se produit, appuyez sur la touche “HELP” de la télécommande pendant 10 secondes pour réinitialiser l’horloge de la lampe.
Lorsque l’horloge de durée de la lampe est réinitialisée, le témoin LAMP disparaît.
F-11
Depistage des pannes
Cette section facilite la résolution des problèmes pouvant être rencontrés pendant l’installation ou l’utilisation du projecteur.
Messages des voyants

Voyant d’alimentation (POWER)
Condition du voyant Condition du projecteur Remarque
Arrêt Le câble d’alimentation est débranché. –
Voyant Vert 0,5 s Marche, Le projecteur se prépare à s’allumer. Attendre un instant.
clignotant 0,5 s Arrêt
2,5 s Marche, La Mise en sommeil est activée. –
0,5 s Arrêt
Voyant sta- Vert Le projecteur est allumé. –
tionnaire Orange [NORMAL] est sélectionné pour le [MODE –
VEILLE]
Rouge [ÉCONOMIE D'ÉNERGIE] est sélectionné pour le –
[MODE VEILLE]
Voyant d’état (STATUS)

Mode normal ou mode veille ([ÉCONOMIE
Arrêt –
D’ÉNERGIE] pour [MODE VEILLE])
Voyant Rouge 1 cycle (0,5 s Problème du couvercle de la lampe ou problème Replacer correctement le couvercle de la lampe
clignotant Marche, 2,5 s Arrêt) du boîtier de la lampe ou le boîtier de la lampe.
2 cycles (0,5 s Problème de température Le projecteur surchauffe. Déplacer le projecteur
Marche, 0,5 s Arrêt) dans un endroit plus frais.
4 cycles (0,5 s Problème de ventilateur Les ventilateurs ne fonctionnement pas cor-
Marche, 0,5 s Arrêt) rectement.
6 cycles (0,5 s Problème de lampe La lampe ne s’allume pas. Attendre une bonne
Marche, 0,5 s Arrêt) minute, puis rallumer le projecteur.
Vert Ré-allumage de la lampe (Le projecteur est en Le projecteur se rallume.
cours de refroidissement.) Attendre un instant.
Voyant Vert Veille ([NORMAL] pour [MODE VEILLE]) –
station- Orange Le VER. PANNEAU COMMANDE est activé. Vous avez appuyé sur la touche du boîtier lor-
naire sque le verrouillage du panneau de commande
était activé.
Erreur de CONTRÔLE ID L'ID de la télécommande et l'ID du projecteur ne
correspondent pas.
Voyant de la lampe (LAMP)

Arrêt Normal –
Voyant Rouge La lampe a atteint la fin de sa durée d’utilisation. Le Remplacer la lampe.
clignotant message de remplacement de la lampe s’affiche.
Voyant sta- Rouge La lampe a été utilisée au-delà de ses limites. Le Remplacer la lampe.
tionnaire projecteur ne s’allumera pas tant que la lampe
n’a pas été changée.
Vert Le [MODE ÉCO] est réglé sur [ACTIVÉ]. –
Protection contre la surchauffe

Si la temperature interne du projecteur devient trop elevee, le dispositif de protection contre la surchauffe eteint auto-
matiquement la lampe en faisant clignoter le voyant STATUS (2 cycles Marche et Arret.)
Si cette situation se produit, agissez de la facon suivante :
• Debranchez le cable d’alimentation apres que les ventilateurs de refroidissement se sont arretes.
• Deplacez le projecteur vers un emplacement plus frais si la piece dans laquelle vous effectuez votre presentation
est particulierement chaude.
• Nettoyez les orifi ces d’aeration s’ils sont obstrues par la poussiere.
• Attendez environ 60 minutes jusqu’a ce que l’interieur du projecteur soit suffi samment refroidi.
F-12
Problèmes courants & Solutions (→ “POWER/STATUS/Voyant LAMP” page F-12.)
(Les chiffres figurant dans le tableau font référence aux pages du mode d’emploi.)
Problème Vérifier ces éléments
Ne pas allumer Ou éteindre • Vérifier que le câble d’alimentation est branché et que la touche d’alimentation du projecteur ou de la télécommande est
activée. (→ pages 17 et 18)
• Assurez-vous que le couvercle de la lampe est correctement installé. (→ page 72)
• Vérifiez que le projecteur ne surchauffe pas. Si la ventilation est insuffisante autour du projecteur ou si la pièce est
particulièrement chaude, déplacez le projecteur dans un endroit plus frais.
• Vérifier que le projecteur n’est pas utilisé encore 100 heures après que la lampe a atteint la fin de sa durée de vie. Dans ce
cas, remplacer la lampe. Si cette durée est dépassée, remplacez la lampe. Après le remplacement de la lampe, réinitialisez
le compteur d’heures. (→ page 68)
• La lampe peut ne pas s’allumer. Attendre une minute entière, puis rallumer le projecteur.
Réglez [MODE VENTILATEUR] sur [HAUTE ALTITUDE] lors de l’utilisation du projecteur à des altitudes d’environ 5500
pieds/1700 mètres ou plus. Utiliser le projecteur sans régler sur [HAUTE ALTITUDE] peut causer une surchauffe et le
projecteur pourrait s’éteindre. Si cela se produit, attendez quelques minutes et allumez le projecteur. (→ page 61)
Si vous mettez le projecteur sous tension immédiatement après que la lampe soit éteinte, le ventilateur fonctionne quelques
instants sans qu’aucune image ne s’affiche, puis le projecteur affiche l’image. Attendre un instant.
S’éteint • Assurez-vous que [MINUT. DÉSACTIVATION] ou [MARCHE AUTO DÉS] est désactivé. (→ page 63, 64)
Absence d’image • Utiliser la touche COMPUTER1, COMPUTER2, VIDEO ou S-VIDEO de la télécommande pour sélectionner votre source
(Ordinateur, Vidéo ou S-Vidéo). (→ page 20) S’il n’y a toujours pas d’image, appuyez de nouveau sur la touche.
• S’assurer que les câbles sont connectés correctement.
• Utiliser les menus pour ajuster la luminosité et le contraste. (→ page 49)
• Retirer le cache-objectif.
• Réinitialiser les réglages ou ajustements aux niveaux des préréglages d’usine à l’aide de la [RESET] du menu. (→ page
68)
• Entrez votre mot-clé enregistré si la fonction Sécurité est activée. (→ page 32)
• Assurez-vous de connecter le projecteur et l’ordinateur portable pendant que le projecteur est en mode de veille et avant
d’allumer l’ordinateur portable.
Dans la plupart des cas, le signal de sortie de l’ordinateur portable n’est pas activé si ce dernier n’est pas connecté au
projecteur avant d’être allumé.
* Si l’écran devient vierge lors de l’utilisation de la télécommande, cela peut venir du logiciel économiseur d’écran ou de
gestion d’énergie de l’ordinateur.
• Voir également la page suivante.
L’image devient subitement • Vérifier si le projecteur est en mode ECO forcé en raison d’une température ambiante trop élevée. Dans ce cas, abaisser
sombre la température interne du projecteur en sélectionnant [HAUT] pour [MODE VENTILATEUR]. (→ page 61)
La couleur ou la teinte n’est • Vérifier si une couleur appropriée est sélectionnée dans [COULEUR MURALE]. Si oui, sélectionner une option appropriée.
pas normale (→ page 55)
• Régler [TEINTE] dans [IMAGE]. (→ page 49)
L’image n’est pas carrée à • Repositionner le projecteur pour améliorer l’angle par rapport à l’écran. (→ page 21)
l’écran • Utiliser la fonction Keystone pour corriger la distorsion trapézoïdale. (→ page 24)
L’image est floue • Ajuster la mise au point. (→ page 23)
• Repositionner le projecteur pour améliorer l’angle par rapport à l’écran. (→ page 21)
• S’assurer que la distance entre le projecteur et l’écran est dans l’intervalle de réglage de l’objectif. (→ page 10)
• Une condensation risque de se former sur l’objectif si le projecteur est froid, déplacé dans un endroit chaud puis mis en
marche. Si cela se produit, ne pas toucher le projecteur et attendre qu’il n’y ait plus de condensation sur l’objectif.
Une oscillation apparaît à • Réglez le [MODE VENTILATEUR] sur un autre mode que [HAUTE ALTITUDE] lors de l’utilisation du projecteur à des
l’écran altitudes moins importantes qu’environ 5500 pieds/1700 mètres. Utiliser le projecteur à des altitudes moins importantes
que 5500 pieds/1700 mètres et le régler sur [HAUTE ALTITUDE] peut causer un refroidissement de la lampe, créant une
oscillation de l’image. Commutez du mode [MODE VENTILATEUR] à [AUTO]. (→ page 61)
L’image défile verticalement, • Contrôlez la résolution et la fréquence de l’ordinateur. Assurez-vous que la résolution que vous tentez d’afficher est
horizontalement ou dans les supportée par le projecteur. (→ page 80)
deux sens • Ajuster manuellement l’image de l’ordinateur avec Horizontale/Verticale dans [OPTIONS D’IMAGE]. (→ page 52)
La télécommande ne fonc- • Installer des piles neuves. (→ page 8)
tionne pas • S’assurer qu’il n’y a pas d’obstacle entre vous et le projecteur.
• Se mettre à 7m du projecteur. (→ page 8)
• Assurez-vous que l’ID de la télécommande corresponde à celui du projecteur. (→ page 60)
Le voyant est allumé ou • Voir le voyant POWER/STATUS/LAMP. (→ page 73)
clignote
Couleurs mélangées en mode • Appuyez sur la touche AUTO ADJ. du boîtier du projecteur ou de la télécommande. (→ page 26)
RGB • Réglez manuellement l’image de l’ordinateur avec [HORLOGE]/[PHASE] dans [OPTIONS D’IMAGE] dans le menu.
(→ page 51)
L’unité de contrôle du réseau • Assurez-vous que [BORNE DE CONTRÔLE] soit réglé correctement. (→ page 64)
local (LAN) ou celle du PC
n’est pas activée.
Impossible de contrôler le • Vérifiez si [MODE VEILLE] est réglé sur [ÉCONOMIE D’ÉNERGIE] et s’il l’est, essayez de le régler sur [NORMAL]. (→
projecteur à partir d’un ap- page 63)
pareil externe
La photo 3D n’est pas af- • Voir « Dépistage des pannes concernant la visualisation des images 3D » à la page 42.
fichée
Pour plus d’informations, contacter votre vendeur.

F-13
S’il n’y a pas d’image ou si l’image ne s’affiche pas correctement.
• Procédure de mise en marche pour le projecteur et le PC.

Assurez-vous de connecter le projecteur et l’ordinateur portable pendant que le projecteur est en mode de veille
et avant d’allumer l’ordinateur portable.
Dans la plupart des cas, le signal de sortie de l’ordinateur portable n’est pas activé si ce dernier n’est pas connecté
au projecteur avant d’être allumé.
REMARQUE : Vous pouvez vérifier la fréquence horizontale du signal actuel dans le menu du projecteur sous Informations.
S’il indique “0kHz”, cela signifie qu’aucun signal n’est envoyé par l’ordinateur. Voir page 67 (Mode d’emploi) ou aller à l’étape
suivante.
• Activation de l’affichage externe de l’ordinateur.

L’affichage d’une image sur l’écran du PC portable ne signifie pas nécessairement qu’il envoie un signal vers le
projecteur. Lors de l’utilisation d’un PC portable, une combinaison de touches de fonction active/désactive l’affichage
externe. En général, la combinaison de la touche “Fn” avec l’une des 12 touches de fonction permet l’allumage
ou l’extinction de l’affichage externe. Par exemple, les ordinateurs portables NEC utilisent Fn + F3, tandis que les
ordinateurs portables Dell utilisent la combinaison de touches Fn + F8 pour alterner entre les sélections d’affichage
externe.
• Envoi d’un signal non-standard par l’ordinateur

Si le signal envoyé par un ordinateur portable n’est pas un standard industriel, l’image projetée peut ne pas
s’afficher correctement. Si cela se produit, désactiver l’écran LCD de l’ordinateur portable lorsque l’affichage du
projecteur est en cours d’utilisation. Chaque ordinateur portable a une façon différente de désactiver/réactiver les
écrans LCD locaux comme décrit à l’étape précédente. Se référer à la documentation de votre ordinateur pour de
plus amples informations.
• L’image affichée est incorrecte lors de l’utilisation d’un Macintosh

Lors de l’utilisation d’un Macintosh avec le projecteur, régler le commutateur DIP de l’adaptateur Mac (non fourni
avec le projecteur) en fonction de votre résolution. Après le réglage, redémarrer votre Macintosh pour que les
changements soient effectifs.
Pour le réglage des modes d’affichage autres que ceux supportés par votre Macintosh et le projecteur, Le change-
ment du commutateur DIP sur un adaptateur Mac peut faire sauter légèrement l’image ou ne rien afficher. Si cela
se produit, régler le commutateur DIP sur le mode fixe 13”, puis redémarrer votre Macintosh. Après cela, rétablir
les commutateur DIP sur un mode affichable, puis redémarrer à nouveau votre Macintosh.
REMARQUE : Un câble Adaptateur Vidéo fabriqué par Apple Computer est nécessaire pour un PowerBook qui ne possède pas
de connecteur mini D-Sub à 15 broches.
• Reflet sur un PowerBook

* Lorsque le projecteur est utilisé avec un PowerBook Macintosh, la sortie ne peut pas être réglée sur 1024 x 768
à moins que “reflet” soit désactivé sur votre PowerBook. Se référer au mode d’emploi fourni avec votre ordinateur
Macintosh au sujet du reflet.
• Les dossiers ou les icônes sont cachés sur l’écran du Macintosh

Les dossiers ou les icônes peuvent ne pas être vus sur l’écran. Si cela se produit, sélectionner [View] → [Arrange]
dans le menu Apple et arranger les icônes.
F-14
Español
Utilización de los documentos de usuario suministrados

Los siguientes documentos del usuario se encuentran incluidos con el proyector.
Información importante
• Lea primero la información importante. Esta cubre información referente a la seguridad del proyector, precauciones,
cambio de la lámpara y solución de problemas.
Guía rápida de configuración

• La guía rápida de configuración proporciona información sobre la configuración inicial y el uso respecto a la co-
nexión de fuente, activación de la alimentación, selección de una fuente y otras instrucciones de funcionamiento
básicas.
Manual del usuario en CD-ROM

• El manual del usuario completo se suministra en el NEC Projector CD-ROM en formato PDF (Portable Document
Format) y proporciona información detallada sobre el producto y su utilización para el proyector NEC.
El manual está disponible en 11 idiomas (Inglés, Alemán, Francés, Italiano, Español, Portugués, Sueco, Ruso,
Coreano, Chino simplificado y Japonés).
Para ver o imprimir los archivos con formato PDF utilice el programa Adobe Acrobat Reader™ o Adobe Rea-
der™.
NOTA: Los programas Adobe Acrobat Reader o Adobe Reader se pueden descargar en la página web de Adobe.
Visite http://www.adobe.com y obtenga la versión actual para su SO (sistema operativo).
• Para ver el manual del usuario (PDF)

[Windows]
1. Coloque el NEC Projector CD-ROM suministrado en la unidad de CD-ROM de su ordenador personal.
2. Haga doble clic en el icono [Mi PC] en el escritorio de Windows.
3. Haga doble clic en el icono del CD-ROM [NECPJ].
4. Haga doble clic en [start_menu.pdf].
• Adobe Acrobat Reader o Adobe Reader se iniciara y le permitirán visualizar el menú de Incio.
5. Haga clic en [Manual del usuario].
El menú del índice se visualizará.
6. Haga clic en el título del capítulo que desea visualizar.
[Macintosh]
1. Coloque el NEC Projector CD-ROM suministrado en la unidad de CD-ROM de si ordenador Macintosh.
2. Haga doble clic en el icono del CD-ROM [NECPJ] en el escritorio de Macintosh.
3. Haga doble clic en [start_menu.pdf].
• Adobe Acrobat Reader o Adobe Reader se iniciará y le permitirá visualizar el menú de Inicio.
4. Haga clic en [Manual del usuario].
El menú del índice se visualizará.
5. Haga clic en el título del capítulo que desea visualizar.
• Para copiar el manual del usuario (PDF) a su ordenador:
Es posible copiar en la unidad de disco duro de su ordenador los manuales de usuario que vienen en el NEC
Projector CD-ROM suministrado.
En el NEC Projector CD-ROM suministrado seleccione [manual] → [Spanish] → [NP216_index_S.pdf] y [NP216_
manual_S.pdf] y copie dichos archivos en la unidad de disco duro de su ordenador.
Consulte el manual del usuario (formato PDF)

en el CD-ROM suministrado para obtener
información detallada.
S-1
¿Cuál es le contenido de la caja?
Asegúrese de que la caja contiene todos los elementos que aparecen en la lista. Si falta alguna pieza, póngase en
contacto con su distribuidor.
Conserve la caja y los materiales de embalaje originales por si tiene que transportar el proyector.
Proyector
Tapa de la lente
(24F45801)
Cable de alimentación Cable de señal VGA Mando a distancia Pilas (AAA × 2)

(US: 7N080236) (7N520073) (7N900881)
(EU: 7N080022)
Sólo para Norteamérica

Tarjeta de registro
Garantía limitada
Para clientes en Europa:

Tiene a su disposición la Póliza de garantía
en nuestra página web:
NEC Projector CD-ROM www.nec-display-solutions.com
Manual del usuario
Para Norte América (7N951472)
Guía de instalación rápida
(7N8N0731)
Información importante (7N8N0752)
Para otros países que no sea Norte

América
Guía de instalación rápida
(7N8N0731 y 7N8N0741)
Información importante (7N8N0752
y 7N8N0762)
S-2
Precauciones
Precaución
Lea con cuidado este manual antes de utilizar el proyector NEC NP216/NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110 y tenga el
manual a mano para poder consultarlo más adelante.
PRECAUCIÓN
Para desactivar la alimentación asegúrese de extraer el enchufe de la toma de red eléctrica.
La toma de red debe estar lo más cerca posible del equipo, y además debe ser fácilmente accesible.
PRECAUCIÓN
PARA EVITAR DESCARGAS ELÉCTRICAS, NO ABRA LA CAJA.
EN EL INTERIOR HAY COMPONENTES CON ALTA TENSIÓN.
ACUDA A PERSONAL DE SERVICIO CUALIFICADO.
Este símbolo advierte al usuario de la presencia de tensión sin aislamiento dentro del equipo suficiente
como para causar descargas eléctricas. Por lo tanto, es peligroso realizar cualquier tipo de contacto con
cualquier pieza del interior del equipo.
Este símbolo alerta al usuario de la presencia de información importante concerniente al funcionamiento

y mantenimiento del equipo.
Debe leerse atentamente la información para evitar problemas.
ADVERTENCIA: PARA EVITAR FUEGO O DESCARGAS ELÉCTRICAS, NO EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LA

LLUVIA NI A LA HUMEDAD.
NO UTILICE EL ENCHUFE DE ESTE EQUIPO CON UN CABLE ALARGADOR O EN UNA TOMA DE PARED A
MENOS QUE LOS CONTACTOS SE PUEDAN INSERTAR COMPLETAMENTE.
Cómo deshacerse del producto utilizado

La legislación de la UE puesta en práctica en cada estado miembro requiere que los productos eléctricos
y electrónicos que lleven la marca (izquierda) deben de deshacerse separadamente de la basura normal.
Esto incluye proyectores y sus accesorios eléctricos o lámparas. Cuando se deshaga de tales productos,
siga los consejos de su autoridad local o pregunte en la tienda en la que adquirió el producto.
Después de recoger los productos utilizados, se vuelven a utilizar y a reciclar de forma adecuada. Este
esfuerzo nos ayuda a reducir los deshechos así como los impactos negativos, tales como el que el mercurio
de las lámparas lleva a cabo en la salud humana y en el medioambiente, a un nivel mínimo.
La marca en los productos eléctricos y electrónicos se aplica sólo a los actuales estados miembros de
la Unión Europea.
S-3
Importante para su seguridad
Estas instrucciones de seguridad son para garantizar una larga vida de su proyector y para evitar incendios y des-
cargas eléctricas. Léalas detenidamente y respete todas las advertencias.
Instalación
• No coloque el proyector en las siguientes condiciones:
- en una mesa con ruedas, soporte o mesa inestables.
- cerca de agua, baños o habitaciones húmedas.
- bajo la luz directa del sol, cerca de calefacciones o dispositivos que radien calor.
- en un entorno polvoriento, con humo o con vapor.
- sobre una hoja de papel o paño, alfombrillas o alfombras.
• Si desea instalar el proyector en el techo:
- No intente instalar el proyector usted mismo.
- El proyector debe de ser instalado por técnicos cualificados para asegurar un funcionamiento adecuado y reducir
el riesgo de lesiones corporales.
- Además, el techo debe de ser lo suficientemente fuerte como para soportar el proyector y la instalación debe
de realizarse de acuerdo con las normas de edificios locales.
- Por favor consulte a su distribuidor para mayor información.
ADVERTENCIA:
• No cubra la lente con el protector de lente ni con ningún otro objeto similar mientras el proyector esté encen-
dido. En caso contrario, el calor que emite la luz proyectada podría derretir el protector.
• No sitúe ningún objeto sensible al calor delante de la lente del proyector. En caso contrario, el calor que emite
la luz proyectada podría derretir el objeto.
Ponga el proyector en posición horizontal

El ángulo de inclinación del proyector no debe exceder de 10 grados. Tampoco se debe instalar el proyector de ninguna
forma diferente a la instalación de sobremesa o techo, ya que de lo contrario la vida útil de la lámpara puede
reducirse considerablemente.
10°
S-4
Precauciones ante fuegos y descargas eléctricas
• Asegúrese de que existe una ventilación suficiente que los ventiladores no presentan obstrucciones para evitar
la acumulación de calor en el interior del proyector. Deje un mínimo de 4 pulgadas (10 cm) de espacio entre su
proyector y las paredes que lo rodean.
• No intente tocar la salida de ventilación de la parte delantera, ya que puede calentarse mientras permanezca en-
cendido el proyector e inmediatamente después de apagarlo.
• Evite que objetos extraños, como clips y trozos de papel, caigan sobre el proyector.
No intente recuperar ningún objeto que pueda haber caído en el proyector. No inserte ningún objeto metálico, como
un cable o un destornillador, en el proyector. Si algún objeto cayese en el interior de su proyector, desconéctelo
inmediatamente y deje que un miembro del personal de servicio técnico retire el objeto de su proyector.
• No coloque ningún objeto su proyector.
• No toque el enchufe de alimentación durante una tormenta. De lo contrario, podria recibir una descarga eléctrica
o podria producirse un incendio.
• El proyector está diseñado para funcionar con una fuente de alimentación de 100 a 240 V de CA a 50/60 Hz. Ase-
gúrese de que su fuente de alimentación cumple estos requisitos antes de utilizar el proyector.
• No mire directamente a la lente mientras el proyector está encendido. Podría producir lesiones graves en sus
ojos.
• Mantenga cualquier objeto similar a una lupa fuera de la trayectoria de la luz del proyector. La luz proyectada desde
la lente es extensiva, de modo que cualquier objeto anómalo que pueda redirigir la luz que sale de la lente puede
provocar resultados impredecibles, como fuego o lesiones en los ojos.
• No sitúe ningún objeto sensible al calor delante del ventilador.
En caso contrario, podría derretirse el objeto o se podría quemar las manos debido al calor que expulsa el ventila-
dor.
• Manipule el cable de alimentación con cuidado. Un cable de alimentación dañado o deshilachado puede causar
descargas eléctricas o un incendio.
- No utilice ningún otro cable de alimentación que el suministrado.
- No doble ni tire excesivamente del cable de alimentación.
- No coloque el cable de alimentación debajo del proyector o debajo de ningún objeto pesado.
- No cubra el cable de alimentación con materiales blandos tales como alfombrillas.
- No caliente el cable de alimentación.
- No manipule el cable de alimentación con las manos mojadas.
• Apague el proyector, desenchufe el cable de alimentación y lleve el proyector a un servicio tecnico cualifi - cado si
ocurren las siguientes condiciones:
- Cuando el cable de alimentación o enchufe está dañado o deshilachado.
- Si se ha derramado líquido dentro del proyector o si ha estado expuesto a la lluvia o al agua.
- Si el proyector no funciona de forma normal cuando siga las siguientes instrucciones descritas en el manual del
usuario.
- Si el proyector se ha caído o si se ha dañado la caja.
- Si el proyector muestra un cambio en el rendimiento que indiquen que necesita servicio.
• Desconecte el cable de alimentación y demás cables antes de transportar el proyector.
• Desactive el proyector y desenchufe el cable de alimentación antes de limpiar la caja o reemplazar la lámpara.
• Apague el proyector y desenchufe el cable de alimentación si el proyector no se utilizara por un largo periodo de
tiempo.
• Cuando utilice un cable LAN (sólo para NP216/NP215):
Por seguridad, no realice la conexión del conector para cableado de dispositivos periféricos que pueda tener un
voltaje excesivo.
S-5
PRECAUCIÓN
• No utilice la pata de inclinación con otro propósito que no sea el originalmente establecido. El uso incorrecto,
como la utilización de la pata de inclinación para transportar o colgar (en una pared o techo) el proyector pueden
dañar el proyector.
• No envíe el estuche blando por servicios de entrega de paquetes o envíos de carga. Es posible que el proyector
en el interior del estuche blando se dañe.
• Seleccione el modo de ventilador [ALTO] si utiliza el proyector de forma continuada durante más de un día. (En
el menú, seleccione [CONFIG.] → [OPCIONES(1)] → [MODO DE VENTILADOR] → [ALTO]).
• No desactive la alimentación de CA durante 60 segundos después de que se active la lámpara y mientras el
indicador POWER parpadea en verde. De lo contrario, la lámpara podría sufrir fallo prematuro.
• Piezas del proyector podrían llegar a calentarse temporalmente si se apaga el proyector con el botón POWER
o si desconecta el suministro de alimentación CA durante la operación del proyector de forma normal.
Tenga precaución al recoger el proyector.
Precauciones con el mendo a distancia

• Manipule el mando a distancia con cuidado.
• Si se moja el mando a distancia, límpielo y séquelo inmediatamente.
• Evite el calor y humedad excesivos.
• No caliente, desarme ni arroje las pilas al fuego.
• Cuando no vaya a usar el mando a distancia por un período prolongado de tiempo, retire las pilas.
• Asegúrese de que la polaridad (+/–) de las pilas sea correcta.
• No utilice pilas nuevas y usadas al mismo tiempo y no mezcle pilas de distinto tipo.
• Deseche las pilas utilizadas según las regulaciones locales.
Sustitución de la lámpara
• Use la lámpara especificada para garantizar la seguridad y el desempeño.
• Para sustituir la lámpara, siga todas las instrucciones que aparecen en la página S-9.
• Asegúrese de reemplazar la lámpara cuando aparezca el mensaje [LA LÁMPARA HA LLEGADO AL TÉRMINO
DE SU VIDA ÚTIL. REEMPLACE LA LÁMPARA.]. Si continúa utilizando la lámpara después de que ésta haya
alcanzado el final de su vida útil, la bombilla de la lámpara podría estallar y las piezas de cristal podrían esparcirse
por la caja de la lámpara. No toque los trozos de vidrio, pues podría cortarse.
Si esto sucediera, póngase en contacto con su distribuidor para el recambio de la lámpara.
Características de una lámpara

El proyector tiene una lámpara de mercurio de alta presión como fuente de luz.
La característica de la lámpara es que el brillo va disminuyendo gradualmente con el paso del tiempo.
También si se enciende y se apaga la lámpara con mucha frecuencia aumentará la posibilidad de que brille menos.
PRECAUCIÓN:
• NO TOQUE LA LÁMPARA inmediatamente después de que ha estado en uso; estará extremadamente caliente.
Apague el proyector y desconecte el cable de alimentación. Permita que la lámpara se enfríe durante al menos
una hora antes de manipularla.
• Al retirar la lámpara de un proyector instalado en el techo, asegúrese de que no se encuentre nadie debajo.
Fragmentos de cristal podrían caerse si se ha quemado la lámpara.
S-6
Precauciones de salud para los usuarios al visualizar imágenes en 3D
Antes de la visualización, asegúrese de leer los consejos de cuidado sanitario que se encuentran en el manual del
usuario incluido con sus gafas LCD de obturación o con sus archivos compatibles de 3D como por ejemplo DVD,
video juegos, archivos de video de ordenador, etc.
Para evitar síntomas adversos, preste atención a lo siguiente:
- No utilice las gafas LCD de obturación para la visualización de materiales que no sean imágenes en 3D.
- Mantenga una distancia de 2 m o más entre la pantalla y el usuario. Visualizar imágenes en 3D desde una distancia
demasiado corta puede dañar sus ojos.
- Evite la visualización de imágenes en 3D durante prolongados períodos de tiempo. Tome un descanso de 15
minutos o más después de cada hora de visualización.
- Si usted o cualquier otro miembro de su familia tiene antecedentes de convulsiones por sensibilidad a la luz,
consulte a su médico antes de ver imágenes en 3D.
- Mientras visualiza imágenes en 3D, si siente algún malestar como por ejemplo náusea, mareo, vértigo, dolor de
cabeza, fatiga visual, visión nublosa, convulsiones, y entumecimiento, deje de verlas. Si los síntomas continúan,
busque asistencia médica.
Acerca del modo de altitud elevada

• Ajuste [MODO DE VENTILADOR] en [ALTITUD ELEVADA] al utilizar el proyector en altitudes de aproximadamente
5500 pies/1700 metros o mayores.
• Utilizar el proyector en altitudes de aproximadamente 5500 pies/1700 metros sin ajustar en [ALTITUD ELEVADA]
puede causar que el proyector se sobre caliente y que el protector pueda apagar. Si esto sucede, espere un par
de minutos y encienda el proyector.
• Utilizar el proyector en altitudes inferiores a aproximadamente 5500 pies/1700 metros o menores y ajustando en
[ALTITUD ELEVADA] puede causar que la lámpara se sobre enfríe, provocando que la imagen se mueva rápido.
Cambie [MODO DE VENTILADOR] a [AUTO].
• Utilizar el proyector en altitudes aproximadamente de 5500 pies/1700 metros o mayores puede acortar la vida de
los componentes ópticos como por ejemplo la lámpara.
Sobre los derechos de reproducción de las imágenes originales proyectadas:

No olvide que la utilización de este proyector para fines comerciales lucrativos o para atraer la atención del público
en lugares como cafeterías u hoteles, y el empleo de la compresión o la expansión de la imagen en pantalla con las
subsiguientes funciones, podría originar problemas por la violación de los derechos de reproducción protegidos por
la ley de propiedad intelectual.
[RELACIÓN DE ASPECTO], [KEYSTONE], Función de aumento y otras funciones similares.
S-7
Limpieza de la cubierta y de la lente
1. Apague el proyector antes de limpiarlo.
2. Limpie la cubierta periódicamente con un paño húmedo. Si está muy sucia, utilice un detergente suave.
No utilice nunca detergentes o disolventes fuertes tales como alcohol o diluyente.
Utilice una aspiradora para limpiar

la entrada de ventilación de la caja.
Nota sobre limpieza de lentes

Utilice un pincel soplador o papel óptico para limpiar la lente, y procure no rayar ni estropear la lente.
S-8
Reemplazo de la lámpara
Cuando la duración de la lámpara haya llegado a su fin, el indicador LAMP de la cubierta parpadeará en rojo. Aunque la
lámpara continúe funcionando, sustitúyala para que el proyector siga presentando un rendimiento óptimo. Después de
reemplazar la lámpara, asegúrese de borrar el contador de hora de lámpara. (→ página 68 (Manual del usuario))
PRECAUCIÓN
• Use la lámpara especificada para garantizar la seguridad y el desempeño.
• NO TOQUE LA LÁMPARA inmediatamente después de que haya estado en uso. La lámpara estará extremada-
mente caliente. Primero apague el proyector, y después desenchufe el cable de alimentación. Antes de manipular
la lámpara espere por lo menos una hora hasta que se enfríe.
• NO QUITE NINGÚN TORNILLO, excepto el tornillo de la cubierta de la lámpara y tres tornillos de la caja de la
lámpara. De lo contrario, podría recibir una descarga eléctrica.
• No rompa el cristal del bastidor de la lámpara.
Asegúrese de no dejar huellas digitales en la superficie de cristal del bastidor de la lámpara. La presencia de
huellas digitales en la superficie de cristal puede causar sombras no deseadas y mala calidad de imagen.
• El proyector se apagará y pasará al modo de espera si sigue utilizándolo durante 100 horas más una vez que la dura-
ción de la lámpara haya llegado a su fin. Si esto sucediera, asegúrese de reemplazar la lámpara. Si se produce esta
situación, asegúrese de sustituir la lámpara. Si sigue utilizando la lámpara una vez que su duración haya llegado a
su fin, es posible que la bombilla se rompa y los trozos de cristal se dispersen en el compartimento de la lámpara. No
toque los trozos de vidrio, pues podría cortarse. Si esto sucediera, póngase en contacto con su distribuidor NEC para
el recambio de la lámpara.
* NOTA: Este mensaje aparecerá bajo las siguientes condiciones:

• un minuto después de que el proyector se ha encendido
• cuando se pulsa el botón (POWER) en la cabina del proyector o se pulsa el botón POWER OFF en el mando a distancia
Para eliminar este mensaje, pulse cualquier botón en la cabina del proyector o en el mando a distancia.
Para reemplazar la lámpara:

Lámpara opcional y herramientas necesarias para el reemplazo:
• Lámpara de repuesto: NP13LP
• Destornillador Phillips o equivalente
S-9
1. Quite la tapa de la lámpara.
(1) Afloje el tornillo de la cubierta de la lámpara.
• El tornillo de la cubierta de la lámpara no se puede sacar.
(2) Empuje y deslice la cubierta de la lámpara.
2. Quite la cubierta de la lámpara.

(1) Afloje los tres tornillos que aseguran la caja de la lámpara hasta que el destornillador Phillips gire libremente.
• Los tres tornillos no se pueden quitar.
• El alojamiento posee un seguro para evitar el riesgo de descargas eléctricas. No intente franquear este seguro.
(2) Extraiga la cubierta de la lámpara sujetándola.
PRECAUCIÓN:
Asegúrese de que el alojamiento de la
lámpara se encuentra a baja temperatura
antes de sacarlo.
Ínter bloqueo
S-10
3. Instale una nueva cubierta de la lámpara.
(1) Introduzca un nuevo bastidor de lámpara hasta que el bastidor de lámpara esté introducido en la toma.
PRECAUCIÓN
Utilice solamente la lámpara de repuesto NEC NP13LP.
Haga su pedido a su distribuidor NEC.
(2) Empuje en el centro superior del alojamiento de la lámpara para que quede fijo.
(3) Fíjelo en su sitio con los tres tornillos.
• Asegúrese de apretar los dos tornillos.
Agarre la carcasa con su mano para evitar se vuelque mientras aprieta el tornillo.
4. Vuelva a colocar la cubierta de la lámpara.

(1) Deslice la tapa de la lámpara hasta que encaje en posición.
(2) Apriete el tornillo para cerrar la cubierta de la lámpara.
• Asegúrese de apretar bien el tornillo.
5. Conecte el cable de alimentación suministrado y encienda el proyector.

6. Finalmente, seleccione el menú → [REAJ.] → [BORRAR HORAS DE LA LÁMPARA] para borrar las horas
de uso de la lámpara.
NOTA: Si sigue utilizando el proyector durante 100 horas más una vez que la duración de la lámpara haya llegado a su fin, el proyector
no se podrá encender ni se mostrará el menú.
Si esto sucediera, pulse el botón HELP en el mando a distancia durante 10 segundos para reajustar el reloj de la lámpara a cero.
Cuando el reloj de tiempo de uso de la lámpara se ajusta a cero, el indicador LAMP se apaga.
S-11
Detección de fallos
Esta sección le ayuda a resolver eventuales problemas que puede tener al ajustar o utilizar el proyector.
Mensajes de los indicadores

Indicador de alimentación (POWER)
Condición del indicador Condición del proyector Nota
Apagado El cable de alimentación esta desenchufado. –
Luz intermi- Verde 0,5 seg. Encendido, El proyector se está preparando para en- Espere unos instantes.
tente 0,5 seg. Apagado cenderse.
2,5 seg. Encendido, El temporizador de desconexión está –
0,5 seg. Apagado activado.
Luz fija Verde El proyector se está enfriando. –
Naranja Se selecciona [NORMAL] para [MODO DE –
ESPERA]
Rojo Se selecciona [AHORRO DE ENERGÍA] para –
[MODO DE ESPERA]
Indicador de estado (STATUS)

Normal o Modo de espera ([AHORRO DE
Apagado –
ENERGÍA] para [MODO DE ESPERA])
Luz intermi- Rojo 1 ciclo (0,5 seg. Encendi- Error en la cubierta de la lámpara o error en Reemplace correctamente la cubierta de la
tente do, 2,5 seg. Apagado) el bastidor de la lámpara lámpara o el bastidor de la lámpara.
2 ciclo (0,5 seg. Encendi- Error de temperatura El proyector se ha recalentado. Traslade el
do, 0,5 seg. Apagado) proyector a un lugar más fresco.
4 ciclos (0,5 seg. Encendi- Error de ventilador Los ventiladores no funcionan correcta-
do, 0,5 seg. Apagado) mente.
6 ciclos (0,5 seg. Encendi- Error de la lámpara La lámpara no se enciende. Espere un minuto
do, 0,5 seg. Apagado) completo y luego vuelva a encenderla.
Verde Reencendido de la lámpara (El proyector se El proyector se vuelve a encender. Espere
está enfriando.) unos instantes.
Luz fija Verde Modo de espera ([NORMAL] para [MODO –
DE ESPERA])
Naranja La función [BLOQ. PANEL DE CONT.] está Ha pulsado un botón del proyector con la función
activada. Bloqueo del panel de control activada.
Error de ID DE CONTROL El ID del mando a distancia no coincide con el
ID del proyector.
Indicador de lámpara (LAMP)

Apagado Normal –
Luz intermi- Rojo La lámpara ha llegado al término de su vida útil. Se Reemplace la lámpara.
tente visualiza el mensaje de reemplazo de la lámpara.
Luz fija Rojo Se ha sobrepasado el límite de uso de la Reemplace la lámpara.
lámpara. El proyector no se encenderá hasta
que la lámpara sea reemplazada.
Verde La [MODO ECO] se encuentra en el [ACT.]. –
Protección contra sobretemperatura

Si la temperatura en el interior del proyector aumenta excesivamente, el dispositivo de protección contra sobretemperatura
apagará automáticamente la lámpara y el indicador STATUS comenzará a parpadear (2 ciclos de Encendido y Apagado.)
Si esto sucediera, haga lo siguiente:
• Desenchufe el cable de alimentación una vez que los ventiladores de enfriamiento se hayan detenido.
• Traslade el proyector a un lugar más fresco si la habitación en que se encuentra es excesivamente calurosa.
• Limpie los orifi cios de ventilación si están obstruidos con polvo.
• Espere aproximadamente 60 minutos hasta que el interior del proyector se enfríe.
S-12
Problemas comunes y sus soluciones (→ “Indicador de alimentación/estado/lámpara” en la página S-12.)
(Los números en la tabla se refieren a los números de las páginas en el manual del usuario.)
Problema Compruebe los siguientes puntos
No encienda O apague • Compruebe que el cable de alimentación está conectado y que el botón de alimentación del proyector o del mando a distancia está
activado. (→ páginas 17, 18)
• Asegúrese de que la cubierta de la lámpara esté instalada correctamente. (→ página 72)
• Compruebe para ver si el proyector se ha sobrecalentado. Si no hay suficiente ventilación alrededor del proyector o si la habitación
donde se lleva a cabo la presentación es particularmente calurosa, lleve el proyector a un lugar más fresco.
• Compruebe si puede seguir utilizando el proyector durante 100 horas más una vez que la duración de la lámpara haya llegado a su
fin. En tal caso, reemplace la lámpara. Después de reemplazar la lámpara, reajuste las horas de lámpara utilizadas. (→ página 68)
• La lámpara puede no encenderse. Espere un minuto completo y luego vuelva a conectar la alimentación.
• Ajuste [MODO DE VENTILADOR] en [ALTITUD ELEVADA] al utilizar el proyector en altitudes de aproximadamente 5500 pies/1700
metros o mayores. Utilizar el proyector en altitudes de aproximadamente 5500 pies/1700 metros o mayores sin ajustar en [ALTI-
TUD ELEVADA] puede causar que el proyector se sobre caliente y que el protector pueda apagar. Si esto sucede, espere un par de
minutos y encienda el proyector. (→ página 61)
Si enciende el proyector inmediatamente después de que se apague la lámpara, los ventiladores funcionarán sin visualizar una
imagen durante un tiempo y luego el proyector mostrará la imagen. Espere unos instantes.
El proyector se apaga • Asegúrese de que las funciones [TEMPOR. DESACTIVADO] y [ENC. AUTO. DESACT.] están deshabilitadas. (→ página 63, 64)
No hay imagen • Utilice el botón COMPUTER1, VIDEO o S-VIDEO del mando a distancia para seleccionar la fuente (Ordenador, Vídeo o S-Vídeo).
(→ página 20) Si todavía no aparece ninguna imagen, pulse nuevamente el botón.
• Asegúrese de que los cables están conectados correctamente.
• Use los menús para ajustar el brillo y el contraste. (→ página 49)
• Quite la tapa de la lente.
• Restablezca los ajustes y configuraciones a los valores preajustados de fábrica seleccionando la opción [REAJ.] del menú. (→
página 68)
• Si la función de seguridad está habilitada, introduzca la palabra clave registrada. (→ página 32)
• Asegúrese de conectar el proyector y el PC portátil mientras que el proyector se encuentre en el modo de espera y antes de activar
la alimentación al PC portátil.
En la mayoría de los casos la señal de salida del PC portátil no se activa a menos que esté conectado al proyector antes de ser
activado.
* Si la pantalla queda en blanco mientras usa el mando a distancia, es probable que se deba a la acción del protector de pantalla
o a la función de ahorro de energía del ordenador.
• Consulte también la página siguiente.
La imagen repentinamente • Compruebe si el proyector se encuentra en modo ECO forzoso debido a que la temperatura ambiente es demasiado alta.
se vuelve oscura Si es así, reduzca la temperatura interna del proyector seleccionando la opción [ALTO] para el [MODO DE VENTILADOR].
(→ página 61)
La tonalidad o el tinte de los • Compruebe si se ha seleccionado un color apropiado en [COLOR DE PARED]. Si no es así, seleccione una opción apropiada. (→
colores no es normal página 55)
• Ajuste la opción [TINTE] en [AJUSTE DE LA IMAGEN]. (→ página 49)
La imagen no aparece • Mueva el proyector para mejorar el ángulo de éste respecto de la pantalla. (→ página 21)
rectangular en la pantalla • Use la función Keystone para corregir la distorsión trapezoidal. (→ página 24)
La imagen se ve borrosa • Ajuste el enfoque. (→ página 23)
• Mueva el proyector para mejorar el ángulo de éste respecto de la pantalla. (→ página 21)
• Asegúrese de que la distancia entre el proyector y la pantalla está dentro del margen de ajuste de la lente. (→ página 10)
• Si se enciende el proyector luego de trasladarlo desde un lugar frío a uno caluroso, puede producirse condensación en la lente. Si
esto sucediera, deje el proyector reposar hasta que ya no haya condensación en la lente.
Movimiento rápido en la • Ajuste [MODO DE VENTILADOR] en cualquier otro modo que no sea [ALTITUD ELEVADA] al utilizar el proyector en altitudes infe-
pantalla riores a aproximadamente 5500 pies/1700 metros. Utilizar el proyector en altitudes inferiores a aproximadamente 5500 pies/1700
metros y ajustando en [ALTITUD ELEVADA] puede causar que la lámpara se sobre enfríe, provocando que la imagen se mueva
rápido. Cambie [MODO DE VENTILADOR] a [AUTO]. (→ página 61)
La imagen se desplaza verti- • Compruebe la resolución y la frecuencia del ordenador. Asegúrese de que la resolución que esté intentando visualizar sea compatible
calmente, horizontalmente o con el proyector. (→ página 80)
en ambas direcciones • Ajuste la imagen del ordenador manualmente utilizando la opción Horizontal/Vertical de [OPCIONES DE IMAGEN].
(→ página 52)
El mando a distancia no • Instale pilas nuevas. (→ página 8)
funciona • Compruebe que no hay obstáculos entre usted y el proyector.
• Párese a una distancia de máximo 22 pies (7 m) del proyector. (→ página 8)
• Asegúrese de que el ID del mando a distancia coincide con el ID del proyector. (→ página 60)
El indicador está encendido • Vea el indicador de POWER/STATUS/LAMP. (→ página 73)
o parpadea
Los colores se mezclan en • Pulse el botón AUTO ADJ. en el proyector o en el mando a distancia. (→ página 26)
el modo RGB • Ajuste la imagen del ordenador de forma manual a través de las opciones [RELOJ]/[FASE] en las [OPCIONES DE IMAGEN] del
menú. (→ página 51)
El control de LAN no está • Asegúrese de que [TERMINAL CONTROL] esté ajustado correctamente. (→ página 64)
activado o el control de PC
no está activado
No puede controlar el proyec- • Compruebe si [MODO DE ESPERA] está ajustado en [AHORRO DE ENERGÍA] y si es el caso intente ajustarlo en [NORMAL]. (→
tor desde un equipo externo página 63)
La imagen en 3D no es • Consulte "Detección de fallos al visualizar imágenes en 3D " en la página 42.
visualizada
Si desea mayor información, póngase en contacto con su distribuidor.
S-13
Si no hay imagen o si la imagen no se visualiza correctamente.
• Proceso de conexión de la alimentación para el proyector y el PC.

Asegúrese de conectar el proyector y el PC portátil mientras que el proyector se encuentre en el modo de espera
y antes de activar la alimentación al PC portátil.
En la mayoría de los casos la señal de salida del PC portátil no se activa a menos que esté conectado al proyector
antes de ser activado.
NOTA: Puede comprobar la frecuencia horizontal de la señal actual en el menú del proyector, bajo la opción Información. Si la
lectura de frecuencia es “0kHz”, significará que el ordenador no está emitiendo ninguna señal. Consulte la página 67 (Manual
del usuario) o vaya al paso siguiente.
• Habilitación del modo de visualización externa en el ordenador

La visualización de una imagen en la pantalla del PC portátil no significa necesariamente que el ordenador está
enviando una señal al proyector. Al utilizar un ordenador portátil compatible con PC, el modo de visualización ex-
terna puede habilitarse/inhabilitarse con una combinación de teclas de función. Generalmente, la pulsación de la
tecla “Fn” junto con una de las 12 teclas de función permite activar o desactivar el modo de visualización externa.
Por ejemplo, en los ordenadores portátiles NEC se utiliza la combinación de teclas Fn + F3 (en los ordenadores
portátiles Dell se utiliza Fn + F8) para alternar entre las opciones de visualización externa.
• Emisión de una señal no estándar desde el ordenador

Si la señal de salida de un PC portátil no cumple con las normas de la industria, la imagen proyectada no se
visualizará correctamente. Si esto sucediera, desactive la pantalla LCD del PC portátil cuando utilice el proyector.
La forma de desactivar/activar la pantalla LCD varía en cada PC portátil (según se describió en el paso anterior).
Para obtener información detallada, consulte la documentación suministrada con el ordenador.
• Se visualiza una imagen incorrecta al utilizar un ordenador Macintosh

Si utiliza un ordenador Macintosh con el proyector, ajuste el interruptor DIP del adaptador Mac (no suministrado
con el proyector) de acuerdo con la resolución del ordenador. Después de realizar el ajuste, reinicie el ordenador
Macintosh para que los cambios se hagan efectivos.
Si se selecciona un modo de visualización distinto de los admitidos por el ordenador Macintosh y el proyector y se
cambia la posición del interruptor DIP del adaptador Mac, podrá producirse una ligera inestabilidad en la imagen
o ésta podrá no visualizarse. Si esto sucediera, ajuste el interruptor DIP al modo fijo de 13” y reinicie el ordena-
dor Macintosh. Luego, ajuste los interruptores DIP a un modo que permita la visualización y vuelva a reiniciar el
ordenador Macintosh.
NOTA: En el caso de un ordenador PowerBook que no tiene un conector mini D-Sub de 15 contactos, se necesita un cable
adaptador de vídeo fabricado por Apple Computer.
• Función “espejo” en un ordenador PowerBook

* Al utilizar el proyector con un ordenador PowerBook de Macintosh, es posible que la salida no se ajuste a 1024
x 768 a menos que la opción “espejo” esté desactivada en el ordenador PowerBook. Para más detalles sobre
la función “espejo”, consulte el manual de uso suministrado con el ordenador Macintosh.
• Las carpetas o iconos están ocultos en la pantalla del ordenador Macintosh

Las carpetas o iconos pueden no visualizarse en la pantalla. Si esto sucediera, seleccione [View] → [Arrange] en
el menú Apple y organice los iconos.
S-14
Troubleshooting Check List
Before contacting your dealer or service personnel, check the following list to be sure repairs are needed also by
referring to the “Troubleshooting” section in your user’s manual. This checklist below will help us solve your problem
more efficiently.
Voir pages 82 et 83 (Mode d’emploi)

Consulte la página 82 y 83 (Manual del usuario)
Frequency of occurrence 䡺 always 䡺 sometimes (How often?_____________________) 䡺 other (__________________)

Power
No power (POWER indicator does not light green) See also Shut down during operation.
“Status Indicator (STATUS)”. Power cable’s plug is fully inserted into the wall outlet.
Power cable’s plug is fully inserted into the wall outlet. Lamp cover is installed correctly .
Lamp cover is installed correctly. [AUTO POWER OFF] is turned off (only models with the
Lamp Hours Used (lamp operation hours) was cleared after [AUTO POWER OFF] function).
lamp replacement. [OFF TIMER] is turned off (only models with the [OFF
No power even though you press and hold the POWER but- TIMER] function).
ton for 1 second.
Video and Audio

No image is displayed from your PC or video equipment to the Parts of the image are lost.
projector. Still unchanged even though you press the AUTO ADJ.
Still no image even though you connect the projector to the button.
PC first, then start the PC. Still unchanged even though you carry out [RESET] in the
Enabling your notebook PC’s signal output to the projector. projector’s menu.
• A combination of function keys will enable/disable the Image is shifted in the vertical or horizontal direction.
external display. Usually, the combination of the “Fn” key Horizontal and vertical positions are correctly adjusted on a
along with one of the 12 function keys turns the external computer signal.
display on or off.
No image (blue or black background, no display). projector.
Still no image even though you press the AUTO ADJ. Some pixels are lost.
button.
Image is flickering.
Still no image even though you carry out [RESET] in the
projector’s menu. Still unchanged even though you press the AUTO ADJ.
button.
Signal cable’s plug is fully inserted into the input connector
Still unchanged even though you carry out [RESET] in the
A message appears on the screen. projector’s menu.
( _____________________________________________ )
Image shows flickering or color drift on a computer signal.
The source connected to the projector is active and available.
Still unchanged even though you change [FAN MODE] from
Still no image even though you adjust the brightness and/or [HIGH ALTITUDE] to [AUTO].
the contrast.
Image appears blurry or out of focus.
projector. Still unchanged even though you checked the signal’s resolu-
tion on PC and changed it to projector’s native resolution.
Image is too dark.
Still unchanged even though you adjusted the focus.
Remains unchanged even though you adjust the brightness
and/or the contrast. No sound.
Image is distorted. Audio cable is correctly connected to the audio input of the
projector.
Image appears to be trapezoidal (unchanged even though
you carry out the [KEYSTONE] adjustment). Still unchanged even though you adjusted the volume level.
AUDIO OUT is connected to your audio equipment (only
models with the AUDIO OUT connector).
Other
Remote control does not work. Buttons on the projector cabinet do not work (only models with
No obstacles between the sensor of the projector and the the [CONTROL PANEL LOCK] function)
remote control. [CONTROL PANEL LOCK] is not turned on or is disabled in
Projector is placed near a fluorescent light that can disturb the menu.
the infrared remote controls. Still unchanged even though you press and hold the EXIT
Batteries are new and are not reversed in installation. button for a minimum of 10 seconds.
In the space below please describe your problem in detail.
Information on application and environment where your projector is used
Projector Installation environment

Model number: Screen size: inch
Serial No.: Screen type: 䡺 White matte 䡺 Beads 䡺 Polarization
Date of purchase: 䡺 Wide angle 䡺 High contrast
Lamp operating time (hours): Throw distance: feet/inch/m
Eco Mode: 䡺 Off 䡺 On Orientation: 䡺 Ceiling mount 䡺 Desktop
Information on input signal: Power outlet connection:
Horizontal synch frequency [ ] kHz 䡺 Connected directly to wall outlet
Vertical synch frequency [ ] Hz 䡺 Connected to power cord extender or other (the
Synch polarity H 䡺 (+) 䡺 (−) number of connected equipment______________)
V 䡺 (+) 䡺 (−) 䡺 Connected to a power cord reel or other (the num-
ber of connected equipment______________)
Synch type 䡺 Separate 䡺 Composite
䡺 Sync on Green
STATUS Indicator: Computer
Steady light 䡺 Orange 䡺 Green Manufacturer:
Flashing light [ ] cycles Model number:
Remote control model number: Notebook PC 䡺 / Desktop 䡺
Native resolution:
Refresh rate:
Video adapter:
Other:
Projector PC
DVD player
Signal cable Video equipment

NEC standard or other manufacturer’s cable? VCR, DVD player, Video camera, Video game or other
Model number: Length: inch/m Manufacturer:
Distribution amplifier Model number:
Model number:
Switcher
Model number:
Adapter
Model number:
Ver.3 04/10 (S)

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions.
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
U.S.Responsible Party: NEC Display Solutions of America, Inc.

Address: 500 Park Boulevard, Suite 1100
Itasca, Illinois 60143
Tel. No.: 1-800-NEC-INFO
Type of Product: Projector

Equipment Classification: Class B Peripheral
Model: NP216/NP215/NP115/NP110
We hereby declare that the equipment specified above conforms to the technical standards as
specified in the FCC Rules.
In Europe In Asia
NEC Display Solutions Europe GmbH NEC Display Solutions, Ltd.
Address: Landshuter Allee 12-14 Address: 686-1, Nishioi, Oi-Machi, Ashigarakami-Gun,
D-80637 München, Germany Kanagawa 258-0017, Japan
Telephone: +49 89 99699 0 Telephone: +81 465 85 2369
Email: infomail@nec-displays.com
NEC Solutions (China) Co.,Ltd.
NP216/NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110 Portable Projector Important Information

In North America Address: Rm 1903, Shining Building,35 Xueyuan Rd,
NEC Display Solutions of America, Inc. Haidian District Beijing 100083, P.R.C.
Address: 500 Park Boulevard, Suite 1100 Itasca, Telephone: +8610 82317788
Illinois
60143, U.S.A. NEC Hong Kong Ltd.
Telephone: +1 800 836 0655 Address: 25/F.,The Metropolis Tower,10 Metropolis
Drive, Hunghom, Kowloon, Hong Kong
In Oceania Telephone: +852 2369 0335
Australia
AWA Limited. NEC Taiwan Ltd.
Address: 151 Arthur Street Address: 7F, No.167, SEC.2, Nan King East Road,
Homebush West NSW 2140 Australia Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Customer Call Centre Telephone: +886 2 8500 1700
Telephone: 0297647777
Email Address: commercialsupport@awa.com.au NEC Asia Pte. Ltd.
For Travel Care service, while customer is in Australia, Address: 401 Commonwealth Drive, #07-02, Haw Par
the customer will contact AWA on 1300366144, select Technocentre, Singapore 149598
Option 4. If you want to book warranty service by email Telephone: +65 6 273 8333
customer goes to:
commercialsupport@awa.com.au. NEC Corporation of Malaysia Sdn. Bhd.
Address: 33rd Floor, Menara TA One, 22, Jalan P.
New Zealand Ramlee, 50250 Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia
Visual Group Ltd. Telephone: +6 03 2178 3600 (ISDN)
Address: 28 Walls Road Penrose Auckland New Zea-
land
Telephone: 095250740
Email Address: sarah.reed@visualgroup.co.nz
© NEC Display Solutions, Ltd. 2009 - 2010 Printed in China

7N8N0752
NP216/NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110
Quick Setup Guide
NP216 NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110
Connect your computer to the projector.
COMPUTER 1 IN COMPUTER IN
Schließen Sie ihren Computer an den
Projektor an.
Connecter l’ordinateur au projecteur.
Collegate il vostro computer al
proiettore.
Conectar el ordenador al proyector.
Ligue o seu computador ao projector.
Anslut din dator till projektorn.
VGA signal cable (supplied)
Подключите компьютер к проектору. VGA-Signalkabel (Lieferumfang)
Câble de signal VGA (fourni)
컴퓨터를 프로젝터에 연결하십시오 . Cavo dei segnali VGA (in dotazione)
Cable de señal VGA (suministrado)
Cabo do sinal VGA (fornecido)
VGA-signalkabel (medföljer)
Кабель сигнала VGA (входит в комплект поставки)
VGA 시그널 케이블 ( 동봉 )
Connect the supplied power cable.

Schließen Sie das mitgelieferte Netzkabel an.
Connecter le câble d'alimentation fourni.
Collegate il cavo d'alimentazione in dotazione.
Conecte el cable de alimentación suministrado.
Ligue o cabo da alimentação fornecido.
Anslut den medlevererade nätkabeln.
Подсоедините силовой кабель, входящий в
комплект поставки.
전원 케이블을 연결하십시오 .
Remove the lens cap.
Nehmen Sie die Linsenkappe ab.
Retirer le cache-objectif.
Rimuovete il copriobiettivo.
Quite la tapa de la lente.
Retire a tampa da lente.
Ta bort linsskyddet.
Снимите крышку объектива.
렌즈 캡을 벗기십시오 .
Turn on the projector.

Schalten Sie den Projektor ein.
Allumer le projecteur.
Accensione del proiettore.
Encienda el proyector.
Ligue o projector. ＋
Slå på strömmen till projektorn.

Включите питание проектора.
프로젝터를 켜십시오 .
Select a source.
Auswählen einer Quelle.
Sélectionner une source.
Selezione di una fonte.
Selección de una fuente.
Escolha uma fonte.
Välja en källa.
Выберите источник.
입력원 선택하십시오 .
TIP:
Press the AUTO ADJ. button to optimize a computer
image automatically.
TIPP:
Tast AUTO ADJ. betätigen, um das Computerbild
automatisch einzustellen.
ASTUCE:
＋
Appuyez sur la touche AUTO ADJ pour optimiser une

image d’ordinateur automatiquement.
SUGGERIMENTO:
Premete il tasto AUTO ADJ. per ottimizzare automaticamente l’immagine del computer.
SUGERENCIA:
Pulse el botón AUTO ADJ. para optimizar automáticamente una imagen de ordenador.
DICA:
Prima o botão AUTO ADJ. para optimizar automaticamente uma imagem do computador.
TIPS:
Tryck på AUTO ADJ.-tangenten för att optimera en datorbild automatiskt.
СОВЕТ:
Для выполнения автоматической оптимизации компьютерного изображения нажмите кнопку AUTO ADJ.
팁:
자동 조정(AUTO ADJ.) 버튼을 누르면 컴퓨터 영상이 자동으로 최적화됩니다.
Fn F1 F12
(→ page 12, 75 of the User’s Manual)

Lüftungsschlitze (Auslass)
Adjust the picture size and position. Ventilation (sortie)
Ventilazione (uscita)
Einstellung der Bildgröße und Bildposition. Ventilación (salida)
Ventilação (saída)
Ajuster la taille et de la position de l’image. Ventilation (utlopp)
Вентиляционное отверстие
Regolate delle dimensioni e della 환기구 ( 출구 )
posizione dell’immagine.
1
Ajuste del tamaño y la posición de la imagen.
Ajuste o tamanho da imagem e a posição.
Justera bildstorlek och position.
Настройте размер и положение изображения.
Adjustable Tilt Foot
영상 크기와 위치를 조정하십시오 . 2 Einstellbarer Kippfuß
Pied à inclinaison réglable
Piedino di inclinazione regolabile
Adjustable Tilt Foot Lever
Pata de inclinación ajustable
Einstellbarer Kippfußhebel
Pé de inclinação ajustável
Levier de pied à inclinaison réglable
Justerfot
Leva piedino di regolazione
Ножка для регулирования наклона
Palanca de la pata de inclinación ajustable 조절식 기울임 받침
Alavanca ajustável do pé de inclinação
Justerbar spak för justerfot
Рычаг ножки для регулирования наклона
조정 가능한 기울기 받침 레버
Adjust the tilt foot

Einstellung des Kippfußes
Régler le pied de réglage de l’inclinaison 3
Regolate il piedino d’inclinazione
Ajuste de las patas de inclinación
Ajuste o Pé de Inclinação
Justera lutningen med foten
Настройка ножки для регулировки наклона
기울기 받침을 조절하십시오 . Rear foot
(→ Page 22 of the User’s Manual) Hinterer Fuß
Pied arrière
Piedino posteriore
Pata posterior
Pé traseiro Up Down
Bakre fot Nach oben Nach Unten
Задняя ножка Haut Bas
뒷발 Su Giù
Arriba Abajo
Cima Baixo
Upp Ner
Вверх Вниз
위로 아래로
Zoom
(→ page 23 of the User’s Manual)
Focus
Fokus
Mise au point optique
Fuoco
Enfoque
Focagem
Fokus
Фокус
초점
Correcting Keystone Distortion [KEYSTONE]

Korrigieren der Trapezverzerrung [TRAPEZ]
Correction de la déformation trapézoïdale [KEYSTONE]
Correzione della deformazione trapezoidale [TRAPEZIO]
Corrección de la distorsión trapezoidal [KEYSTONE]
Corrigir a Distorção do Trapezóide [TRAPEZÓIDE]
Korrigera den keystonedistorsionen [KEYSTONE]
Коррекция трапециевидного искажения [ОСНОВНОЙ ПРИНЦИП]
키스톤 일그러짐 바로잡기 [ 키스톤 ]

1 Turn off the projector.
Schalten Sie den Projektor aus.
Eteignez le projecteur.
Spegnete il proiettore. ＋
Desactive el proyector.
Desligue o projector.
Stäng av projektorn.
Отключите питание проектора.
프로젝터를 끄십시오 .
2 Unplug the power cable.

Trennen Sie das Netzkabel ab.
Déconnectez le câble d’alimentation.
Scollegate il cavo di alimentazione.
Desenchufe el cable de alimentación.
Desligue o cabo da alimentação.
Dra ut nätkabeln.
Отсоедините силовой кабель.
전원케이블을 빼십시오 .
(→ page 27 of the User's Manual)
7N8N0731
Printed in China
©NEC Display Solutions, Ltd. 2009 - 2010
Ver. 2 02/10 (S)
NP216/NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110
Quick Setup Guide
NP216 NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110
Connect your computer to the projector.
COMPUTER 1 IN COMPUTER IN
Připojte počítač k projektoru.

Slut computeren til projektoren.
Συνδέστε τον υπολογιστή σας στον προβολέα.
Kytke tietokone projektoriin.
Csatlakoztassa a számítógépet a projektorhoz.
Sluit uw computer aan op de projector.
Koble datamaskinen til projektoren.
Podłącz komputer do projektora. VGA signal cable (supplied)
Bilgisayarınızı projektöre bağlayın. Signální kabel VGA (dodaný)

VGA-kabel (medfølger)
Καλώδιο σήματος VGA (παρέχεται)
VGA-signaalikaapeli (vakiovaruste)
VGA jelkábel (tartozék)
VGA-signaalkabel (meegeleverd)
VGA-signalkabel (inkludert)
Przewód sygnałowy VGA (w zestawie)
VGA sinyal kablosu (sağlanmıştır)
Connect the supplied power cable.
Připojte dodaný napájecí kabel.

Tilslut det medfølgende strømkabel.
Συνδέστε το παρεχόμενο καλώδιο ρεύματος.
Kytke mukana toimitettu virtajohto.
Csatlakoztassa a mellékelt tápkábelt.
De meegeleverde voedingskabel aansluiten.
Koble til strømkabelen som følger med.
Podłącz dostarczony przewód zasilający.
Sağlanan güç kablosunu takın.
Remove the lens cap.
Sejměte krytku objektivu.

Fjern objektivdækslet.
Αφαιρέστε το κάλυμμα του φακού.
Poista linssinsuojus.
Vegye le a lencsevédő kupakot.
Verwijder de lenskap.
Ta av linsedekselet.
Zdejmij osłonę obiektywu.
Lens kapağını çıkartın.
Turn on the projector.
Zapněte projektor.
Tænd projektoren.
Θέστε σε λειτουργία τον προβολέα.
Kytke projektoriin virta.
Kapcsolja be a projektort.
Schakel de projector in.
Slå projektoren på.
Włącz projektor.
Projektörü açın.
Select a source.
Vyberte zdroj.
Vælg en kilde.
Επιλέξτε μία πηγή.
Valitse lähde.
Válasszon ki egy forrást.
Selecteer een bron.
Velg en signalkilde.
Wybierz źródło sygnału.
Bir kaynak seçin.
TIP:
Press the AUTO ADJ. button to optimize a computer
image automatically.
TIP:
Stisknutím tlačítka AUTO ADJ. (Automatické seřízení)
automaticky optimalizujte obraz počítače.
TIP:
Tryk på knappen AUTO ADJ. for at optimere computerens billede automatisk.
ΣΥΜΒΟΥΛΗ:
Πατήστε το πλήκτρο AUTO ADJ. (ΑΥΤΟΜΑΤΗ ΡΥΘΜΙΣΗ) για να βελτιωθεί αυτόματα η εικόνα του υπολογιστή.
VINKKI:
Voit optimoida tietokoneen kuvan automaattisesti AUTO ADJ. -painikkeella.
TIPP:
Nyomja meg az AUTO ADJ. gombot a számítógép képének automatikus optimalizálásához.
TIP:
Druk op de knop AUTO ADJ. om een computerbeeld automatisch te optimaliseren.
TIPS:
Trykk på AUTO ADJ.-knappen for å optimalisere et datamaskinbilde automatisk.
WSKAZÓWKA:
Naciśnij przycisk AUTO ADJ. (Automatyczne dostosowanie), aby automatyzcznie zoptymalizować obraz z komputera.
İPUCU:
Bilgisayar görüntüsünü otomatik olarak optimize etmek için AUTO ADJ. (OTOMATİK AYAR) düğmesine basın.
Fn F1 F12
(→ page 12, 75 of the User’s Manual)

Ventilace (výstup)
Adjust the picture size and position. Ventilatie (stopcontact)
Εξαερισμός (οπή)
Ilmanvaihto (poistoaukko)
Szellőzés (csatlakozó)
Upravte velikost a polohu obrazu. Ventilation (udtag)
Ventilasjon (utløp)
Juster billedets størrelse og position. Wentylacja (wyjście)
Havalandırma (çıkış)
Ρυθμίστε το μέγεθος και τη θέση της εικόνας.
Säädä kuvan kokoa ja sijantia. 1
Állítsa be a kép méretét és helyzetét.
Het beeldformaat en de positie van het beeld
aanpassen.
Still inn bildestørrelsen og plasseringen.
Wyreguluj wielkośc obrazu i jego położenie. Adjustable Tilt Foot
2
Resim boyutunu ve pozisyonunu ayarlayın. Nastavitelný náklon podstavce
Aanpasbare kantelvoet
Adjustable Tilt Foot Lever Ρυθμιζόμενο πόδι με
δυνατότητα κλίσης
Nastavitelná páčka náklonu podstavce Säädettävä kääntöjalka
Aanpasbare regelaar voor kantelvoet Állítható dőlésszögű lábazat
Μοχλός ρύθμισης ποδιού με δυνατότητα κλίσης Justerbar drejefod
Säädettävän kääntöjalan vipu Regulerbar vippefot
Az állítható dőlésszögű lábazat beállítókarja Stopka regulacji nachylenia z
Håndtag til justerbar drejefod możliwością dostosowania
Spak for regulerbar vippefot Ayarlanabilir Eğim Ayağı
Dźwignia stopki regulacji nachylenia z możliwością dostosowania
Ayarlanabilir Eğim Ayak Kolu
Adjust the tilt foot
Upravte podstavec pro naklonění

Juster den vipbare fod 3
Ρυθμίστε το πόδι με δυνατότητα κλίσης
Säädä säätöjalkaa
Állítsa be a dönthető lábazatot
De kantelvoet aanpassen
Still inn vippefoten
Dostosuj stopkę regulacji nachylenia Rear Foot
Eğim ayağını ayarlayın Zadní podstavec

Achterste voet
(→ Page 22 of the User’s Manual) Πίσω πόδι
Takajalka
Hátsó láb Up Down
Bagerste fod
Bakre fot Nahoru Dolů
Stopka tylna Omhoog Omlaag
Arka ayak Πάνω Κάτω
Ylöspäin Alaspäin
Fel Le
Op Ned
Opp Ned
Góra Dół
Yukarı Aşağı
Zoom
Měřítko
Zoomen
Ζουμ
Zoomaus
Nagyítás/Kicsinyítés
Zoom
Zoom
Powiększenie
Zoom
Focus
Zaostření
Fokus
Εστίαση
Tarkennus
Fókusz
Focus
Fokuser
Ostrość
Netleme
Correcting Keystone Distortion [KEYSTONE]
Oprava lichoběžníkového zkreslení [TRAPÉZ]

Korrigering af trapezforvrængning [TRAPEZ]
Διόρθωση της τραπεζοειδούς παραμόρφωσης [ΒΑΣΙΚΗ ΓΡΑΜΜΗ]
Trapetsivääristymän korjaaminen [KEYSTONE]
A trapéz alakú deformáció korrekciója [TRAPÉZTORZÍTÁS]
De keystonevervorming corrigeren [TRAPEZIUM]
Korriger trapesformen [KEYSTONE]
Regulacja zniekształcenia trapezowego opcja [ZNIEKSZTAŁC. TRAPEZ.]
Trapez Distorsiyonunu Düzeltme [KİLİTTASİ]

1 Turn off the projector.
Vypněte projektor.
Sluk projektoren.
Θέστε εκτός λειτουργίας τον προβολέα.
Katkaise projektorin virta.
Kapcsolja ki a projektort.
Schakel de projector uit.
Slå projektoren av.
Wyłącz projektor.
Projektörü kapatın.
2 Unplug the power cable.
Odpojte napájecí kabel.

Træk strømstikket ud.
Αποσυνδέστε το καλώδιο ρεύματος.
Irrota virtajohto.
Húzza ki a tápkábelt.
Koppel de voedingskabel los.
Trekk ut strømkabelen.
Odłącz przewód zasilający.
Güç kablosunu çıkartın.
7N8N0741
Printed in China
©NEC Display Solutions, Ltd. 2009 - 2010
Ver. 2 02/10 (S)
Cautions for Maintenance Services
1. How to start the set under the condition that the LAMP COVER ASSY and TOP COVER ASSY are
removed
The Lamp Cover switch (COVER PWB ASSY) of this model is mounted on the top of the Power Case.
The set cannot be started if the LAMP COVER ASSY and TOP COVER ASSY are left removed.
This is because the Lamp Cover switch can be turned OFF only if the LAMP COVER ASSY is removed.
Follow the steps shown below when intending to start up the set under the condition that the LAMP
COVER ASSY and TOP COVER ASSY are removed.
1 Provide for carton (or cardboard paper)

Length: 30 ~ 40 (mm), Depth: 50 ~ 60 (mm), Thickness: 2 ~ 3 (mm)
2 Insert the carton (or cardboard paper) in the right side of the Lamp Cover switch.
(Insert it along the Lamp Cover switch.)
ON by PUSH
LAMP COVER SWITCH
Insert the carton
Insert it in the red

frame section.
Caution: Under the condition that the TOP COVER ASSY and LAMP COVER ASSY are removed, the
set can be started by the method described above. However, the set cannot be started under
the condition that the TOP COVER ASSY only is mounted and the LAMP COVER ASSY is
removed.
2. Cautions for the installation of LAMP COVER ASSY and TOP COVER ASSY
When installing the LAMP COVER ASSY and TOP COVER ASSY on the set, the TOP COVER ASSY only
should be mounted first. Then, the LAMP COVER ASSY can be mounted.
If the installation work is carried out in the state that the LAMP COVER ASSY is mounted on the TOP
COVER ASSY, the Lamp Cover switch may be damaged by the embossed part of the LAMP COVER
ASSY.
TROUBLESHOOTING
1. Operational checks
A certain degree of fault can be analyzed by simply checking the operating conditions of ordinary use.
Before removing the top cover, check the POWER indicator and the STATUS indicator.
• Is the POWER indicator lit in orange in the standby state?
No • The power cord is wrongly connected.

• The connector (POPA) is unplugged.
• The power unit is faulty. (VCCS+6.5V and VCCS+15V not supplied)
Yes • The peripheral circuits of the MAIN PWB DDP2230 are faulty.
• The peripheral circuits of the SUB CPU (IC2606) are faulty.
• Fuses (F2601/F2602) are broken.
• Is the STATUS indicator blinking in red in the standby state?
Yes [Blinking once every 3 seconds]

• The lamp cover is dislodged.
• The connector (POLB) is unplugged.
[Blinking twice every 4 seconds]
• The inner temperature is unusual, deviating from the range of normal
ambient temperature conditions.
• The connector (POBM) is unplugged.
[Blinking 4 times every 6 seconds]
• The fan is faulty. Otherwise, the fan rotation is blocked by intrusion of
foreign substances.
• The connector (POFA/FB) is unplugged.
[Blinking 6 times every 8 seconds]
• The lamp fails to light.
No • The connector (PODC/PODB/POCW/LAMP) is unplugged.
• Is the LAMP indicator lit in red in the standby state?
Yes
• Lamp’s life has expired. The permissible extension time for replacement has
been exceeded. Starting is impossible.
No ⇒ Replace the lamp.
• Is the LAMP indicator blinking in red in the state of STANDBY and POWER ON?
Yes [Blinking once per second]

• Lamp’s life has expired. Between lamp’s life and the permissible ex-
tension time for replacement (100H).
No ⇒ Replace the lamp.
• When the power is ON, does the power indicator blink in green for one minute? Is it lit in green since then?
No
• The MAIN PWB is faulty.
• Destruction of program or data.
Yes
• Normal in regard to starting and operation.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”

4-1
TROUBLESHOOTING
2. Power block
Problems in the power-related circuits will cause various kinds of malfunction, such as no presentation of pic-
tures, no lamp lighting, failure in fan rotation, and others.
In case of any malfunction, examine whether the present phenomenon really comes from a fault in the power
circuit and check the power block.
• Check whether the voltage outputs specified below are available at the POPA and PODC connectors of
the MAIN PWB.
POPA
PIN No. Signal name Standby Power ON Related circuits
1 S6.5V +6.5V +6.5V SUB-CPU, video input
2 GND GND GND GND
3 S15 +15V +15V Fan driver, CPU, video processor, audio
4 S15 +15V +15V Fan driver, CPU, video processor, audio
5 GND GND GND GND
6 GND GND GND GND
7 PFC-ON 0V +3.3V Standby power consumption control
PODC
PIN No. Signal name Standby Power ON Related circuits
UART_RxD signal/Detection of
1 RxD/LAMP_FLG +3.3V 0V
lamp’sunlighting
2 GND GND GND GND
3 +3.3V +3.3V +3.3V –
4 LAMP_EN +3.3V +3.3V Lamp’s lighting control
5 TxD/LAMP_PW +3.3V +3.3V/+1.5V UART_RxD signal/Lamp power control
If there is no voltage output at the POPA/PODC connector, check the power block following the steps shown
below.
• Is F2601 and F2602 (fuse) blown out in the Power Supply PWB?
Yes
Replace the fuse.
No
•Is there an input (100~400V) available at both ends of R2612 in the board?
No
The DC power block is faulty.
Yes
• When the power is ON and the PODC (Pin 4) LAMP_EN is low, is the PODC (Pin 1) LAMP_FLG main-
tained at the low level?
No
The BALLAST PWB is faulty.
Otherwise, the connector (5-pin) is pulled out in the board.
Yes
• Any circuit other than the Power Supply and BALLAST PWB is faulty. (Lamp broken)

4-2
TROUBLESHOOTING
3. I/O, Sync, and ADC blocks (Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110)

3-1. No presentation of video images (For video system/CV input)
1 Are there any digital signal output at 52~58Pins, 60~61Pins, 82~85Pins, 87~91Pins of IC1203?
Yes
Check IC1206 or its peripheral circuits. Data rewriting again.
No
2 Is the input signal for S-VIDEO?
Yes
Go to 5.
No
3 Is the signal available at both ends of FB1202 (CV signal)?
Yes
No
4 Is the signal available at both ends of JL1201 (CV signal)?
Yes
Check Terminal M1202 or its peripheral circuits. Installations are no good.
No
• Check the signals for external video output equipment.
5 Are the signals available at both ends of FB1203 (SV BRIGHT signal) and FB1204 (SV COLOR signal)?
Yes
Check IC1206 or its peripheral circuits. Data rewriting again
No
6 Are the signals available at both ends of JL1203 (SV BRIGHT signal) and JL1205 (SV COLOR signal)?
Yes
No

4-3
TROUBLESHOOTING
3-2. No presentation of RGB / COMPONENT images (For video system / D-SUB input)
1 Is there a digital signal output at Pins 2~9, Pins 12~19, and Pins 70~77 of IC1008?
Yes
No
2 Are the signals available at both ends of R1060 (Rch), R1058 (Gch), and R1057 (Bch)?
Yes
No
3 Are the signals available at both ends of C1033 (Rch), C1031 (Gch), and C1030 (Bch)?
Yes
Check the Buffer circuit.
No
4 Are the signals available at both ends of JL1011 (Rch), JL1012 (Gch), and JL1013 (Bch)?
Yes
No

1 Is the horizontal sync signal available at both ends of R1268?
No
Go to 3 of 3-1. No presentation of video images (For video system/CV input).
Yes
2 Is the vertical sync signal available at both ends of R1267?
No
Yes
• Check IC1401 or its peripheral circuits. Data rewriting again.
3-4. No presentation of video images (For video system/D-Sub input)

1 Are the signals available at both ends of R1039 (horizontal sync signal) and R1067 (vertical sync signal)?
Yes
No
Yes
No

4-4
TROUBLESHOOTING
3. I/O, Sync, and ADC blocks (Applicable to NP216)

1 Are there any digital signal output at 52~58Pins, 60~61Pins, 82~85Pins, 87~91Pins of IC1206?
Yes
No
2 Is the input signal for S-VIDEO?
Yes
Go to 5.
No
3 Is the signal available at both ends of FB1202 (CV signal)?
Yes
No
4 Is the signal available at both ends of JL1201 (CV signal)?
Yes
No
5 Are the signals available at both ends of FB1203 (SV BRIGHT signal) and FB1204 (SV COLOR signal)?
Yes
Check IC1206 or its peripheral circuits. Data rewriting again
No
6 Are the signals available at both ends of JL1203 (SV BRIGHT signal) and JL1205 (SV COLOR signal)?
Yes
No

4-5
TROUBLESHOOTING
3-2. No presentation of RGB / COMPONENT images (For video system / D-SUB input)
3-2-1. For COMPUTER_1 input
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No

4-6
TROUBLESHOOTING

1 Is the horizontal sync signal available at both ends of R1268?
No
Yes
2 Is the vertical sync signal available at both ends of R1267?
No
Yes
• Check IC1401 or its peripheral circuits. Data rewriting again.
3-4. No presentation of video images (For video system/D-Sub input)

Yes
No
Yes
Check the peripheral circuits. Installations are no good.
No
• Check the signals at Terminal M1001 or external video output equipment.
Yes
No
Yes
Check the peripheral circuits. Installations are no good.
No
• Check the signals at Terminal M1003 or external video output equipment.

4-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
4. DMD Driver block

4-1. Picture errors
4-1-1. [Symptom] No pictures presented
• Are the connector to POF01/ POCW / PODB?
No
Connector connections are defective.
Yes
• Are the following signals input in the state of MAIN PWB Power ON?
Is the logic of SYSRSTZ, LAMPEN, and POWERGOOD correct?
POWERGOOD (Normal: Hi) Check position: R2624

SYSRSTZ (Normal: Hi) Check position: POJTAG_15Pin
LAMPEN (Normal: Hi) Check position: R2661
No
The MAIN PWB is faulty.
Yes
• Is a power voltage 1.2V/1.8V/3.3V input at IC1401?
No
IC2602 is faulty.
Yes
• There is no abnormality in operation.
4-1-2. [Symptom] No pictures presented; picture error in horizontal lines
• Are the following voltages available at JL1801 / JL1802 / JL1803?
JL1801 +23V~26V
JL1802 –26V
JL1803 +8.5V
No
Check whether the signal level is low at Pin 6 (OE) of IC1801.
If there is no problem, IC1801 is faulty.
If the signal level is Hi, IC1401 is considered to be faulty.
Yes
• Are the connector connected to POF01 that is between MAIN PWB and DMD PWB?
No
Yes
• There is no problem in operation.

4-8
TROUBLESHOOTING
4-1-3. [Symptom] Vertical lines in the screen
• Is the connector connected to POF01 that is between MAIN PWB and DMD PWB?
No
Yes
• The DMD itself is considered to be faulty. Otherwise, the socket is faulty.
4-2. Color wheel error

4-2-1. [Symptom] No color wheel rotation
• Are there a +12V input available at Pin 9/22/37/42 of IC2602?
No
IC2606 is faulty.
Yes
• Is the reset terminal, Pin 48 of IC2602, maintained at Hi level?
No
IC1401 is faulty.
IC2602 is faulty or the circuit is faulty because of poor soldering.
Yes
• It is considered to be malfunction in color wheel itself.

4-9
TROUBLESHOOTING
5. Wired LAN
5-1. Wired LAN is out of order
• Is RJ45 LED blinking?
NO Is the voltage of 3.3V output at Pin 1 of POLA?
NO Poor connection of the PORJ (Main board

side)/POLA (LAN board side)
Poor mounting in peripheral circuit.
YES
Check the peripheral circuit of IC8004, and LAN cable connection.

Otherwise, poor soldering of M8001.
YES
• After execute the reset at the RESET/NETWORK SETTINGS, is it possible to communicate through the
Virtual Remote and the like?
No Is it possible to communicate at the PING 192. 168. 0. 10?
NO Check the communication setting of PC.

YES
Check the section between IC8004 peripheral ~ POLA and between

IC8004 peripheral ~ IC1401/IC2606.
YES
• Normal in regard to operation.

4-10
TROUBLESHOOTING
6. Audio block (Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110)

6-1. [Symptom] No audio signals are generated.
• Are signal waveforms available at POSP Pin 1/2?
YES Silk covered wire of speaker broken, cable disconnection, poor contact
around connectors.
NO
• Are audio signals available at IC2206 Pin 2/13?
YES Check IC2206 of its peripheral circuits.

NO
NO
• Possibly attributable to a fault in speaker itself.

4-11
TROUBLESHOOTING
6. Audio block (Applicable to NP216)

6-1. [Symptom] No audio signals are generated.
• Are signal waveforms available at POSP Pin 1/2?
YES Silk covered wire of speaker broken, cable disconnection, poor contact
around connectors.
NO

NO
• What is the present input selection?
Computer1 g To 1
Computer2 g To 2
VIDEO, S-VIDEO g To 3
1 Is an audio signal available at Pin 1/32 of IC2206? Are there waveforms at Pins 13 and 14?
NO Check peripheral circuits around Terminal M2202 and also external audio
output equipment.
output equipment.
output equipment.

4-12
TROUBLESHOOTING
6-2.[Symptom] No audio output is available for external equipment.
NO Check IC2206 of its peripheral circuits.
YES
• Are audio signals available at both ends of R2286 and R2287?
YES Check the peripheral circuits.
NO
• Check the audio systems of external equipment.

4-13
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
PC Control Software for Service

1. Outline Software Descriptions
2. Equipment to be used and Environment
3. Software Installation Procedures

3-1. Main adjustment software
4. Repair and adjustment procedures

4.1. Method of start and ending of adjustments
4-2 Replacement of the MAIN PWB
4.3 Replacement of the optical engine unit or the color wheel
4-4. Miscellany
5. Other Functional Descriptions

5-1. Input Level
5-2. Test Paterns
6. Error Messages

5-1
1. Outline Software Descriptions

This is the PC control software to be used for the servicing adjustments needed during the replacement of
the MAIN PWB, optical engine unit (including CWC PWB and DMD chip), projector lens, of the DLP pro-
jector, NP110/115/210/215/216.
This software is applicable to the following purposes:

• Color Wheel adjustment
• Lamp/Projector usage time setting
• Read/Write of the factory adjusting data (Color Correction, Color Wheel) and the usage time data.
• Adjustment of input level (Sub-Brightness / Sub-Contrast)
2. Equipment to be used and Environment

<Equipment to be used>
• Software for servicing adjustments (Ser_NP215ver***.exe ***: Version Notation)
• Personal computer (WindowsXP/2000/98 in operation and either of the serial ports COM1-COM9 is D-
SUB 9-pin)
• Serial cable (D-SUB9pin-D-SUB9pin cross (reverse) cable)
<Personal computer setting for adjusting pattern screen outputs>

• PC resolution, frequency, and No. of colors
Make setting at VESA XGA (1024 x 768) 60Hz, High color (16 bits) or more.
• The adjusting pattern outputs available for the personal computer are only the test patterns in the “Input
Level Adjust” screen or only the test patterns in the “Color Wheel Adjust” screen. All other adjusting pat-
terns to be used are the built-in test patterns.
3. Software Installation Procedures

3-1. Main adjustment software
This software is composed of the following:
• Main software for servicing adjustments (Ser_NP215Series_Ver***.exe***: Version Notation)
• Various DLL files
It is distributed from CD-ROM. Installation into the PC is carried out in the procedures described below.
1 Copy all the files to an arbitrary folder. These files are located in "Service Adjustment" of the fur-
nished CD-ROM.

5-2
4. Repair and Adjustment Procedures

4-1. Method of start and ending of adjustments
<Method of adjustment start>
According to [2. Equipment to be used and Environment] - <Connecting method>, assume the condi-
tion that the PJ and the PC are connected through a serial cable. In this state, start the servicing ad-
justment software (Ser_NP215Series_ver***.exe).
Click [Setup] to open the Setup screen and select the COM port that is connected to the PJ.
[Baud Rate] is 38,400 bps for default setting on the PJ side. Upon completion, return to the previous
stage with [Return].

5-3
Click [Adjust Start] for model discrimination and initial data read.
* When model discrimination is normally finished, various adjusting buttons in [Adjust] become avail-
able.
<Method of adjustment ending>

When adjustments of 4.2~4.4 below are finished, click [Adjust End].
Clear the data acquired with [Adjust End] so that adjustments can be carried out for another set.
* When another set is adjusted subsequently, start the work with [Adjust Start].
* If adjustment of another set is attempted without performing [Adjust End], an error takes place as a
result of model discrimination.
When closing the adjustment program, click the [Close] button.

If [Adjust Start] has already been executed, [Close] cannot be accomplished unless [Adjust End] is
carried out.

5-4
4-2 Replacement of the MAIN PWB

The MAIN PWB can be replaced in the procedures specified below.
• All Data copy
<All Data copy>

While the PJ power supply is maintained in the standby state, open the Data screen by clicking [Data]
of the main screen of the servicing software.
According to the processes of (1) and (2) below, make Read / Write of All Data.
All Data mentioned here denotes various Factory Adjusting Data (Color Correction, Color Wheel) and
Usage Time.

5-5
(1) All Data Read

Prior to replacement, read out the Main PWB data presently used and save these data in a file.
Check them in [All Data], click the [Read] button to designate the file name, and save the data.
* According to the status of failure, the data may fail to be saved. In such a case, carry out the
work for [4-4. Miscellany].
(2) All Data Write

After the replacement of the MAIN PWB, click the [Write] button to select the saved file and write
the data in.
(3) End
The main screen can be recovered with [Return].
When Data Write is carried out, the characters of [Data] become bold in the main screen.

5-6
4.3 Replacement of the optical engine unit or the color wheel

To replace the optical engine unit or the color wheel, the following actions:
• Color Wheel adjustments
<Color wheel adjustments>

Click [Color Wheel] of the servicing main software and open the Color Wheel Adjust screen.
Make color wheel adjustments according to (1), (2), and (3) below.
(1) Adjusting test pattern output

Enter an RGB output of the personal computer and click the [Ramp WRGB] button of Test (PC
Out) so that the adjusting scale pattern can be displayed.

5-7
(2) Adjustments for the optimal value

Use the scroll bar of Index Adjust and make adjustments to obtain the optimal value at which a
color gap (Vertical Pattern) disappears.
However in this case, adjustments shall be carried out to obtain the optimal value because there
is a certain amount of width at the point where the color gap disappears.
(The optimal value denotes the center value of the width at the point where the color gap disap-
pears.)
(1) When the scroll bar is moved to “0,” a color gap appears.
(2) Raise the scroll bar to the level where the color gap disappears. At that time, record the value
indicated. (Example: 250)
(3) Go on raising the scroll bar until the color gap appears.
(4) Starting from the point where the color gap appears, lower the scroll bar until the color gap
disappears. (Example: 300)
(5) Calculate the mean value of the recorded two values. (250+300)/2=275
(6) Adjust the scroll bar until the value of the calculation result can be secured. (Example: 275)
(7) Confirm that there is no color gap in the screen.
The status without any color gap The status when the color gap
(vertical pattern) (vertical pattern) appears slightly
(3) Preservation of the adjusted value.

Click the [Set] button when the optimal value has been adjusted completely.

(4) End
Return to the main screen with [Return].
Upon the completion of adjustments, the characters of [Color Wheel] become bold in the main
screen.

5-8
4-4. Miscellany
The following adjustments are required in the case of failure in <All Data Copy> to be performed at
the time of MAIN PWB replacement.
• Usage Time setup
• Color Wheel adjustment (*)
* If the procedures 4.3 are executed, these adjustments are not required.
For Color Wheel adjustments, refer to [4.3 Replacement of the optical engine unit or the color wheel].
<Usage Time setup>

* If the present Lamp / Projector Usage Time is different from actual usage time, modification of time
into the correct usage time can be performed only by taking the following actions:
* When Read / Write of All Data is performed with [Data] at the time of MAIN PWB replacement,
Lamp / Projector Usage Time is also copied correctly. Therefore, it is unnecessary to set up any
time-related values.
* If the correct usage time is unclear, never use it.
Click [Usage Time] of the servicing main software to open the Usage Time Setting screen.
Carry out Usage Time setting according to (1) and (2) described below.

5-9
(1) Preliminary confirmation

The adjusting set shall remain in the standby state.
Select the type of changing Usage Time from [Change usage time].
(2) Setup
For the lamp, set up Usage Time [Hours] and Remainder [%] by means of the scroll bar. For the
projector, set up Usage Time [Hours] with the scroll bar. Click the [SET] button in the [Data] box
and save the setting value in the projector.
* When Usage Time is changed, the changed time is displayed in the editor located underneath.
* When recovering the previous time after change, click the [RESET] button to recover the initial
data.
(3) End
When Usage Time is changed, the characters of [Usage Time] become bold in the main screen.

5-10
5. Other Functional Descriptions

5-1. Input Level
Used for the adjustment of Input Level.

* Since the input level of the MAIN PWB has been already adjusted, no general adjustments are re-
quired any more.
Click [Input Level] of the servicing main software to open the Input Level Adjust screen.
According to the procedures of (1) ~ (4) below, make adjustments of RGB / Video / Component (DVD) /
Component (HDTV).
(1) Adjustment of RGB Input Level (sub-brightness and sub-contrast)

Select [RGB] in the Adjust Signal Box.
As an adjusting signal, enter a gray scale input in the input terminal of Computer IN by the use of
an RGB signal generator. Otherwise, enter an RGB output of the personal computer and display the
gray scale with the [Scale] button in the Test (PC Out) Box.
To avoid black chroma, high-light chroma, or coloring in the gray scale, adjust the sub-brightness
and sub-contrast with the scroll bar.
After the completion of adjustments, click the [Set] button in the Data Box.
(2) Adjustment of Video Input Level (Sub-Brightness and Sub-Contrast)

Select [Video] in the Adjust Signal Box.
As an adjusting signal, enter a gray scale input from the Video signal generator.
To avoid high-light chroma in the gray scale, adjust the sub-contrast G (Y) with the scroll bar.
After the completion of adjustments, click the [Set] button in the Data Box.
(3) Adjustment of Component (DVD) Input Level (Sub-Brightness and Sub-Contrast)

Select [Comp (DVD)] in the Adjust Signal Box.
As adjusting signals, enter a 480i gray scale and a split color bar in the input terminal of Computer
IN by the use of a Component (DVD) signal generator.
To avoid high-light chroma in the gray scale, adjust the sub-contrast with the split color bar.
After the completion of adjustments, click the [Set] in the Data Box.

5-11
(4) Adjustment of Component (HDTV) Input Level (Sub-Brightness and Sub-Contrast)

Select [Comp (HDTV)] in the Adjust Signal Box.
As adjusting signals, enter a 480p, 720p, or 1080i gray scale and a split color bar in the input termi-
nal of Computer IN by the use of a Component (HDTV) signal generator.
To avoid black chroma and high-light chroma in the gray scale, adjust the sub-brightness and sub-
contrast with the split color bar.
After the completion of adjustments, click the [Set] in the Data Box.
(5) End
When Usage Time is changed, the characters of [Usage Time] become bold in the main screen.
* When recovering the previous setting after adjustments, click the [RESET] button to recover the ini-
tial data.
* In regard to the numerals beside the scroll bar, the value at the time of adjustment start is displayed
on the left of the arrow mark and the present value on the right of the arrow mark.
* The data adjusted by means of a scroll bar are temporary. These data cannot immediately be saved
in the projector. Execute [SET] first, and then write the data in the E2PROM.
* In all cases other than RGB signal adjustments, signals of the personal computer cannot be used.

5-12
5-2. Test Patterns
The test patterns are used when controlling the projector from the personal computer.
At the [Power] box, data of Projector Power Supply ON/OFF are generated. At the [Input Select]
box, data of the situation of Projector Input Changeover are generated. At the [Test Pattern] box,
data of the various test patterns are generated.

5-13
6. Error Messages
• “TIME OUT (ACK)!”

⇒ This is a communication error arising in conjunction with the PJ.
Check connections and confirm whether the PJ main power supply is turned ON.
• “TIME OUT (Data)!”

⇒ This is a communication error arising in conjunction with the PJ.
Check connections and confirm whether the PJ is free from any abnormality. Try it again.
• “Comm Open Error”

Failure in opening the serial port.
Confirm if there is any application that uses the serial port or whether the serial port number is
wrong.
• “Comm Close Error”

Failure in closing the serial port.
Check whether any other application is using the serial port.
• “File format error!”, “Address Error”

The data format is different from that of the file specified at the time of data writing from the file.
Specify the correct file.
• “Comparison error!!”
Failed in writing various data (data, input level, color wheel, usage time).
If the error remains even after retry, this may be subject to a fault in the board.
• “No Signal Input!!”

This is a no-signal error possibly appearing during input level adjustments.
Confirm if there is a signal input available at the selected input terminal.
• “Please check the “All” or other”

No check mark is attached to ìAllî or any other data while data reading is executed.
Select the data to be read out.
• “DATA READ ERROR!”, “DATA SEND ERROR!”

This is a Read/Send error in conjunction with the buffer in the serial port.
There is possibility of PC malfunction. Try to restart the PC.

5-14
• “ACK Error!!”
This is a communication error with the PJ.
Check the PJ status and retry.
• “Model error!!”
The PJ is not the objective model (NP215s).
• “Model check Error (Data Read)!!”

This is a communication error with the PJ.
Check connections and confirm whether the PJ is normal. Then retry.
• “Model check Errror (2)!! Please begin with a start”

The behavior of PJ is different from that at the time of adjustment start.
When adjusting another PJ, start it with the ìAdjust Startî button.

5-15
Model-Specific Data Writing Procedure for NP215 Series

(NP216 is not applicable)
1. Model-specific data writing procedure
Writing procudures shall be performed from step 1) to step 2).
1) Writing the model-specific VerUpField data

Writing software　　 : PJUpgrader2vupf.exe
File name to be written : N-np***_vupf.bin
2) Writing the model-specific product data

Writing software　　 : PJUpgrader2.exe
File name to be written : np***_mdata_******.bin
Note) Names of files in which the model-specific product data are written shall be as follows:
For MAIN PWB ASSY P/N: 81S****, use data version "0.10.018".
For MAIN PWB ASSY P/N: 81T****, use data version "2.00.035".
The part numbers of the maintenance parts for the MAIN PWB ASSY (supply parts) are as specified below.
(List of MAIN PWB ASSY)
List of MAIN PWB ASSY
Product Product
Model Part Number Part Number Remark
Revision Revision
NP215 81S35FA2 As soon as the inventory is finished, the
NP115 part numbers 81S31FA2 and 81S35FA2 will
From A to C 81S31FA2 D and after 81T80FA2 be switched over to 81T80FA2 that is for the
NP110 or 81S35FA2 supply part. (Unified to 81T80FA2 for all
models)
Product Product
Revision Revision
NP215G/215+ 81S36FA2 As soon as the inventory is finished, the
NP210G/210+ part numbers 81S32FA2 and 81S36FA2 will
From A to C 81S32FA2 D and after 81T81FA2 be switched over to 81T81FA2 that is for the
NP115G/115+ supply part. (Unified to 81T81FA2 for all
or 81S36FA2
NP110G/110+ models)
Product Product
Revision Revision
NP215J 81S36FA2 As soon as the inventory is finished, the part
NP210J numbers 81S32FA2 and 81S36FA2 will be
From A to C 81S32FA2 D and after 81T36FA3 switched over to 81S36FA3 that is for the
NP115J supply part. (Unified to 81S36FA3 for all
or 81S36FA2
NP110J models)
3) Initial setting of writing software

[COM port] : Set the COM port of used PC.
[Baud rate] : 115200 bps

5-16
2. Operation Procedure
Prior to operation, install writing software (PJUpgrader2vupf.exe and PJUpgrader2.exe) and files for the
model to be written (n-np***_vupf.bin and np***_mdata_******.bin).
1) Model-specific VerUpField data

1 Connect PKG (set) to PC by using PC control cable.
2 Make sure that electrical power is not applied tp PKG (set).
3 With pressing both [ENTER] and [EXIT] keys, turn the power supply on.
4 Make sure that Power LED illuminates green.
5 Start up PJUpgrader2vupf.exe (　　 ) previously installed.
The following files will be generated in the folder:
6 Start up PJUpgrader2vupf.exe ( ).

5-17
7 Press [choose…] button to select the file to be written.(Ex: NP215)

8 Check that the set and PC are properly connected each other, then press [Flash] button.
Message "Do you start flash write?" is displayed.
9 When [Yes(Y)] button is pressed, writing is started.
(Progress bar showing writing situation is displayed.)
Message "Write Finished!" is displayed, when completed.Press [OK] button to finish the operation.

5-18
2) Model-specific production data

1 Connect PKG (set) to PC by using PC control cable.
2 Make sure that electrical power is not applied tp PKG (set).
3 With pressing both [EXIT] and [MENU] keys, turn the power supply on.
4 Make sure that Power LED illuminates green.
5 Start up PJUpgrader2.exe (　　 ) previously installed.
The following files will be generated in the folder:
6 Start up PJUpgrader2.exe ( ).

5-19
7 Press [choose…] button to select the file to be written.(Ex: NP215 Version "0.10.018")
8 Check that the set and PC are properly connected each other, then press [Flash] button.
Message "Do you start flash write?" is displayed.
9 When [Yes(Y)] button is pressed, writing is started.
(Progress bar showing writing situation is displayed.)
Message "Write Finished!" is displayed, when completed.Press [OK] button to finish the operation.

5-20
3. Error Messages
1 Header information is illegal.（-308）
　 Check the selected file.
　 PJUpgrader2 for vupf cannot rewrite the farm data.
2 Attestation failure.（-1001）
　 When rewriting the version up field, it is required to set the projector in writing only mode in advance.
3 The model information of the file conflicts with that of the connected projector.（-1002）
　　　Check the projector connecting to the selected file.
　 The projector connected is not that the selected file can write for.

5-21
1. Adjustment of the optical axis (Shadow adjustment)

1-1. Facilities to be used
• Screwdriver for CL1 adjustment and fixing: Hexagon screwdriver (Opposite side: 2.0mm)
• Screw fixing adhesive agent
• PC for PC control
• PC control cable (RS232C serial cable)
1-2. Shadow adjustments (Light Tunnel adjustments)

1 Using the adjusting software, project a signal (all-white screen: Test Pattern - Raster 100%) for
shadow adjustments.
Adjust the projection size to 50 inches or above. Set the zoom lever position to the wide end and
adjust the focus.
2 Turn the adjusting screw in front of the set and adjust the shadow in the vertical direction on the
projector screen. Stop the adjusting screw where the vertical radiation margin at the top and the
bottom is equally balanced. (See 2 in Fig. 1 of Item 1-5.)
3 Turn the adjusting screw located behind the set through the hole for MAIN PWB adjustments and
adjust the shadow in the horizontal direction on the projector screen. Stop the adjusting screw
where the horizontal radiation margin at the right and the left is equally balanced. (See 3 in Fig. 1
and Fig. 2 of Item 1-5.)
4 Apply an adhesive agent to the boundary sections (2 positions) of the adjusting screw and the
engine base in order to fix the adjusting screw.
(4 in Fig. 1 of Item 1-5)

5-22
1-3. Shadow adjustment flow
Start of adjustment
Make Vertical shadow control. (1-2-2)
Shadow There is a shadow

present vertical
Check vertical shadow.
No shadow
Make horizontal shadow control. (1-2-3)
There is a shadow
Shadow
horizontal
present
Check vertical and horizontal shadow.
No shadow
End of adjustment
1-4. How to handle irradiation margin in shadow adjustments

Shadow adjustments shall be carried out so that the top, bottom, right, and left irradiation margins can
be evenly balanced.
Since all area of the radiation margins cannot be seen at a time, move the shadow upwards and
downwards, and to the right and left until its one end appears. Examining the amount of margin at the
top, bottom, right, and left, stop the adjusting screw when the radiation margins are equally balanced.
• Vertical shadow adjustments

Turn the adjusting screw clockwise. Position where the radiation Turn the adjusting screw counterclockwise.
(Shadow on the upper side) margins are equally balanced (Shadow on the lower side)
• Horizontal shadow
Turn the adjusting screw clockwise. Position where the radiation Turn the adjusting screw counterclockwise.
(Shadow on the left side) margins are equally balanced (Shadow on the right side)

5-23
1-5. Adjusting position (Screw for shadow adjustments)
2 Vertical
adjustments
4 Adhesion
3 Horizontal
adjustments
Fig. 1. LT Adjusting Block (1)
3 Horizontal
adjustments
MAIN PWB Horizontal

adjusting hole adjusting screw
Adjusting
screwdriver
Fig. 1. LT Adjusting Block (2)

5-24
SERVICEMAN MODE
NP215s Serviceman Mode

1. List of functions
Mode
Functions Expert Service
SOURCE>TEST PATTERN X
ADJUST>PICTURE>SHARPNESS
ADJUST>EXPERT
SETUP>EXPERT>MESSAGE
INFO.>USAGE TIME>PROJECTOR HOURS USED
Info.>SOURCE>RESOLUTION X
INFO.>VERSION>BIOS
SETUP>VERSION-CPU
SETUP>VERSION (2)>MODEL NAME/API/FAN/OSD X
2. Mode changes
2.1. Expert mode
• With the [HELP] key kept pressed, and while the Information Screen is displayed, the keys are
pressed in the order specified below.
[Top] -> [Left] -> [HELP]
• Press the [MENU] key to display the menu, confirm that [Expert] has been displayed on the lower
right of the menu screen.
2.2. Serviceman mode

• When the keys are pressed for 3 seconds in the order of [HELP] → [ENTER] → [HELP] → [ENTER]
→ [HELP] → [ENTER] → [MENU] in the state of Power ON, a menu of "Enter Passcode" is dis-
played.
• Press the selector keys in the order of [UP] → [RIGHT] → [LEFT] → [RIGHT] → [RIGHT] → [RIGHT]
→ [UP] → [UP] → [ENTER].
• Press the [MENU] key to display the menu, confirm in this state that [SERVICE] has been dis-
played on the lower right of the menu screen.

6-1
SERVICEMAN MODE
2.3. How to withdraw from the mode

• When the [EXIT] key is pressed in the state that no menu is displayed, the user mode can be re-
covered.
• Return to the standby state by pressing the [POWER] key. When starting is effected again, the
user mode is then recovered.
2.4. Contents of display

When the Expert Mode or the Serviceman Mode is selected, the following functions are added to the
menu:
• Display of Information
Information below is displayed, though this information is usually not displayed:
For Expert mode:
Information > Usage Time > (Projector Hours Used)
Information >Version > (BIOS)
Information >Version > (SUB-CPU)
For Serviceman mode:
Information >SOURCE > (RESOLUTION)
Information >VERSION (2)> (MODEL NAME/API/OSD)
• Addition of adjustment functions on the menu
The adjustment functions are displayed though they are usually not displayed, and these adjust-
ments become possible.
For Expert mode:
ADJUST > PICTURE > (SHARPNESS)
ADJUST > (EXPERT)
For Serviceman mode:
SETUP > EXPERT > (MESSAGE) are available in the Serviceman mode.
• Modification of the processing contents of existing functions
In the Serviceman mode, the items of initialize are increased in regard to Factory Default.

6-2
SERVICEMAN MODE
3. Additional Functions
3-1. Functions to be added to the Expert Mode
3-1-1. ADJUST>PICTURE>SHARPNESS
This function is used to adjust the clearness of video images.
3-1-2. ADJUST>EXPERT
This function is used for the adjustment of the brightness for R, G, and B independently of each
other.
3-1-3. SETUP>EXPERT>MESSAGE
This function is used to make ON/OFF setting of messages to be displayed on the screen in the
middle of projection.
However, the messages specified below are displayed even though OFF has been selected.
Messages to be displayed at the time of starting when a security lock is effected.

6-3
SERVICEMAN MODE
3-2. Functions to be added to the Serviceman Mode

3-2-1. SETUP>EXPERT>MESSAGE
This function is used to set up ON/OFF for the message displayed in the screen during projection.
3.2.2.
SOURCE>TEST PATTERN
When the [SOURCE] key is pressed, [Test Pattern] is added to the source menu.
When [TEST PATTERN] is selected, all white is displayed.
When [MENU] is pressed and [TEST PATTERN] is selected from the source menu, a list of test
patterns is displayed.
When [Test Pattern] is selected and the [ENTER] key is pressed, the selected test pattern is dis-
played.
For canceling, press the [MENU] key and select any source other than [Test Pattern].
Setting Displayed pattern

Raster 100% All-white raster
Raster 0% All-black raster
Raster RED 100% Red 100% raster
Raster BLUE 100% Blue 100% raster
Raster GREEN 100% Green 100% raster
Raster BLUE 60% Blue 60% raster
Raster 30% Brightness 30% raster
Raster 10% Brightness 10% raster
Cross Hatch Cross hatch
Ramp H 512-gradation horizontal ramp

6-4
CLEANING
Cleaning for the DMD, color wheel, light tunnel, and mirror
Cautions : a) Cleaner fluid
Use absolute alcohol.
If the fluid does not dry out and water drops remain, replace the fluid with new absolute alco-
hol.
b) Cleaning
During the cleaning, do not touch the cleaning surface directly with the hand, or do not rub it
strongly.
Such careless handling may contaminate or impair the cleaning surface, and adversely affect
the video images directly.
1. Cleaning of the projector lens

• Method of cleaning
Get clean Cleaning Cloth wet with a cleaner liquid, and wipe off contaminants by drawing a circle from
the center of the lens, moving to the periphery.
Cleaning Cloth (24BS7251)
2. DMD cleaning
• Cleaning procedure
Use clean Cleaning Cloth wet with a cleaner liquid, and wipe the DMD surface (glass surface) together
with dust. Furthermore, wipe it in dry state.
3. Cleaning for the color wheel

Caution: The color wheel is made of a thin glass plate. Handle it with utmost care and never hold the
glass surface directly.
Use clean Cleaning Cloth wet with a cleaner liquid, and wipe the color wheel together with dust, from its
center area to the periphery in the direction of the arrow.

7-1
CLEANING
4. Cleaning of the light tunnel

Caution: If dirt or contaminant of a cotton swab is attached to the inner surface of the light-tunnel, such a
contaminant may be transferred to the image. Therefore, the cotton swab has to be wet with a
cleaner solution before use.
Get a clean cotton swab (baby size) wet with a cleaner solution and wipe the inner surface of the light-
tunnel together with contaminants.
• If contamination looks too rigorous and improvements by cleaning seem to be difficult to carry out, then
it is recommended to replace the LT ASSY as a whole.
5. Cleaning of the CL3

Caution: The CL3 is made of plastic lens materials. Therefore, it can be hurt easily. Unlike other parts,
cleaning by a wiping action (rubbing action) is strictly prohibited.
Use air blow or the like, often used for camera lens cleaning. The only applicable method of cleaning is
the removal of contaminants by blowing them away.
6. Cleaning of other optical parts

Caution: Various optical parts are made of glass. Handle them with care. Since they can easily be hurt,
do not touch them directly.
Use the cleaning cloth and remove dust along the reflecting surface of each optical part. When remov-
ing dust or contaminants accumulated around the optical parts or on the bottom of the engine assembly
block (light path), use a blower that is available on general market.
7. Cleaning of other main unit

For the replacement of the lamp or at the time of periodic inspection, cleaning is needed for the side sur-
faces of the main unit and ventilation holes.
Dust and contaminants can be removed by the use of cotton applicators, a vacuum cleaner, or the like.

7-2
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
1. I/O terminals (Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110)

1.1 Video I/O terminal
• VGA PC input (Mini D-Sub 15pin x 1 system)
• VGA PC output (Mini D-Sub 15pin x 1 system)
• Video input (RCA Phono terminal x 1 system)
• S-Video input (S terminal x 1 system)
1.2 Audio input terminal

• AUDIO IN input (Stereo•Mini jack x 1 system)
1.3 Control terminal

• Service terminal (D-SUB 9pin x 1 system)
1.4 Lan terminal

• RJ-45 terminal (1 system) (NP215)
1. I/O terminals (Applicable to NP216)

1.1 Video input terminal
• VGA For COMPUTER1 input (Mini D-Sub 15pin 1 system)
• VGA For COMPUTER2 input (Mini D-Sub 15pin 1 system)
• Video input (RCA Phono terminal 1 system)
• S-Video input (S terminal 1 system)
1.2 Audio output terminal

• For MONITOR output (Mini D-SUB 15pin 1 system)
1.3 Audio input terminal

• For COMPUTER1 input (Stereo•Mini jack 1 system)
• For COMPUTER2 input (Stereo•Mini jack 1 system)
• For VIDEO input (For stereo RCA PHONO terminal and S-VIDEO in common)
1.4 Audio output terminal

• COMPUTER/ VIDEO/ S-VIDEO in common (Mini jack 1 system)
1.5 Control terminal

• Service terminal (D-SUB 9pin x 1 system)
1.6 Lan terminal

• RJ-45 terminal (1 system)

8-1
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
2. Input signals
2.1 Signal level
• RGB signal : 0.7Vp-p / 75Ω
• Component signal : 1.0Vp-p / 75Ω (Signal Y), 0.7Vp-p / 75Ω (Signals Cb/Cr, Pb/Pr)
• Video signal : 1.0Vp-p / 75Ω
• S-Video signal : 1.0Vp-p / 75Ω (Signal Y), 0.286Vp-p / 75Ω (Signal C, burst level)
• Sync signal : TTL level (positive/negative) / 1.2kΩ
2.2 Frequencies applicable to RGB signals

• Horizontal sync frequency : 15 ~ 100kHz (24kHz or above for RGB inputs)
• Vertical sync frequency : 50 ~ 120Hz (The resolution over the XGA to 85Hz)
• Max. resolution : UXGA + 1600dot (H) x 1200 dot (V)
2.3 Component signals

The applicable component signals are as specified below.
• 525i, 625i, 480p, 576p (DVD output signal)
• 720p, 1080i (HDTV signal)
2.4 Video input applicable color systems

The applicable color systems are as specified below.
• NTSC3.58
• NTSC4.43
• PAL
• PAL-M
• PAL-N
• PAL-60
• SECAM

8-2
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
3. Circuit Operation
3.1 Input processor block (Input block, A/D converter, PLL) (Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110)
The video signal input entered in the Mini D-SUB15. Since then, the signal is entered in the A/D converter
(IC1008: AD9985A) via the buffer circuits.
The video signals are converted into the 8-bit digital signals at the A/D converter and then applied to the
image processor (IC1401:DDP2230). In the case of the Component signals, applied to the image proces-
sor via the A/D converter, and conversion from chroma signals to RGB signals is carried out inside the
image processor.
The video signals needed inside the A/D converter are clamped by the pulse signals (clamp pulse, mask
pulse). These signals are generated in the A/D converter under the control of I2C. The A/D converter
incorporates a PLL circuit, where the clock signals locked at the H sync signal and the timing pulses are
sent to the image processor.
3.1 Input processor block (Input block, A/D converter, PLL) (Applicable to NP216)
The video signal input entered in COMPUTER1 and COMPUTER2 (Mini D-SUB Pin15) is sent to the A/D
converter (IC1008: AD9985A) via the RGB Selector (IC1011: EL4342IL).
The video signals are converted into the 8-bit digital signals at the A/D converter and then applied to the
image processor (IC1401:DDP2230). In the case of the Component signals, applied to the image proces-
sor via the A/D converter, and conversion from chroma signals to RGB signals is carried out inside the
image processor.
The video signals needed inside the A/D converter are clamped by the pulse signals (clamp pulse, mask
pulse). These signals are generated in the A/D converter under the control of I2C. The A/D converter
incorporates a PLL circuit, where the clock signals locked at the H sync signal and the timing pulses are
sent to the image processor.
3.2 Sync signal processor block

The H/V sync signal that was entered in the Mini D-SUB15, is applied to the A/D converter
(IC1008:AD9985A) and the image processor (IC1401:DDP2230) via the bus switch (IC1004). The H/V
sync signal and the Sync on Green signal that were enterd in the A/D converter, are processed for sync
separation of the H/V Sync output, Composite Sync, and G-Sync. Since then, the signal is entered in the
image processor. Signal discrimination is carried out in the image processor.
3.3 Video signal processor block

After termination, the Composite Video signal, and the S Video signal are entered in the digital video de-
coder (IC1206: µPD64012) through the buffer circuit. In the digital video decoder, NTSC, PAL, SECAM,
and such video signals are converted and decoded into digital signals (brightness and chroma) and the
resultant signals are entered in the image processor (IC1401:DDP2230) together with the horizontal and
vertical sync signals.
The video decoder is controlled by the image processor through I2C.
3.4 Audio I/O processor (Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110)

The audio signals are once entered in the attenuator, and then entered in the audio AMP (IC2208:
TPA3007D1). The audio signal output from this AMP is generated from the internal speaker (7W max.).
The audio amp is controlled by the image processor (IC1401:DDP2230) through the I2C.
3.4 Audio I/O processor (Applicable to NP216)

The audio signals are once entered in the attenuator, and then entered in the audio AMP (IC2208:
TPA3007D1). The audio signal output from this AMP is generated from the internal speaker (7W max.).
The audio amp is controlled by the image processor (IC1401:DDP2230) through the I2C.
When a cable is connected to the Audio Out terminal, the internal speakers are muted and only the L/R
signal output from the Audio Processor IC is available at the Audio Out terminal.
When the PJ standby mode is set at NORMAL, the Audio Out output can be generated. However, in the
case of Power-Saving setup, no output is available upon being transferred to the Power-Saving mode.

8-3
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
3.5 Plug & Play

The serial terminal of 12, 15pin of Mini D-SUB15 are connected to the EEPROM (IC1003: IS24C02D) for
Plug & Play, so that the projector can be detected at the PC.
3.6 Protector
If any one of the conditions below is sensed, the projector causes the status LED to blink and is restored
to the standby condition.
• Detection of lamp cover removal (Cycle of once)
• Detection of unusual temperature by the thermal sensor and bimetal (cycle of twice)
• Detection of fan (x2) stop (Cycle of 4 times)
• Detection of lamp’s failure in lighting (Cycle of 6 times)
3.7 Image processor (CPU, video signal processing)

The image processor (IC1401: DDP2230) is an LSI where the CPU, the video signal processor circuit,
and the DLP data processor are gathered together. This processor is in charge of video signal process-
ing, generation of DMD driver sequence signals, peripheral controls, and various controls of the projec-
tor.
The programs and the data operated in the CPU are stored in the 64bit Flash ROM (IC2004: MX-
29LV640) and the 32kbit EEPROM (IC1402: IS24C32C). The SRAM (IC2001: IS62WV12816BLL) is
used as a work memory.
The RGB signals and the Component signals are fed from the A/D converter in the form of 8bit x 3 (R/
G/B or Y/Cb/Cr or Y/Pb/Pr). The video signals are fed from the video decoder in the form of 8bit x 2 (601
Y/Cb,Cr). The video output is fed to PORT1 of the image processor.
The input video signals pass through the various processing sections of resolution conversion, compli-
ance IP conversion, OSD processing, γ correction, color management, etc., and are then converted into
the DMD data by format conversion, and fed to the DMD (P09701: 0.55XGA DMD) circuit.
As a processing memory for format conversion and motion compliance IP conversion, the XDR
(IC1604:K4Y50084) is controlled by the image processor. Based on the clock signal generated in
the image processor, clock signals are fed from the clock and driver (IC1601:CDCDLP223, IC1603:
CY24272ZXCT) circuit.
The motor driver (IC2602: PMD1000) is in charge of color wheel control. Receiving the control signals
from the DLP data processor, this circuit generates an output to the color wheel. Since the sensor out-
put from the color wheel is fed to the image processor, synchronization can be secured.
The reset IC (IC1801: DAD2000) generates outputs of DMD reset voltages and signals plus power sup-
ply voltages. When the control signals are received from the image processor, the reset voltages are
established and the reset signal output is fed to the DMD.
3.8 1W power saving

When [POWER SAVING] is selected in the standby mode, the normal standby mode is switched over
to the power saving mode within about 10 seconds. Since power consumption is suppressed below
1W in the power saving mode, the power is fed only to the red lights of SUB-CPU (IC2606) and D2411
(Power LED).
Normal start takes place when the POWER button of the remote control and the POWER key of the
main unit are pressed under the power saving mode.

8-4
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
3.9 Wired LAN section

The LAN terminal (M8001) is used connected to the wired LAN cable. The connector is of the RJ-45
type applicable to 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX.
The Ethernet signal received through the wired LAN cable is decoded at the LAN control IC: S1S60020
(IC8004). Since this IC does not have any PHY function, however, the Ethernet signals cannot be
decoded directly. Consequently, signals are decoded through the Ethernet PHY IC: KSZ8041NLI
(IC8001). The decoded data are sent to S1S60020 (IC8004). The signals are then converted into serial
signals by the LAN control IC: S1S60020 (IC8004). Therefore, operation is possible in connection with
DDP2230 through the buffer IC: SN74LVC1G97DCK (IC8006).
In the case of data transmission through the wired LAN cable, the command data are sent from the
LAN control IC: S1S60020 (IC8004) to the Ethernet PHY IC: KSZ8041NLI (IC8001). The data sent to
the Ethernet PHY are modulated and then transmitted to the PC, etc., through the LAN terminal (M8001).
The Ethernet PHY IC: KSZ8041NLI (IC8001) is applicable to the Auto MDI/MDI-X functions. Since it
makes a connection by automatic discrimination, it is unnecessary to examine the difference between
straight cable and cross cable.
When PJ error occurs in the PJ or in such a case, mail transmission is still possible with the PC.
3.10 Closed Caption

Speech and words used in broadcast programs are converted into the character info. The output video
signals are superposed on the closed caption signals that are the character info like speech and words
in broadcast programs superposed during the vertical fly-back period (vertical fly-back section of video
signals in analog broadcasting) of vertical sync signals for the composite video and S-video signals.
3.11 I2C bus control operation

The image processor (IC1401: DDP2230) controls the following eight devices.
• I2C bus I/F 1 (BUS No. 1): Normally in operation
• I2C bus I/F 2 (BUS No. 2): Operation only during Power On
(Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110)
Circuit symbol Item name BUS No. Address (Write) Address (Read) Functions
IC1008 AD9985AKSTZ 2 9Ah 9Bh A/D converter
IC1203 Z8612912SSG 2 28h 29h CC DECODER
IC1206 D64012GJ 2 B8h B9h Video decoder
IC1402 IS24C32C 1 A2h A3h 32Kbit EEPROM
IC1601 CDCDLP223 1 A0h D1h Clock Generator
IC1603 CY2427ZXCT 1 DEh DFh Clock Generator
IC2206 NJW1109V 2 80h 81h Attenuator
IC2606 uPD78F0511AGA 1 60h 61h SUB-CPU
(Applicable to NP216)
Circuit symbol Item name BUS No. Address (Write) Address (Read) Functions
IC1008 AD9985AKSTZ 2 9Ah 9Bh A/D converter
IC1203 Z8612912SSG 2 28h 29h CC DECODER
IC1206 D64012GJ 2 B8h B9h Video decoder
IC1402 IS24C32C 1 A2h A3h 32Kbit EEPROM
IC1601 CDCDLP223 1 A0h D1h Clock Generator
IC1603 CY2427ZXCT 1 DEh DFh Clock Generator
IC2206 NJW1142AV 1 82h – Attenuator
IC2606 uPD78F0511AGA 1 60h 61h SUB-CPU

8-5
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
4. A list of ICs used is shown below (Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110)

Quanitity Circuit symbol Type discription Explanation
1 IC1003 IS24C02D-2ZL1 EEPROM for PLUG & PLAY
1 IC1004 SN74CBT3306 Bus switch
1 IC1006 NJM2581M 6dB Amp
1 IC1008 AD9985AKSTZ A/D converter
1 IC1203 Z8612912SSG-TR Closed Caption
1 IC1204 NJM2233BV Closed Caption
1 IC1206 Upd64012 Video decorder
1 IC1401 DDP2230 Image processor (CPU built-in scaler)
1 IC1402 IS24C232C-2GLI 32Kbit EEPROM
1 IC1601 CDCDLP223 3.3V Clock Synthesizer
1 IC1603 CY24272ZXCT XDR Clock Generator
1 IC1604 K4Y50084UE 512Mbit XDR DRAM
1 IC1801 DAD2000 Reset IC
1 IC2001 IS62WV12816BLL 2Mbit SRAM
1 IC2004 MX29LV640DBTI 64Mbit Flash memory
1 IC2204 ADM3202ARUZ R-232C driver
1 IC2206 NJW1109V Attenuator
1 IC2208 TPA3007D1PW Audio Amp
1 IC2210 UPC393GR Comparator
1 IC2602 PMD1000 Power and Motor Driver
1 IC2606 UPD78f0511 SUB-CPU
1 IC2610 TC7WB66FK BUS Switch
2 IC1002, IC1205 NJM2884U1 Voltage•Regulator
IC1001, IC1009,
4 NJM2878F3 Voltage•Regulator
IC1602, IC2609
1 IC1010 TPS60403DBV Voltage•Regulator
1 IC1202 NJM2882F15 Voltage•Regulator
3 IC2202, IC2403, IC2404 NJM2387ADL3 Voltage•Regulator
1 IC2607 ST1S10PUR Voltage•Regulator
2 IC1007, IC2611 R200LD10L Voltage•Regulator
1 IC901 TSOP34438 Remote Control light Receiver
1 IC902 GP2S27T3 Photo Interrupter

8-6
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
4. A list of ICs used is shown below (Applicable to NP216)

Quanitity Circuit symbol Type discription Explanation
2 IC1003, IC1012 IS24C02D-2ZL1 EEPROM for PLUG & PLAY
2 IC1004, IC1013 SN74CBT3306 Sync Select
1 IC1006 NJM2581M 6dB Amp
1 IC1008 AD9985AKSTZ A/D converter
1 IC1011 EL4342IL RGB Select
1 IC1203 Z8612912SSG-TR Closed Caption
1 IC1204 NJM2233BV Closed Caption
1 IC1206 Upd64012 Video decorder
1 IC1401 DDP2230 Image processor (CPU built-in scaler)
1 IC1402 IS24C232C-2GLI 32Kbit EEPROM
1 IC1601 CDCDLP223 3.3V Clock Synthesizer
1 IC1603 CY24272ZXCT XDR Clock Generator
1 IC1604 K4Y50084UE 512Mbit XDR DRAM
1 IC1801 DAD2000 Reset IC
1 IC2001 IS62WV12816BLL 2Mbit SRAM
1 IC2004 MX29LV640DBTI 64Mbit Flash memory
1 IC2204 ADM3202ARUZ R-232C driver
1 IC2205 SN74CBT3125 BUS Switch
1 IC2206 NJW1142AV Attenuator
1 IC2208 TPA3007D1PW Audio Amp
1 IC2210 UPC393GR Comparator
1 IC2602 PMD1000 Power and Motor Driver
1 IC2606 UPD78F0511 SUB-CPU
1 IC2610 TC7WB66FK BUS Switch
2 IC1002, IC1205 NJM2884U1 Voltage•Regulator
IC1001, IC1009,
4 NJM2878F3 Voltage•Regulator
IC1602, IC2609
1 IC1010 TPS60403DBV Voltage•Regulator
3 IC2202, IC2403, IC2404 NJM2387ADL3 Voltage•Regulator
1 IC2607 ST1S10PUR Voltage•Regulator
2 IC1007, IC2611 PQ200LD10L Voltage•Regulator
1 IC801 TSOP34438 Remote Control light Receiver
1 IC802 ITR8307/TR8 Photo Interrupter

8-7
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
NP215s Power Up Sequence

Processing Device Status Remarks Check Point
POWER ON POWER LED: Lit in Orange ⇒ Lit in Green POPA

↓
“COVERDET” Check IC2603_6Pin L (0V) Cover Error Displayed for H (+3.3V) POLB
IC1401_C18Pin STATUS LED: Blinking in Red (Period of Once)
↓
“LPHOT” Check IC2605_3Pin H (+3.3V) Temperature Error Displayed for L (0V) POBM
IC1401 C25Pin STATUS LED: Blinking in Red (Period of Twice)
↓
PWM Initialization Fan Boot Setup
↓
PS2 : High IC2605_6Pin L ⇒ H (+3.3V)
IC1401_A21Pin
↓
Ballas Uart Mode Setup Enable Communication command
Lamp Sync Type Setup
↓
Fan Data Setup IC2605_4Pin L ⇒ H (+3.3V)
Fan Rotation Start
↓
Ballast Palament obtain TH2401
↓
Precool Check IC2408_1Pin +0.04~0.5V Precooling for More Than 0.04V POCW
STATUS LED : Blinking in Green (1-Second Period)
↓
C/W Motor Data Setup IC2602
C/W Rotation Start
↓
Precool Check IC2408_1Pin +0.04~0.5V Precooling for More Than 0.04V
STATUS LED : Blinking in Green (1-Second Period)
↓
“FANDET” Check IC2408_27Pin H (+3.3V) Fan Error Displayed for L (0V) POFA
IC1401_B18Pin STATUS LED: Blinking in Red (Period of 4 Times) POFB
↓
C/W Rotation Check PODB_3Pin Lamp Error Displayed for H (+3.3V) POCW
IC1401_AD26Pin STATUS LED: Blinking in Red (Period of 6 Times) PODB
↓
LAMPEN : High IC2604_2Pin L ⇒ H (+3.3V) Lamp Light disposition : 200ms wait PODC
Lamp Lighting IC1401_AA27Pin
↓
“LAMPFLAG” Check PODC_2Pin L (0V) Lamp Error Displayed for H (+3.3V) PODC
IC1401_AD27Pin STATUS LED: Blinking in Red (Period of 6 Times)
↓
Lamp Light Status Check Uart command
↓
I2C READY Check Lamp Error Displayed for Abnormality
STATUS LED: Blinking in Red (Period of 6 Times)
↓
I2C Data Setup
↓
No Signal Display Setup POWER LED: Lit in Green ⇒ Blinking in Green
↓
Normal Operation POWER LED: Blinking in Green ⇒ Lit in Green
8-8
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY
1. Diagonal view of the main unit front

9-1
2. LENS CAP/STRAP W/LAMP COVER ASSY/LAMP SASSY

(1) Take out the LENS CAP/STRAP W.
(2) Loosen one screw 1 and remove the LAMP COVER ASSY. Loosen three screws 2 of the LAMP SASSY
and remove the LAMP SASSY.
LAMP COVER ASSY (NP210)

24FU0791
LAMP SASSY
(Option)
LENS CAP (NP210)

24F45801
STRAP W
24J23901

9-2
3. TOP COVER ASSY/DUCT EXT (NP210)

(1) Remove the six screws 1 and the four screws 2 and the take out the TOP COVER ASSY.
(2) Remove the two screws 3 and take out the DUCT EXT (NP210).
TOP COVER ASSY

2 SRW019
9N999251 (NP215/215G)
9N999261 (NP210G)
9N999271 (NP115G)
9N999281 (NP110/110G)
9N999291 (NP215J)
9N999301 (NP210J)
9N999311 (NP115J)
9N999321 (NP110J)
9N999451 (NP216/216G)
9N999461 (NP216J)
3 SRW006
DUCT EXT (NP210)

24F45761
1 SRW011
1 SRW011 1 SRW011
1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 2 2 3
FRONT FRONT

9-3
METHOD OF
DISASSEMBLY
4. MAIN LAN SASSY/MAIN SPK SASSY

(1) Remove the two screws 1 and the six screws 2 and take out the MAIN LAN SASSY/MAIN SPK SASSY.
2 SRW016
1 SRW012
2 SRW016
MAIN LAN SASSY

MAIN SPK SASSY(Applicable to NP216)
1
2 2 2 2 1 2 2
FRONT

9-4
METHOD OF
DISASSEMBLY
5-1. Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110

MAINPWB ASSY/LAM PWB ASSY/SPEAKER
(1) Remove the two screws 1 and six STUD (D-SUB). Take out the MAIN PWB ASSY.
(2) Remove the two screws 3 and take out the LAN PWB ASSY.
(3) Remove the two screws 4 and take out the SPEAKER.
BRACKET (I/O) (NP210)

24H66582
4 SRW017 SHIELD (I/O) (NP210)

24H66591
2 STUD (D-SUB)
1 SRW013
2 STUD (D-SUB)
1 SRW013
MAIN PWB ASSY
SPEAKER (Refer to P5-16)
6N300029 3 SRW014
LAN PWB ASSY

81S35N01
(Applicable to NP215 series)

9-5
5-2. Applicable to NP216

MAIN SASSY/SPEAKER
(1) Remove the two screws 4 and take out the SPEAKER.
4 SRW017
MAIN SASSY
81T45FA1 (USA version)
81T46FA1 (USA other than USA version)
SPEAKER
6N300029

9-6
6. LENS GUARD (NP210)/SHIELD (DMD) (NP210)/CWC PWB ASSY/ENGINE ASSY

(1) Take out the LENS GUARD (NP210).
(2) Remove the two screws 1 and take out the SHIELD (DMD) (NP210).
(3) Remove the one screw 2 and take out the CWC PWB ASSY.
(4) Remove the two screws 3 and take out the ENGINE ASSY.
2 SRW111
1 SRW001
CWC PWB ASSY

81S35FC2
SHIELD (DMD) (NP210)
24H66661
3 SRW001
ENGINE ASSY
(Refer to P9-14~P9-18)
LENS GUARD (NP210)

24F45791
3 2 3 1 1
FRONT

9-7
7. CASE (PS) ASSY)

(1) Remove the six screws 1 and take out the CASE (PS) ASSY.
1 SRW010
CASE (PS) ASSY

24FU0801 (Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110)
24FU0891 (Applicable to NP216)
1 1 1 1 1 1
FRONT

9-8
8. DC FAN
(1) Remove the two screws 1 and take out the DC FAN ASSY.
(2) Remove the three screws 2 and take out the DC FAN.
1 SRW003
DC FAN
3N170148
DUCT LAMP
24F45501
2 SRW115
HOLDER LAMP FAN
24F45551
1 1
FRONT

9-9
9. COVER PWB ASSY/POWER SUPPLY-BALLAST/DUCT (BS) (NP210)/

CASE (BS) ASSY (NP210)
(1) Remove the one screw 1 and take out the COVER PWB ASSY.
(2) Remove the four screws 2 and take out the assemblies of POWER SUPPLY-BALLAST/DUCT (BS)
(NP210)/CASE (BS) ASSY (NP210).
(3) Remove the DUCT (BS) (NP210) and the three screws 3 and take out the POWER SUPPLY-BALLAST.
COVER PWB ASSY

81S35FD2
POWER SUPPLY-BALLAST
3N101351 1 SRW008
2 SRW007
2 SRW007
5 SRW009
3 SRW005

24FU0811
DUCT (BS) (NP210)

24F45811
2 2 2 1 2
FRONT

9-10
10. POWER SUPPLY-DC

(1) Remove the one screw 1 and the five screws 2 and take out the POWER SUPPLY-DC.
1 SRW023
2 SRW004
2 SRW004
POWER SUPPLY-DC
3N101341
2 2 2 2 1 2
FRONT

9-11
11. DC FAN/THERMOSTAT
(1) Remove the three screws 1 and take out the DC FAN ASSY.
(2) Remove the one screw 2 and take out the THERMOSTAT.
(3) Remove the two screws 3 and take out the DC FAN.
1 SRW003
3 SRW118
HOLDER EX-FAN
24F45452
THERMOSTAT
7N970080
DC FAN
3N170147 SPRING BM
2 SRW120
1 1 1
FRONT

9-12
12. BOTTOM COVER ASSY
SPRING (FOOT F)
24H66531
FOOT LEVER
24G09301
FOOT R
24F45741
FOOT F
24F44611
SPACER (FOOT R)
24J36881
BOTTOM COVER ASSY
9N999371 (NP215)
CUSHION (FOOT F) 9N999381 (NP210)
24J35431 9N999391 (NP115)
9N999401 (NP110)
9N999481 (NP216)

9-13
13. FOCUS RING/ZOOM BASE/ZOOM RING/ZOOM LENS

(1) Remove the three screws 1 and take out the FOCUS RING.
(2) Remove the three screws 2 and take out the ZOOM BASE.
(3) Take out the ZOOM RING/ZOOM LENS.
ZOOM LENS
12JT4022
ZOOM RING
24F45521
ZOOM BASE
24F45531
2 SRW104 1 SRW102
2 SRW104
FOCUS RING
24F45511
1 SRW102

9-14
14. PLATE BL/HOLDER PLATE-BL/PLATE DMD-MASK/DMD/DMD PWB ASSY/

HEATSINK-DMD ASSY
(1) Remove the one screw 1 and take out the PLATE BL/HOLDER PLATE-BL.
(2) Remove the two screws 2 and take out the PLATE DMD-MASK/DMD/DMD PWB ASSY/HEATSINK-DMD
ASSY.
1 SRW105
2 SRW101 HEATSHINK-DMD ASSY
24HS4921
DMD
3N770164 (NP216/215/210) PLATE BL
3N770165 (NP115/110) 24H66371
SPRING DMD
24H66471 HOLDER PLATE-BL
24F45562
DMD PWB ASSY

81S35FB1
PLATE DMD-MASK
24H66461

9-15
15. CW SASSY
(1) Remove the two screws 1 and take out the CW ASSY.
(2) Remove the three screws 2 and take out the COLOR WHEEL.
1 SRW109
2 SRW111
HOLDER CW
24F45542
COLOR WHEEL
12JT3011
1 1

9-16
16. COVER ENGINE/MIRROR

(1) Remove the four screws 1 and take out the assemblies of COVER ENGINE/MIRROR.
(2) Remove the SPRING M1 and take out the MIRROR.
1 SRW106
COVER-ENGINE
24F45461
MIRROR
12JT4041
CUSHION (COVER A)
24J24571
SPRING-M1
24H66381
1 1 1 1

9-17
17. LT SASSY/CONDENSER LENS 1/CONDENSER LENS 2/CONDENSER LENS 3

(1) Remove the two screws 1 and the one screw 2 and the take out the SPRING-LT/PLATE MASK-LT/LT
SASSY.
(2) Take out the CONDENSER LENS 1/CONDENSER LENS 2/CONDENSER LENS 3.
1 SRW108
2 SRW107
SPRING-LT
24H66401
CONDENSER LENS 1
12JT4051
PLATE MASK-LT
24H66411
CONDENSER LENS 2
12JT4061
3 SRW103
LT-SASSY
CONDENSER LENS 3 82S35131
12JT3952
3 SRW103
1 1 2 3 3

9-18
DISASSEMBLY
• Main body (Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110)

BRACKET (I/O) (NP210)
24H66582 SRW016 LAMP COVER ASSY (NP210)
SRW016 SHIELD (I/O) (NP210)
SRW017 24H66591 24FU0791
SRW010
STUD (D-SUB) SRW013 SRW019
SRW016
STUD (D-SUB)
TOP COVER ASSY
SRW012
9N999251 (NP215/215G)
9N999261 (NP210G)
SRW016 9N999271 (NP115G)
9N999281 (NP110/110G)
9N999291 (NP215J)
9N999301 (NP210J)
9N999311 (NP115J)
CASE (PS) ASSY 9N999321 (NP110J)
24FU0801
SRW016
SRW014
SPEAKER SRW006
6N300029
MAIN PWB ASSY
LAN PWB ASSY
(Refer to P5-16)
81S35N01
(Applicable to NP215 series)
COVER PWB ASSY
81S35FD2 SRW008
SRW007 DUCT EXT (NP210)
SRW007 24F45761
SRW003
POWER SUPPLY-BALLAST LAMP SASSY
3N101351 HOLDER LAMP FAN DC FAN (Option)
24F45551 3N170148
SRW004
SRW009 SRW023
CWC PWB ASSY
SRW005 SRW004 81S35FC2
SRW111
SRW115
SRW001
DUCT LAMP
24FU0811
24F45501
POWER SUPPLY-DC 24H66661
DUCT (BS) (NP210) SRW005 SRW011
3N101341 SRW001
24F45811
SRW003 HOLDER EX-FAN
SRW118 24F45452
ENGINE ASSY
LENS GUARD (NP210)
24F45791
THERMOSTAT
7N970080
DC FAN SPRING BM
3N170147 LENS CAP (NP210)
24F45801
BOTTOM COVER ASSY

SRW011 9N999371 (NP215) SRW011 STRAP W
SRW120 9N999381 (NP210) 24J23901
9N999391 (NP115)
9N999401 (NP110)

10-1
DISASSEMBLY
• Main body (Applicable to NP216)
LAMP COVER ASSY (NP210)

24FU0791
SRW010
SRW016
SRW019
SRW012
SRW016 TOP COVER ASSY
SRW016 9N999451 (NP216/216G)
SRW017 9N999461 (NP216J)
SRW016 CASE (PS) ASSY

24FU0891
SRW006
SPEAKER
6N300029
MAIN SASSY
81T45FA1 (USA version)
81T46FA1 (NP215 other than USA version)
COVER PWB ASSY SRW008
81S35FD2
SRW007 DUCT EXT (NP210)
SRW007 24F45761
SRW003
POWER SUPPLY-BALLAST LAMP SASSY
3N101351 HOLDER LAMP FAN DC FAN (Option)
24F45551 3N170148
SRW004
SRW009 SRW023
CWC PWB ASSY
SRW005 SRW004 81S35FC2
SRW111
SRW115
SRW001
DUCT LAMP
24FU0811
24F45501
POWER SUPPLY-DC 24H66661
DUCT (BS) (NP210) SRW005 SRW011
3N101341 SRW001
24F45811
SRW003 HOLDER EX-FAN
SRW118 24F45452
ENGINE ASSY
LENS GUARD (NP210)
24F45791
THERMOSTAT
7N970080
DC FAN SPRING BM
3N170147 LENS CAP (NP210)
24F45801
SRW011 BOTTOM COVER ASSY SRW011 STRAP W

SRW120 9N999481 (NP216) 24J23901

10-2
DISASSEMBLY
• Engine sassy
SRW105
SRW101
HEATSINK-DMD ASSY
24HS4921 PLATE BL
24H66371
DMD
3N770164 (NP216/215/210) HOLDER PLATE-BL
3N770165 (NP115/110) 24F45562
SPRING DMD
24H66471
CONDENSER LENS 3
DMD PWB ASSY 12JT3952
81S35FB1
SRW109 ZOOM LENS

12JT4022
PLATE DMD-MASK
24H66461 ZOOM RING
24F45521
SRW111
ZOOM BASE
24F45531
CONDENSER LENS 2
12JT4061 SRW104
CUSHION (COVER A) SRW102
CONDENSER LENS 1
HOLDER CW 24J24571
COLOR WHEEL 12JT4051
24F45542
12JT3011 LT-SASSY MIRROR
82S35131 12JT4041
SPRING-LT
24H66401
SPRING-M1
24H66381 FOCUS RING
PLATE MASK-LT
24F45511
24H66411
COVER ENGINE
24F45461 SRW102
SRW107
SRW108 SRW106

10-3
PACKAGING
1. CARTON BOX (1)
Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part code Q'ty Remarks
1 CARTON BOX (NP215) 24MV2911 1
• Carton box (NP215) assembly procedures : Bottom plane assembly box

(Applicable to U/G/J version)
Insert 1pc.
Completion

11-1
PACKAGING
2. CARTON BOX (2)

1 PROTECTION BAG 24M16172 1

3 SPACER (NP215) 24MV2901 1
4 SERVICE ENVELOPR SASSY 1
• Inser a spacer in the carton box and then the set.

(Applicable to U/G version)
Enter the set in the protection bag. Enter a spacer in the carton box.
1 2 Enter a spacer so that

its large hollow section
is positioned on the left
side in the recesses.
3
Put it so that the joint line of the

carton box is positioned on the
left of this side.
Enter the set on the top of the spacer.
Enter the protection sheet (containing accessories)
Enter the set so that the lens section

is positioned near the large hollow
section of the spacer.
Enter accessories. Accommodation order

1 POWER CORD
2 CABLE RGB
3 REM-T HAND UNIT
Position for REM-T unit accommodation
2. Position for cable RGB accommodation

1. Position for power cord
• Enter it so that the plug side positioned on this side.
accommodation
• Enter it from the side where
no plug is located.

11-2
PACKAGING
3. CARTON BOX (3)

1 PROTECTION BAG 24M16172 1

3 SPACER (NP215) 24MV2901 1
4 SOFT CASE (NP110) 24BS8021 1
5 SERVICE ENVELOPE SASSY 1
• Inser a spacer in the carton box and then the set.

(Applicable to J version)
Enter the set in the protection bag. Enter a spacer in the carton box.
1 2 Enter a spacer so that

its large hollow section
is positioned on the left
side in the recesses.
3
Put it so that the joint line of
the carton box is positioned
on the left of this side.
Enter the set on the top of the spacer. Enter the soft case on the top of the set.
4 Enter the soft case so that

Enter the set so that the lens section is lock section is positioned
is positioned near the large hollow on the lens side.
section of the spacer.
Enter accessories. Enter the carton sheet (containing accessoried).
5
Position for REM-T
unit accommodation
Position for power Press and crush the convex section of the carton
cord accommodation sheet from the right and left toward the center.
Position for cable RGB accommodation

• Enter ir in the order of Cable  REM-T.
• Enter it so that the plug side positioned on this side.

11-3
PACKAGING
4. CARTON BOX (4)

1 TYPE, PP 60MM*45M (C) 9R030013 1

TYPE, PP 60MM*50M 92203187 OR
Applicable to U/G version Applicable to J version
The direction of
the LENS.
Side plate
50~60mm
1
Method of tape adhesion conforms to Type I Adhesion.

Tape ashesion on both sides of the center section :
Approx. 50mm~60mm

11-4
PACKAGING
5. LABEL (CARTON)
1 LABEL (CARTON) (NP215) 24L68571 2

1 LABEL (CARTON) (NP215G) 24L68611 2
1 LABEL (CARTON) (NP215J) 24L68941 2
2 SERIAL LABEL 16761791 1
• Stick the label on the carton box.
Joint part of the carton box
Stick the [label (carton) (NP***)] on the specified position. (2 pcs.)

Note : It shall be stuck so that it covers "[ ]" mark printed on the carton box.
Stick [serial label] on the specified place. (1 pc.)
Note : 1. Stick it after confirm that it is the same No. as the

set adhesion.
2. Stick it, adjusted to the printed mark of [", Conceal the "Label" print.

11-5
PACKAGING
6. CARTON SHEET
1 CARTON SHEET (NP215) 24MV2891 1
• Carton box (NP215) assembly procedures

Fold 4 pcs.
1
Insert 2 pcs.
Fold 2 pcs.
Inset 2 pcs.
J version only, Not folded
Fold 4 pcs.
Insert 2 pcs. Fold 2 pcs.
Inset 2 pcs.
• In regard to the accommodation order for Inset 2 pcs.
accessoried, refer to the next page and thereafter. Completed. (Completed after the
accessories have been entered.)

11-6
PACKAGING
7. ACCESSORIES (U Version)
Applicable to NP216/215/110
Storage order Part name Part code Q'ty
1 WARRANTY (US) (PORTABLE) 7N8P9621 1
2 REGISTRATION CARD (USA) C 7N8P1493 1
3 NP216 QUICK GUIDE (U/G) 7N8N0731 1
4 NP216 IMPORTANT INFO (U) 7N8N0751 1
5 NP216 CD-ROM 7N951471 1
• Enter the accessories in the assembled carton sheet according to the descriptions above.
 In regard to the accommodation order, "1" is put on the top and "5" on the bottom in the carton sheet.
* Align the characters so that they are legible correctly.

REM-T HAND UNIT RD-443E 7N900881 1
A
LABEL (INSTA CARE) (NP215) 24L68581 1
B POWER CORD U3 L1.8 V 7N080236 1
BATTERY CARBON (GP24S) AAA 2
C
CABLE RGB 1.8M JO 7N520052 1
A: Put the REM-T hand unit RD-443E on the spacer in the right recesses of the set.
B: Put the power cord on the spacer in the left recesses of the set.
C: Put the RGB cable on the spacer on the right side of this side of the set.
 Insert the battery carbon (GP24S) AAA in the bag of the cable RGB 1.8M.
* For all of A, B, and C, no directions are specified.

Lens position
A
B
A
• Confirm all safety marks of the power code.
• Stick the label (insta care) (NP215) on the back of the
REM-T HAND unit RD-445E bag with the cello tape 12W*35M.
(Use the tape by cutting approx. 30~50mm)
 Stick the Lable (insta care) (NP215) as face its back side.

11-7
PACKAGING
8. ACCESSORIES (G Version)
Applicable to NP216/NP215G/210G/115G/110G
1 NP216 QUICK GUIDE (U/G) 7N8N0731 1
2 NP216 QUICK GUIDE (G2) 7N8N0741 1
3 NP216 IMPORTANT INFO (G) 7N8N0761 1
4 NP216 IMPORTANT INFO (U) 7N8N0751 1
5 NP216 CD-ROM 7N951471 1

A REM-T HAND UNIT RD-443E 7N900881 1
B POWER CORD U3 L1.8 10A V 7N080022 1
C

* For all of A, B, and C, the position for accommodatation identical with that for the
service envelope SASSY of the U version.

11-8
PACKAGING
9. ACCESSORIES (J Version)
Applicable to NP216J/215J/210J/115J/110J
SERVICE ENVELOPE SASSY
1 PROJECTOR WARRANTY (SHEET) 7N8P7491 1
2 NP216 QUICK FUIDE (J) 7N8N0951 1
3 NP216 U/M (ABR EDITION) (J) 7N8N0941 1
4 NP216 CD-ROM 7N951471 1
5 VLC REGISTRATION (C) 7N8P0975 1

A REM-T HAND UNIT RD-444J 7N900891 1
B POWER CORD J3 L3.0 7A V 7N080125 1
C
D SOFT CASE (NP110) 24BS8021 1
Lens position
A
D C

11-9
PART LIST
SPARE PART LIST

NP216/NP215/NP115/NP110
ITEM PART NO. DESCRIPTION PHOTO(or art work) REMARK
1 12JT3011 COLOR WHEEL(PA70)
2 12JT4023 ZOOM LENS(PA91)
3 24F44611 FOOT F(PB90)
4 24F45511 FOCUS_RING(PA91)
5 24F45521 ZOOM_RING(PA91)
6 24F45531 ZOOM_BASE(PA91)
7 24F45542 HOLDER_CW(PA91)
8 24F45741 FOOT R(NP210)

12-1
PART LIST
9 24F45761 DUCT EXT(NP210)
10 24F45791 LENS GUARD(NP210)
11 24F45801 LENS CAP(NP210)
12 24FU0791 LAMP COVER ASSY(NP210)
13 24J23901 STRAP W
14 24J35431 CUSHION (FOOT F)(PB90)
15 24L46401 CAUTION LABEL(SERVICE)
24L69771 LABEL (CARTON)(NP216) (example:NP215) NP216 ONLY
24L68571 LABEL(CARTON)(NP215) NP215 ONLY

16
17 24L68581 LABEL(INSTA CARE)(NP215)

12-2
PART LIST
18 24M16172 PROTECTION BAG
19 24MV2891 CARTON SHEET(NP215)
20 24MV2901 SPACER (NP215)
21 24MV2911 CARTON BOX(NP215)
22 3N101341 POWER SUPPLY-DC PA91
23 3N101351 POWERSUPPLY-BALLAST PA91
24 3N170147 DCFAN T80T12MS10A7-52J72
25 3N170148 DCFAN BM4520-04W-B39-LB1
3N770164 MOS .55XGA S450 DMD(-9) NP215/NP216 ONLY
26
3N770165 MOS .55SVGA S450 DMD(-9) NP110/NP115 ONLY

12-3
PART LIST
27 6N300029 SP 50X50 12H 7W L80K
28 7N080236 POWER CORD U3 L1.8 V
29 7N520052 CABLE RGB 1.8M JO
30 7N8P1493 REGISTRATION CARD(USA)C
31 7N8P9621 WARRANTY(US)(PORTABLE)
32 7N8N0731 NP216 QUICK GUIDE(U/G)
33 7N8N0751 NP216 IMPORTANT INFO(U)
34 7N900881 REM-T HAND UNIT RD-443E
35 7N951471 NP216 CD-ROM

12-4
PART LIST
36 7N970080 THERMOSTAT UP62G-90 L130B
NP215/NP115/NP110 ONLY
In regard to the part numbers, refer to
MAIN PWB ASSY Method of Adjustments on P5-16.
37
81T45FA1 MAIN SASSY NP216 ONLY
38 81S35FB1 DMD PWB ASSY
39 81S35FC1 CWC PWB ASSY
40 81S35FD1 COVER PWB ASSY
41 82S35131 LT_SASSY
9N999452 TOP COVER ASSY(NP216) NP216 ONLY

42
9N999481 BOTTOM COVER ASSY(NP216) NP216 ONLY

43

12-5
PART LIST
44 81S35N01 LAN_PWB PWB ASSY NP215 ONLY

12-6
PART LIST
SPARE PART LIST

NP216G/NP215G/NP210G/NP115G/NP110G
3 24F44611 FOOT F(PB90)
8 24F45741 FOOT R(NP210)

12-7
PART LIST
9 24F45761 DUCT EXT(NP210)
11 24F45801 LENS CAP(NP210)
13 24J23901 STRAP W
24L69781 LABEL (CARTON)(NP216G) (example:NP215) NP216G ONLY
24L68611 LABEL(CARTON)(NP215G) NP215G ONLY
16 24L68601 LABEL(CARTON)(NP210G) NP210G ONLY

12-8
PART LIST
19 24MV2901 SPACER (NP215)
23 3N170147 DCFAN T80T12MS10A7-52J72
24 3N170148 DCFAN BM4520-04W-B39-LB1
3N770164 MOS .55XGA S450 DMD(-9) NP216G/NP215G/NP210G ONLY
25
3N770165 MOS .55SVGA S450 DMD(-9) NP115G/NP110G ONLY
26 6N300029 SP 50X50 12H 7W L80K

12-9
PART LIST
27 7N080022 POWER CORD E3 L1.8 10A V
29 7N8N0731 NP216 QUICK GUIDE(U/G)
30 7N8N0741 NP216 QUICK GUIDE(G2)
31 7N8N0751 NP216 IMPORTANT INFO(U)
32 7N8N0761 NP216 IMPORTANT INFO(G)
34 7N951471 NP216 CD-ROM

12-10
PART LIST
NP215G/NP210G/NP115G/NP110G ONLY
MAIN PWB ASSY In regard to the part numbers, refer to
Method of Adjustments on P5-16.
36
81T46FA1 MAIN SASSY NP216G ONLY
9N999452 TOP COVER ASSY(NP216) NP216G ONLY
41 9N999261 TOP COVER ASSY(NP210) NP210G ONLY
9N999481 BOTTOM COVER ASSY(NP216) NP216G ONLY
42 9N999381 BOTTOM COVER ASSY(NP210) NP210G ONLY
43 81S35N01 LAN_PWB PWB ASSY NP215G ONLY

12-11
PART LIST
SPARE PART LIST

NP216J/NP215J/NP210J/NP115J/NP110J
24BS8021 SOFT CASE(NP100)
3 24F44611 FOOT F(PB90)

12-12
PART LIST
8 24F45741 FOOT R(NP210)
9 24F45761 DUCT EXT(NP210)
11 24F45801 LENS CAP(NP210)
13 24J23901 STRAP W
24L70051 LABEL (CARTON)(NP216J) (example:NP215) NP216J ONLY
24L68941 LABEL(CARTON)(NP215J) NP215J ONLY
16 24L68951 LABEL(CARTON)(NP210J) NP210J ONLY

12-13
PART LIST
19 24MV2901 SPACER (NP215)
23 3N170147 DCFAN T80T12MS10A7-52J72
24 3N170148 DCFAN BM4520-04W-B39-LB1
3N770164 MOS .55XGA S450 DMD(-9) NP216J/NP215J/NP210J ONLY
25
3N770165 MOS .55SVGA S450 DMD(-9) NP115J/NP1110J ONLY

12-14
PART LIST
26 6N300029 SP 50X50 12H 7W L80K
27 7N080125 POWER CORD J3 L3.0 7A V
29 7N8P0975 VLC REGISTRATION(C)
30 7N8P7491 PROTECTOR WARRANTY(SHEET)
31 7N8N0951 NP216 QUICK GUIDE(J)
32 7N8N0941 NP216 U/M(ABR EDITION)(J)
34 7N951471 NP216 CD-ROM

12-15
PART LIST
NP216J/NP210J/NP115J/NP110J ONLY
MAIN PWB ASSY In regard to the part numbers, refer to
Method of Adjustments on P5-16.
36
81T45FA1 MAIN SASSY NP216J ONLY
9N999462 TOP COVER ASSY(NP216J) NP216J ONLY
41 9N999301 TOP COVER ASSY(NP210J) NP210J ONLY
9N999481 BOTTOM COVER ASSY(NP216) NP216J ONLY
42 9N999381 BOTTOM COVER ASSY(NP215) NP210J ONLY

12-16
PART LIST
43 81S35N01 LAN_PWB PWB ASSY NP215J ONLY

12-17
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
NP215s CONNECTION DIAGRAM
POLA
PORJ
2.0mm 7P (07P-SAN)
CWC PWB 1.5mm 7P (A1501WV0-7PS)
7NW7W032
7N400516
(PWC 4719C)
PODB2 LAN PWB
2.0mm 5P (05P-SAN) +3.3V 1 1 +3.3V
1
P3P3V 2 7NH5W001 1 P3P3V PODB GND 2 2 GND (PWC 4695)
GND 1685-28 2 TXD 3 1685-26 3 TXD
3 GND 1.5mm 5P (A1501WV0-5PS)
CWINDEX 3 RXD 4 4 RXD
4 CWINDEX 7N400514 Applicable to NP215
RA 50mm 4 RESET 5 55mm 5 RESET
5 RA
3.3VSCP 5 FWRITE 6 6 FWRITE
3.3VSCP
INIT 7 7 INIT
1 OUTA POCW
2 OUTB 1.0mm 4P (04FMN-BMTR-A-TB(LF)(SN))
3 OUTC 7N400624
180mm 4 CENTER
DMD PWB
(PWC 4719B)
3443-28 1 VCC_FANB POFB
Color Wheel Unit 2 1.5mm 3P (A1501WV0-3PS)
GND
135mm 3 FANB TACH 7N400512
1 P3P3V 2 VCC2
Sirocco 3 P3P3V 4 GND
Air 3443-28 1 VCC_FANA POFA 5 GND 6 GND
Flow 2 GND 1.5mm 3P (A1501WV0-3PS) 7 MBRST[8] 8 MBRST[7]
115mm 3 FANA TACH 7N400512 9 MBRST[9] 10 MBRST[6]
POF01
POLB2 1.0mm 78P (PC78E66BBA003) 11 MBRST[10] 12 MBRST[5]
2.0mm 2P (02P-SJN) 7N400625 13 MBRST[11] 14 MBRST[4]
DET PWB 1 7NH2W002 1061-28 POLB 15 MBRST[12] 16 MBRST[3]
1 GND
(PWC 4719D) 2 2 COVERDE
1.5mm 2P (A1501WV0-2PS) MAIN PWB 1 2 1 2 17 MBRST[13] 18 MBRST[2]
7N400511 19 MBRST[14] 20 MBRST[1]
160mm (PWC 4719A) 3 4 3 4
21 MBRST[15] 22 MBRST[0]
• • • •
• • • • 23 GND 24 GND
Lamp House 25 SSP0_TXD 26
• • • •
79mm BIMETAL 3266-24 1 POBM 27 SSP0_RXD SSP0_CSZ1
PS_OUT • • • •
90∞C/60∞C 2 2.0mm 2P (A2001WR0-2PS) 29 GND 28
PS_IN • • • •
130mm 7N400351 31 SSP0_CLK EXT_ARSTZ
• • • •
• • Card • • 33 GND 30 GND
3239O-20 • • Edge • • 35 DDB_P_1 32 GND
• • • • 37 DDB_N_1 34 GND
5.4mm 2P (PCL-P*2M-1*) 1685-26 1 POSP 39 DDB_P_3 36 DDB_P_0
AUD+ 1.5mm 2P (A1501WV0-2PS) • • • •
LAMP UNIT 2 41 DDB_N_3 38 DDB_N_0
80mm AUD- 7N400511 • • • •
5.4mm 2P (PCL-P*2F-1*) 75 76 75 76 43 GND 40 DDB_P_2
77 78 77 78 45 SCB_P 42 DDB_N_2
3239O-2 130mm 7W SPEAKER 47 SCB_N 44 GND
49 DDB_P_5 46 DCKB_P
X** 51 DDB_N_5 48 DCKB_N
3.96mm 4P (B2P4-VH) 1 53 DDB_P_7 50 DDB_P_4
1 LAMP_DET/RXD PODC
55 DDB_N_7 52 DDB_N_4
BALLAST POWER X** 2 1061-28 2 GND 1.5mm 5P (A1501WV0-5PS)
57 DDA_P_6 54 DDB_P_6
3 3 7N400514
SUPPLY UNIT 1.25mm 5P VCSM+3.3V 59 DDA_N_6 56 DDB_N_6
4 200mm 4 LAMP_EN/SCI
X** (SM05B-GHS-TB) 5 61 DDA_P_4 58 DDA_P_7
5 LAMP_PW/TXD
3.96mm 3P (B2P3-VH) 63 DDA_N_4 60 DDA_N_7
65 GND 62 DDA_P_5
1015-22 175mm+ (Core) 67 SCA_P 64 DDA_N_5
69 SCA_N 66 GND
71 DDA_P_2 68 DCKA_P
1 1 VCCS+6.5V POPA 73 DDA_N_2 70 DCKA_N
PO** PO** 2 2 GND 75 DDA_P_0 72 DDA_P_3
2.0mm 7P (A2001WR0-7PS)
3.96mm 3P (B2P3-VH) 2.0mm 7P 3 1061-24 3 VCCS+15 7N400502 77 DDA_N_0 74 DDA_N_3
(B7B-PH-K-S) 4 4 VCCS+15 76 DDA_P_1
DC POWER 5 105mm 5 GND 78 DDA_N_1
6 6 GND POF02
SUPPLY UNIT 1.0mm 78P (PC78E66BBA003-PCB)
7 7 PFC_ON
-NC-
"Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC"

13-1
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
NP216 CONNECTION DIAGRAM

POLA
2.0mm 7P (07P-SAN)
PORJ 7NW7W032 LAN PWB
+3.3V 1 1 +3.3V (PWC 4695)
1.5mm 7P (A1501W0-7PS)
GND 2 2 GND
PODB2 7N400551
TXD 3 1685-26 3 TXD
2.0mm 5P (05P-SAN) RXD 4 4 RXD
CWC PWB 7NH5W001 1 P3P3V RESET 5 RESET
5 55mm
(PWC 4719C) P3P3V 1 1685-28 2 GND PODB FWRITE 6 6 FWRITE
GND 2 1.5mm 5P (A1501WV0-5PS)
(PWC 4732C) CWINDEX 3 3 CWINDEX INIT 7 7 INIT
4 RA 7N400549
RA 4 50mm
3.3VSCP 5 5 3.3VSCP
IO PWB (PWC 4733)
POMI
2.0mm 20P
1 R_OUT 2 GND
1 2 1 2 3 G_OUT 4 GND
1 OUTA POCW 3 4 3 4 5 B_OUT 6 GND
2 OUTB 1.0mm 4P (04FMN-BMTR-A-TB(LF)(SN)) 5 6 5 6 7 V_OUT 8 GND
3 OUTC 7 8 7 8 9 H_OUT 10 GND
7N400624
180mm 9 10 9 10 11 RXD_P 12 GND
4 CENTER
11 12 11 12 13 TXD_P 14 GND
13 14 13 14 15 J_SW 16 GND
15 16 15 16 17 A_R_OUT 18 GND
3443-28 1 VCC_FANB POFB 17 18
17 18 19 A_L_OUT 20 GND
2 GND 1.5mm 3P (A1501WV0-3PS) 19 20 19 20
Color Wheel Unit 135mm 3 FANB_TACH 7N400547
Sirocco
POFA DMD PWB
3443-28 1 VCC_FANA
Air 1.5mm 3P (A1501WV0-3PS) (PWC 4719B)
2 GND
Flow 115mm 7N400547 (PWC 4732B)
3 FANA_TACH
POF01 1 P3P3V 2 VCC2
POLB2 MAIN PWB 1.0mm 78P (PC78E66BBA003)
2.0mm 2P (02P-SJN) 3 P3P3V 4 GND
DET PWB 7NH2W002
(PWC 4732A) 7N400625 5 GND 6 GND
(PWC 4719D) POLB 7 MBRST[8] 8 MBRST[7]
1 1061-28 1 GND 9 MBRST[9] 10 MBRST[6]
(PWC 4732D) 2 1.5mm 2P (A1501WV0-2PS)
2 COVERDET 1 2 1 2 11 MBRST[10] 12 MBRST[5]
160mm 7N400546
3 4 3 4 13 MBRST[11] 14 MBRST[4]
• • • • 15 MBRST[12] 16 MBRST[3]
• • • • 17 MBRST[13] 18 MBRST[2]
Lamp House • • • •
79mm 19 MBRST[14] 20 MBRST[1]
3266-24 1 PS_OUT POBM • • • • 21 MBRST[15] 22 MBRST[0]
BIMETAL 2.0mm 2P (A2001WR0-2PS) • • • •
2 PS_IN 23 GND 24 GND
90°C/60°C 130mm 7N400351 • • • • 25 SSP0_TXD 26
• • • • 27 SSP0_RXD SSP0_CSZ1
3239O-20 29 GND 28
• • • •
5.4mm 2P (PCL-P*2M-1*) POSP Card 31 SSP0_CLK EXT_ARSTZ
1685-26 1 AUD+ • • • •
1.5mm 2P (A1501WV0-2PS) Edge 33 GND 30 GND
LAMP UNIT 2 AUD- • • • • 35 DDB_P_1 32 GND
80mm 7N400546
5.4mm 2P (PCL-P*2F-1*) • • • • 37 DDB_N_1 34 GND
• • • • 39 DDB_P_3 36 DDB_P_0
3239O-2 130mm 75 76 75 76 41 DDB_N_3 38 DDB_N_0
77 78 77 78 43 GND 40 DDB_P_2
X** 45 SCB_P 42 DDB_N_2
3.96mm 4P (B2P4-VH) 1 1 LAMP_DET/RXD
X** 2 2 GND PODC 47 SCB_N 44 GND
BALLAST POWER 1061-28 1.5mm 5P (A1501WV0-5PS) 49 DDB_P_5 46 DCKB_P
1.25mm 5P 3 3 VCSM+3.3V
SUPPLY UNIT (SM05B-GHS-TB) 4 4 LAMP_EN/SCI 7N400549 51 DDB_N_5 48 DCKB_N
200mm 53 DDB_P_7 50 DDB_P_4
X** 5 5 LAMP_PW/TXD
3.96mm 3P (B2P3-VH) 55 DDB_N_7 52 DDB_N_4
57 DDA_P_6 54 DDB_P_6
59 DDA_N_6 56 DDB_N_6
1015-22 175mm+α (Core) 61 DDA_P_4 58 DDA_P_7
63 DDA_N_4 60 DDA_N_7
65 GND 62 DDA_P_5
1 1 67 SCA_P 64 DDA_N_5
PO** PO** VCCS+6.5V 69 SCA_N 66 GND
2 2 GND
3.96mm 3P (B2P3-VH) 2.0mm 7P 71 DDA_P_2 68 DCKA_P
3 1061-24 3 VCCS+15 POPA
(B7B-PH-K-S) 4 4 73 DDA_N_2 70 DCKA_N
DC POWER VCCS+15 2.0mm 7P (A2001WR0-7PS)
5 5 75 DDA_P_0 72 DDA_P_3
SUPPLY UNIT 105mm GND 7N400356
6 6 77 DDA_N_0 74 DDA_N_3
GND 76 DDA_P_1
7 7 POF02
PFC_ON 1.0mm 78P (PC78E66BBA003-PCB) 78 DDA_N_1
-NC-

13-2
BLOCK DIAGRAM
NP215s BLOCK DIAGRAM

Computer OUT IC1006 MAIN PWB DMD PWB
NJM2581M LVDS
V 20pair
6dB Amp.
H
2X LVDS
IC1004 RGB/ IC1801 DMD
SN74CBT3306 V
IC1008 YUV DAD2000 Series450
Computer IN BUS H
RGB/YUV
DMD CONTROL
V SYNC SWITCH
AD9883
H SYNC A/D
RGB or COMPONENT CLK,HS,VS CLK/HS/VS
CONVERTER
KEY
IC1003 I2C MATRIX KEY/LED DET PWB
TC9WMB1FK LAMP
P&P COVER
LDE
YUV SW
IC1206 IC2004 16
CLK,HD,VD
M29W640GB IC1401
µ PD64012 FLASH ROM
VIDEO I2CS
VIDEO IN DECODER
IC1402 IC2001
DDP2230 IC1603
CVBS IC1204 IC1203 400MHz 100MHz
M24C32 CY62137FV30 CDCD5704
NJM2233BV Z8612912SSG 24.576MHz 32K EEPROM SRAM XCG
Sig. SEL Closed Caption
(Option) (Option)
320MHz IC1601
S-VIDEO IN I2CS 20MHz CDCDLP223
SV-Y
SV-C
IC2204 IC1604 20MHz
ADM3202 RXD/TXD EDX5116ACSE
PC RS-232C Pre- XDR DRAM
CONTROL DRIVER Therm.
(Exhaust)
Cooling
Cir. RESET
RXD/TXD
Therm.
IC2205 (Intake)
SN74CBT3125 BIMETAL
IC2402/5
BUS SWITCH
AMC6821
(Option)
FAN Control ADC ADC ADC IC2602
(Back up) PMD1000
IC2606 BALLAST
I2C uPD78F0511 Control
BEEP SUB CPU
+12V
AUDIO IN
IC2601 +15V
PWM*2
+15V
rpm*2
PS/BALLAST
L/R IC2206 IC2208 POWER PQ200WNA
NJW1109V TPA3007D1PW KEY ENABLE Reg.
Attenuator Audio Amp.
IC2210 +6.5V
+/- IR UPC393GR
Drive
COMPARATOR
RXD/TXD
Circuit
i t
LAMP
IR UNIT
FANA
LAN PWB
(Option) N FANB
SPEAKER 7W CWC-REM PWB

14-1
BLOCK DIAGRAM
NP216 BLOCK DIAGRAM

VCCS+5V MAIN PWB RGB_SEL2 LVDS DMD PWB
20pair
Computer IN 2 H SYNC 2X LVDS
H2 SYNC IC1013
SN74CBT3306C V SYNC
V2 SYNC
SYNC SEL. IC1801 DMD
VCCS+5V RGB_SEL1
DAD2000
DMDCONTROL
Series450
IC1012
IS24C02D IC1004
P&P SN74CBT3306C RGB/YUV
SYNC SEL. KEY
IC1008
RGB/YUV
Computer IN1 AD9985AKSTZ MATRIX
H1 SYNC RGB2
V1 SYNC IC1011 A/D
RGB1 EL4342IL CONVERTER
RGB SEL. CLK/HS CLK/HS/VS
/VS LED
IC1003 I2CS2
IS24C02D
P&P
VIDEO CVBS
YUV
IC2004
IC1401 I2CS
IN
IC1206
PD64012
MX29LV640DBTI DDP2230
FLASH ROM
SV-Y VIDEO CLK/HD/VD IC1603
S-VIDEO DECODER 400MHz 100HMz
SV-C CDCD5704
IN XCG
IC1402 IC2001
M24C32 CY62137FV30
IC1204 IC1203 32K EEPROM SRAM
24.576MHz 320MHz
NJM2233BV Z8612912SSG
Sig. SEL Closed Caption IC1601
(Option)
20MHz CDCDLP223
(Option)
L/R
Video I2CS2
Audio_In
IN I2CS
BEEP 20MHz
Computer1 IC2206 IC1604
L/R IN1 NJW1142V
Audio_In K4Y50084UE
Attenuator XDR DRAM
Computer2 L/R IN2
Audio_In
A_MUTE2
DC
L : JACK_IN/
Therm. Pre-Cooling
(Exhaust) Cir. H: JACK_OFF
IC2607
Computer OUT ST1S10PUR
Therm.
IC2610 (Intake)
IC1006 TC7WB66FK
NJM2581M IC2205 RXD/TXD
SN74CBT3125 IC2602
6dB Amp. BALLAST
BUS SWITCH PMD1000
Control
ADC ADC ADC
I2C SW IC2606
PC CONTROL
uPD78F0511 +12V +15V
SUB CPU
A_MUTE
I2CS
IC2204
RXD/TXD
IC2601 +15V
ADM3202
PQ200WNA
RS-232C RXD/TXD IC2208
DRIVER TPA3007D1PW
Reg. +6.5V
Audio Amp. Tr ENABLE
IC2210
PWM*2
GND: 10 UPC393GR
rpm*2
POWER
IO PWB +/- COMPARATOR
KEY IR
Audio_Out J_SW
L/R OUT Drive
Tr Circuit
L/R OUT A_MUTE2
Tr
SPEAKER 7W

14-2
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

15-1
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

15-2
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

15-3
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

15-4
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

15-5
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

15-6
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

15-7
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

15-8
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

15-9
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

15-10
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

15-11
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

15-12
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

15-13
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
15-14
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
15-15
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

15-16
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
15-17
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
15-18
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
15-19
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
15-20
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
15-21
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
15-22
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

15-23
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

15-24
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

15-25
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
15-26
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

15-27

Service Manual: Better Service Better Reputation Better Profit

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual: Better Service Better Reputation Better Profit

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual: Better Service Better Reputation Better Profit

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MODEL

Copyright Cautions for Maintenance Service

NEC DISPLAY SOLUTIONS, LTD.

(2) The contents of this manual are subject to change

1 Provide for carton (or cardboard paper)

LAMP COVER SWITCH

Insert the carton

Insert it in the red

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS.................................................................................................................................... 2-1

USERS MANUAL ..................................................................................................................................................1

METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS............................................................................................................................ 5-1

SERVICEMAN MODE.......................................................................................................................................... 6-1

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................................................... 8-1

METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY............................................................................................................................. 9-1

PART LIST......................................................................................................................................................... 12-1

CONNECTION DIAGRAM................................................................................................................................. 13-1

BLOCK DIAGRAM............................................................................................................................................. 14-1

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS.................................................................................................................................. 15-1

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

MISE EN GARDE: AFIN DE REDUIRE LES RISQUES D' ELECTROCUTION, NE

Ce symbole a pour but de prévenir I' utilisateur de la présence d'

Ce symbole a pour but de prévenir l' utilisateur de la présence d'

During servicing carefully observe the following. 5. LAMP

2. BE CAREFUL OF ELECTRIC SHOCK 7. SERVICING

The NP210 is not distributed in North America.

• DLP and BrilliantColor are trademarks of Texas Instruments.

DOC Compliance Notice (for Canada only)

Machine Noise Information Regulation - 3. GPSGV,

Disposing of your used product

WARNING TO CALIFORNIA RESIDENTS:

Fire and Shock Precautions

Remote Control Precautions

Note for US Residents

Health precautions to users viewing 3D images

About High Altitude mode

About Copyright of original projected pictures:

Turkish RoHS information relevant for Turkish market

2. Installation and Connections...................................................................... 9

3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)............................................... 18

4. Convenient Features. .................................................................................... 29

5. Using On-Screen Menu. ............................................................................... 43

Power cable VGA signal cable Remote control Batteries (AAAx2)

For North America only

For customers in Europe:

For other countries than North

 Introduction to the Projector

Congratulations on Your Purchase of the Projector

Features you'll enjoy:

About this user's manual

 Part Names of the Projector

Focus Ring Controls

Adjustable Tilt Foot Lever

AC Input Ventilation (inlet)

4. LAMP Indicator (→ page 70, 73) 9. ENTER Button

5. AUTO ADJ. Button (→ page 26) 10. EXIT Button

 Part Names of the Remote Control

Remote Control Precautions

Operating Range for Wireless Remote Control

Remote sensor on projector cabinet